Revit Architecture 2008

Metric Tutorials

April 2007

Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. AutoCAD 2008 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC Color Guide computer color simulations used in this product may not exactly match DIC Color Guide, DIC color Guide Part 2 identified solid color standards. Use current DIC Color Guide Manuals for exact color reference. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).

Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Part 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . Performing Common Tasks as You Work in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Part 2

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Linking a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Part 3

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 . 112 . 115 . 121 . 126 . 130 . 130 . 133 . 136 . 137 . 140 . 146 . 146 . 149 . 153

Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Contents | v

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 . 160 . 165 . 169 . 172 . 172 . 177 . 179 . 181 . 183 . 189 . 192 . 195 . 195 . 196 . 199 . 204 . 204 . 206 . 206 . 210 . 211 . 215 . 215 . 221 . 223 . 227 . 230 . 231 . 238 . 238 . 244 . 248 . 250 . 252 . 254 . 258 . 259 . 260 . 260 . 262 . 278 . 278 . 283 . 283 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292 . 294 . 296

Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . Creating a Component Legend Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

vi | Contents

Working with Revisions . . . . Importing from Other Applications . Importing Image Files . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 297 . 299 . 299 . 300 . 301

Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Part 4

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Viewing a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exploring the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Fill Pattern Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material . . . . . . . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type . Creating a View Plan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Render Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Daylights and Rendering the View . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 . 324 . 327 . 333 . 335 . 337 . 337 . 339 . 340 . 341 . 346 . 346 . 350 . 352 . 355 . 358 . 358 . 360 . 364 . 365 . 367 . 367 . 370 . 372 . 376 . 376 . 377 . 379 . 382 . 382 . 383 . 384 . 384 . 387 . 388 . 388 . 390 . 391 . 394 . 394

Chapter 9 Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Chapter 12 Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Contents | vii

Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 399 . 401 . 403 . 406 . 406 . 408 . 411 . 411 . 415 . 417 . 420 . 422 . 429 . 429 . 436 . 440

Part 5

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Creating a Daylight Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Part 6

Creating

Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Creating 3D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Creating a Family . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Origin of a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Priorities for Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Family Parameters and Family Types . . . . Lock geometry to reference planes . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 2D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Door Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Door Plan View Components . . . . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry . . . . . . Assigning Materials to the Door Components . . . Defining New Door Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Window Parameters . . . . . Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry . . Assigning Materials to the Window Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 . 480 . 481 . 481 . 483 . 484 . 490 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 495 . 496 . 497 . 498 . 503 . 506 . 508 . 511 . 512 . 513 . 519 . 521 . 526 . 538

viii | Contents

Defining New Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Complex Model Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Family Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening . Modelling a Complex Wall Opening . . . . . . . . . Creating Window Frame Geometry . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Window Sash Parameters . . . . . . . . Defining Visibility Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry . . Creating the Glass Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Formulas to Define Width . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Default Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Sill Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Sill Families into the Window Family . . . . Creating a Length Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing the Sill Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project Environment . . . . . Creating a Furniture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters . . . . . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Defining New Furniture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Baluster Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Baluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run . . . . . . . Creating Profile Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Rail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Reveal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Host Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path . . . . . . . . . Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Room Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol . Adding the New North Arrow to a Project . . . . . . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family . . . . . . . Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family . . . . . . Appendix A - Exploring Family Templates . . . . . . . . . Model Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotation Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Titleblock Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 540 . 545 . 547 . 548 . 551 . 554 . 561 . 565 . 566 . 567 . 570 . 573 . 574 . 574 . 575 . 575 . 577 . 578 . 579 . 580 . 581 . 582 . 583 . 584 . 591 . 594 . 603 . 609 . 612 . 614 . 614 . 616 . 618 . 618 . 618 . 619 . 620 . 621 . 622 . 624 . 626 . 626 . 628 . 628 . 630 . 631 . 631 . 634 . 642 . 644 . 644 . 650 . 653 . 654 . 668 . 669

Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Planning a Parametric Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

Contents | ix

Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 672 . 673 . 676 . 676 . 682 . 686 . 690 . 693 . 693 . 695 . 698 . 707 . 707 . 708 . 712 . 712 . 716 . 721 . 726 . 728 . 728 . 733 . 735 . 735 . 738 . 738 . 739

Part 7

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744 . 744 . 753 . 755 . 755 . 758 . 760 . 764 . 764 . 765 . 768 . 774 . 774 . 778 . 780 . 782 . 785 . 787 . 788 . 789 . 791 . 792 . 793 . 794

Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

Chapter 19 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 20 Area Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

x | Contents

Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804

Chapter 21 Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 . 808 . 813 . 815 . 815 . 816 . 819 . 822 . 822 . 825 . 825 . 828 . 832 . 834 . 837 . 842 . 846 . 846 . 853 . 857 . 859 . 860 . 863 . 866 . 866 . 870 . 870 . 876 . 880 . 882 . 889 . 893 . 895 . 899 . 900 . 904 . 904 . 905 . 913 . 916 . 917 . 921 . 932 . 938 . 939 . 940 . 942 . 942 . 943

Chapter 22 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

Chapter 23 Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay . Sketching Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning and Modifying Walls . . . . Adding Structural Columns and Beams . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams and Girders . . . Adding Joists and Purlins . . . . . . . . . Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels . . . Defining New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating the Existing Design . . . . . . Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation . . . . . Creating a Framing Elevation . . . . . . . Adding Structural Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 24 Structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903

Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950

Contents | xi

Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 950 . 950 . 953 . 957 . 961 . 965 . 970 . 970 . 980 . 987

Chapter 26 Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969

Chapter 27 Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998

Chapter 28 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 . 1003 . 1011 . 1014 . 1017 . 1019 . 1020 . 1021 . 1024 . 1026 . 1027

Part 8

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Render Scene Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 . 1034 . 1036 . 1038 . 1039 . 1041 . 1041 . 1045 . 1047 . 1048 . 1053 . 1055 . 1056 . 1059 . 1059 . 1060 . 1064 . 1067 . 1069 . 1071 . 1072 . 1074

Chapter 29 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033

xii | Contents

Getting Started

1

1

2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2008 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to locate the training files specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to display the titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for the tutorials. The training files, like the tutorials, are bundled with the product. Training files are provided to help you work through the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.

Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.

Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the dataset with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt.

For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates. 10 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Architecture templates.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 11 Select DefaultMetric.rte, and click Open. 12 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Architecture is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Architecture 2008?
The Revit Architecture platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Architecture model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Architecture 2008 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Architecture uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Architecture uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.

Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

■ ■ ■ ■

Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. In Revit Architecture, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Revit Architecture 2008 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Architecture, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Architecture. Project: In Revit Architecture, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

Element: When creating your project, you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Architecture classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.
■ ■

A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.

Understanding the Basics | 7

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Revit Architecture 2008 terms

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Architecture is much easier.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

The Title Bar
2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based.

The Menu Bar
3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom.

Navigating the User Interface | 9

To choose commands. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. Then. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. notice a door type is specified. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. On the left side of the Options Bar. click the command name to start the command. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. and click. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. TIP For example. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. place the cursor over the menu name. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options.The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. and View. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. While working in the drawing area. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click Toolbar. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. Edit.

You use the Type Selector in two ways. you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector. the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. if you intend to add a door. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. notice the list of walls that are available. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall.The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. For example. Within the drawing area. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . First. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. If you select the Door tool. you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. 9 In the Type Selector.

■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: includes commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered 3D images ■ 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . immediately below the Type Selector.The Show Design Bars dialog is displayed. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. containing buttons grouped by function. 11 Click OK. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu.

reports. families. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . walls. and groups. elevations. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. delete. and rename views. You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. click the tab. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu. select Views (all). sheets. schedules. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. family category (doors. 3D). Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for executing conceptual massing commands Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab: includes commands for creating construction industry information To access the commands within a tab. In the Project Browser. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans. families. windows). and group name.

You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. click Cancel. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area.■ ■ To open a view. ■ 13 In the Type Selector. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. The browser is dockable. After you create a browser organization scheme. Do not click. click Wall. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. double-click the name.

It highlights when the cursor is over it. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. The Status Bar also provides information. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. regarding selected components within a view. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view.In the bottom left corner of the window. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . Revit Architecture 2008 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2008 Help." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 20 Press TAB. In the Status Bar. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. In this case. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. in conjunction with Tooltips. When you place the cursor over a component. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view.

you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. There are several ways to access zoom options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ View menu commands Zoom command on the View toolbar Shortcut keys Wheel mouse Dynamic View dialog In the following steps. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. You can also press SHIFT+F1. Use zoom commands to adjust the view 1 In the tutorials. Windows: From any window. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. Toolbar: From the Toolbar.Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. For example. There are several tools that help you find information. You can use this tri-pane. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. find a keyword on the Index tab. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. After you are familiar with how to complete these tasks. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the unique tasks for each tutorial. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. Click the Help button. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips.rvt. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands. click . Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture In this exercise. If there is no Help button displayed. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 6 On the View toolbar.The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom options menu. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 17 . 8 Click in the drawing area. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command. and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and the shortcut keys for each option. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x).

click . you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically. expand Views (all). To modify or add snap increments. display along the ends. expand Floor Plans.10 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel. If you do not have a wheel mouse. and drag the cursor. on the View toolbar. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. and drag the cursor in the drawing area. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click Zoom. Similar controls. bottoms. 11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. press and hold CTRL. 12 Use one of the following methods to zoom: ■ ■ In the Dynamic View dialog. hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse button on a wheel mouse). roll the wheel to zoom the view. Small blue dots. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view. When drawing or modifying a building model. On a wheel mouse. Without clicking in the dialog. and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen. as shown: Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. and select the wall. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within the view. and double-click 2nd Flr. called drag controls. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Cnst. referred to as shape handles. 14 Enter ZR. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. ■ Resize elements using drag controls 13 In the Project Browser. These are the drag controls.

18 Select the Craftsman02 table. 16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 19 . for example. After selecting the element to be moved. Move an element 17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. click (Move). Some commands. click to specify the starting position. such as Move and Copy. to lengthen the wall. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. 19 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. and click again to specify the ending position.15 Click and drag the left control. you want to move the table closer to the wall. and on the Edit toolbar. require two clicks to complete the command. In this case.

20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. The Undo command allows you to undo several commands by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar. 23 On the Undo menu. 21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. as shown. select the second item in the list. click the drop-down menu next to . you decide that you like the table better where it was placed originally. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. In this example. Select the plant. The table moves down and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. Move. All changes you make to a project are tracked. and drag it on top of the table.20 Click next to the lower wall. Undo commands 22 On the Standard toolbar.

click Lines. click Modify. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 21 . or press and hold CTRL and enter Z. on the Standard toolbar. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Some commands. End a command 24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 26 To end the command. Press ESC twice. On the Design Bar. click the Undo command. such as the Lines command. 27 Close the file without saving your changes.NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines.

22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

Developing Your Designs 2 23 .

24 | Chapter 2 Developing Your Designs .

As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. 25 . and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. If the grid moves.Creating a Building Information Model 2 In this tutorial. the wall or column will move with it. For example. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. a central service core. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. a curtain wall. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. it is good practice to test the constraints. As you develop the building design. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2008. a wall or a column can be constrained to grid. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them.

Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. The project datasets have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. 26 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. you load any required family type that is not in your project. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. In practice. such as a door or window. from the product library. subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project dataset. After the beginning exercises. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building.

you use a template that is provided with the software. but contains no geometry. under Create new. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. NOTE If you create a project without a template. duplicate them. locate the Project Browser. schedules. expand Views (all). The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. For this project. and residential. you design inside the elevation markers. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. levels. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. change their properties. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. The new project opens. 2 In the New Project dialog. select Project. reflected ceiling plan views. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. Creating the Project | 27 . Create the project from the default template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you will use the default template. West.rte. notice four elevation markers. In the drawing space in the right pane. and Elevations (Building Elevation). and elevation views created in the project by the template. In views that display elevation markers. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. expand Floor Plans. construction. click Training Files. The project is stored as a single file. and delete them. and click Browse. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. and settings. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. and customize the project as necessary. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. 3 Under Template file. verify the second option is selected. sheets. The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. 7 If necessary. To create the project file. East. Ceiling Plans. These views are customizable: you can rename them. views. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. with an RVT extension.Creating the Project In this exercise. and families in your project. South. 5 Click OK. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type.

heights. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. You can add. and duplicate levels. display in the south elevation. enter Revit Retail Building. content and building model reports. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Metric. 16 Click Save. After you modify the two default levels. 10 In the Project Browser. and other properties.rvt) is selected. such as schedules and legends. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). 28 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. the view you see in the drawing area. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. double-click South. delete. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. 13 In the file window. 15 For Save as type. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. as well as change their names. you will want to save your work frequently. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. verify Project Files (*. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). verify that Level 1 displays as bold. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Schedules/Quantities. 14 For File name. will be accessible from the Project Browser. and on the General tab.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. You change the names of the 2 default levels. Groups. notice the Legends. and click Training Files. Two level lines. “Adding Project Levels” on page 28. Sheets (all). view the Save Reminder interval. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. Families. As you design and document your building model.8 Under Floor Plans. created by the template.

enter 01 Entry Level. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. doors. and double-click South.You learn how the levels are locked. enter 00 Foundation. and press ENTER. Adding Project Levels | 29 . expand Views (all). 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. and press ENTER. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. and press ENTER. so that when one level moves. enter 0 mm. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. and press ENTER. or constrained. the other levels move and change with it. When you begin designing. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. to each other. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. enter -1800 mm. and windows within the building model.

17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed green line displays alignment with the two existing levels. This is the Options Bar. and enter 02 Level. When you add the new level. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Level. click Rename. 19 Click OK. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. and for Offset. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. right-click Level 3. under Floor Plans. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. 18 In the Project Browser. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. As you move the cursor. Next. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. not all the tabs are visible. enter 3750 mm. 23 On the Options Bar. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. verify Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. verify and Make Plan View are selected. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. By default. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. view the Design Bar. and move it slightly upward. and click Basics. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. you add another level. 16 Enter 3750 mm.Next. right-click. If it does not. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. click . A dashed green line indicates where the new level will be drawn. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. and then move it up. and click OK. using a different option. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. and press ESC. click Level. which should display by default. 21 In the Project Browser. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. 14 Click Plan View Types.

Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. If you create a level by copying it. as shown. or on the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. 27 Press ESC. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. 26 Rename the level 03 Level. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created.25 Click to place the level line. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. Adding Project Levels | 31 . and rename the corresponding views.

Notice that by moving the top level. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. Move the cursor up. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. click Grid. under Floor Plans. “Creating a Column Grid” on page 32. specify a start point for the grid line. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. In a later exercise. If you select a level and click its lock. 32 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. click Modify. and specify the grid line endpoint. Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. so that if the roof elevation changes. Create vertical column grid lines 1 On the Project Browser. By using the grid to control placement of columns. the column height changes as well.Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. When the grid is complete. On the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. all the levels move. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. double-click 00 Foundation. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. select . and you can move them independently. the levels are no longer constrained. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. In the following exercise.

On the Options Bar. 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Enter A. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. and click to place the line. for Offset. for Offset. Click to place the grid line. click . click Grid. enter 4500 mm. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. and press ENTER. and click to place the line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. and click to place the line. ■ The first vertical grid bay is created. Next. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. and for Offset. Creating a Column Grid | 33 . enter 7500 mm. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. enter 7500 mm. On the Options Bar. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line.

10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. ■ ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. On the Options Bar. and specify the grid line endpoint. The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. click Grid. Dimension the grid and lock the grid bay spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. click Grid. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A.8 Press ESC. as shown. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. click Dimension. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. click and specify an Offset of 0 mm. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm.

15 Starting with grid line A. and press ESC. and press ESC. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. The pins are hidden. 22 While pressing CTRL.14 On the Options Bar. and select grid line A. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will ''grow'' out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. 18 On the Design Bar. 24 Press ESC. click and drag the blue circular grip up. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. 23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. Creating a Column Grid | 35 . By pinning these central grid lines. 21 Press ESC. click Dimension. click Modify. select grid lines C and 3. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. click . until it is closer to grid line 5. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. until it is closer to grid line A. Two pins display on the grid lines. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. At the left endpoint of the grid line. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension.

32 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B.■ If necessary. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 38 In the Project Browser. 36 On the Standard toolbar. click Structural Column. click Camera. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. lock it. for From. click Finish. 40 On the Options Bar. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. select all of the column grid lines. Add columns to the grid 26 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. 41 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. select grid line A. 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select UC-Universal Column: 305x305x97UC. under Floor Plans. click Activate Dimensions. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. click (Grid Intersection). 30 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). 34 On the Options Bar. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. For Place By. click twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. and unlock it. and on the Options Bar. 36 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . If it is unlocked. double-click 01 Entry Level. 33 While pressing CTRL. Next. select 01 Entry Level. 37 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. 28 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. and press ENTER. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. 35 Enter 9000 mm. 27 In the Type Selector. 31 Press ESC. ■ 29 While pressing CTRL.

and click to place the target point of the camera. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. Creating a Column Grid | 37 .

expand 3D Views. under Views (all). displays in bold under 3D Views. The current view.42 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can view all of the columns. named 3D View 1 by default. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. enter To Building. and then copy them to the subsequent levels. Adding Beams In this exercise. 43 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. “Adding Beams” on page 38. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. 44 Save the drawing. 38 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ ■ Right-click 3D View 1. and click OK.

3 Click the Detail Level icon . 7 On the Options Bar. The view is currently set to Coarse. 4 Click Medium. click Grid. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. 6 In the Type Selector. click Beam. view the icons on the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. the icon on the right side of the scale. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. click Finish. 10 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Options Bar. Adding Beams | 39 . The selected grid lines display as red.When you finish adding beams. under Floor Plans. 8 While pressing CTRL. select each grid line. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected.

you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. under Floor Plans. click to view the default 3D view of the structure. 14 Select one of the beams. and click OK. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. right-click. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. press and hold SHIFT. 13 On the Design Bar. When you created the columns. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. select 02 Level. which only extend to the 5th level. select 06 Roof. click Modify. 12 On the View toolbar. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. and click Select All Instances. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. 17 In the Select Levels dialog.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. double-click 01 Entry Level.

under Constraints. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. view the Top Level Constraint parameter. 06 Roof. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. resize the view to see the entire structure. All of the columns display as red. 22 On the Options Bar. right-click. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. 24 Press ESC. and click OK. under Instance Parameters. and click Select All Instances. click . You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. under 3D Views. select 06 Roof.Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. 25 In the Project Browser. 21 With the column selected. and click Element Properties. Adding Beams | 41 . 20 Click Cancel. for Top Level. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and if necessary. double-click To Building. right-click.

and click Coarse. but want to display them in less detail. as lines only. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. under Elevations. and click Hidden line. 42 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing. double-click South. Click Detail Level. area. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines.View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. 28 Save the drawing. “Adding Braces” on page 43.

Adding Braces | 43 . To better add the braces to the structure. you add braces to the four corners of the building structure. Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. double-click 00 Foundation. 4 Select the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. double-click the elevation marker arrow.Adding Braces In this exercise. verify Attach to Grid is selected. 3 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. you create 8 framing elevation views. click Framing Elevation. and press ESC to end the command.

click to specify the start point of the brace. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. but when placed the braces are placed. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. After you add the final brace. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. and when the endpoint snap displays. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. 8 In the Type Selector. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. press ESC. 6 Use the grips that display on the crop region to adjust both sides of the view. 44 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Brace. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. 11 Using the same technique. 7 On the Design Bar.The associated framing elevation view displays. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model.

Adding Braces | 45 . IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. The height of the roof lowers.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. and press ENTER. delete it and redraw it. enter 18000 mm. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams.

enter 12000 mm. under Floor Plans. as shown in the 3D view below. 46 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 21 Select grid line A. and press ENTER. enter 10000 mm. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. but this time add them from right to left. under Floor Plans. click twice to restore the original level heights.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. 14 On the Standard toolbar. Add brace in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. double-click 00 Foundation. 19 In the Project Browser. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. click Activate Dimensions. and press ENTER. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. and on the Options Bar. double-click 00 Foundation.

“Creating a Foundation” on page 47. and drag it away from the structure. 24 In the Project Browser. and roof height. 28 On the Standard toolbar. Creating a Foundation | 47 . and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. under Elevations. double-click 00 Foundation. double-click South. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. 31 Save the drawing. lock it. under 3D Views.23 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D. 26 In the Project Browser. beams. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. 29 In the Project Browser. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. grid size. Test connectivity of the columns. and if necessary. under Floor Plans. click 3 times to restore the locked dimension.

click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select Unlimited. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project.Before you can add the pile caps. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. and press ESC. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. under Extents. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. click Edit. 48 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. The foundation pile cap now displays. for Level. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. A warning displays. double-click 00 Foundation. and how to load specific families into a project. In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. Verify the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900 mm. 9 Close the warning dialog. where you must adjust the view range before you can view them. under Floor Plans. In the View Range dialog. The pile cap has been added in the view. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. under View Depth. and expand Structural Foundation. and drag it to the drawing area. click Training Files. Click OK twice. After you load the pile cap family. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes).rfa. for View Range. and click View Properties. expand Families.

press ESC. Creating a Foundation | 49 . When the final pile cap is placed. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. 13 In the Project Browser. and click Create Similar.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. under 3D Views. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation.

and braces that you used to create the building structure. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. View the round hollow columns in the building model. You load new column. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. 4 On the Design Bar. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. double-click 3D. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column: 508x12. and brace families into the project. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. click Training Files.14 Click File menu ➤ Save. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. and click Select All Instances.5CHS. “Changing Structural Member Types” on page 50. beam. under 3D Views. 2 Select one of the columns. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. you change the types of the columns. All of the columns in the building model display as red. right-click.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. beams. 3 In the Type Selector.

Change the brace type 8 On the Design Bar. 17 While pressing CTRL. and click OK twice. 15 In the Project Browser. double-click Elevation 1-a. click . click Edit/New. click Modify. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS203. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. select M_Round Bar: 75 mm. The brace type changes. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. and changing its size parameter. right-click. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). select M_Round Bar: 25mm. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Selector. 13 In the Name dialog. Changing Structural Member Types | 51 . click .Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. 18 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Options Bar. and click OK. but it is the only size of its type currently available. select the braces in the elevation one by one. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. under Dimensions. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model.9. click Duplicate. click Brace. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. the braces as well as the beams change. This not the size that you want to use. 19 On the Design Bar. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75 mm. In the following steps.2x101. you change the brace type. for Type. 9 In the Type Selector. enter 75 mm. and click Select All Instances.6x15. for d. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. 7 On the Design Bar. enter 75 mm. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. Some other Revit Architecture elements. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab.rvt. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. To create floors. and railings are also created from sketches. ■ On the Sketch tab. such as roofs. You are now in the sketch editor. Adding Floors In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. and elements in the current view display as gray.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. stairs. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Lines. click Floor. “Adding Floors” on page 52. you must sketch them first in a sketch editor. double-click 01 Entry Level.

5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important. Do not lock the dimension. If the grid changes size. and click above the 1st horizontal grid line to place the dimension. Do not lock the dimensions. Leave this dimension unlocked. click . the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Adding Floors | 53 . At the top left corner of the grid. 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. as you resize it in the next steps. past the first vertical grid line. click Dimension. and then the 1st horizontal grid line.■ ■ On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the left. select the top floor line. Using a crossing window.

Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300 mm. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. Next. At the top left corner of the grid. Select and lock the dimensions. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. click Quit Sketch.6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. on the Design Bar. select the top floor line. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. They display on the floor sketch. and change their values to 300 mm. this is how you would do it. using a different sketching technique. 54 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click the temporary dimension value. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Move the cursor to the right dimension. 8 Select the floor. and then press ESC. press ENTER. click . You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. and on the Options Bar. If you needed to modify the floor after you created it. Enter 300 mm. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor.

The 02 Level floor displays. and lock the dimensions. click Lines. click Finish Sketch. and press ESC. Adding Floors | 55 . The 02 Level floor sketch displays. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown.Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. Select the three remaining floor lines. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 1500mm. click . double-click 02 Level. click Floor. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. and for Offset. under Floor Plans. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. On the Options Bar. and move the cursor until the dashed green line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. 14 On the Design Bar. 13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. On the Sketch tab.

click Align . 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. and a lock icon displays. double-click 03 Level. 56 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. under Floor Plans. 20 On the Tools toolbar. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. click Floor. 18 On the Options Bar. click . and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. click Lines. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. 16 On the Design Bar. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate the Align command is active. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. Click the locks to constrain the floors.Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser.

View the floors in the 3D building model and test connectivity 36 In the Project Browser. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. 41 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay. click Finish Sketch. double-click {3D}. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. and click Shading with Edges. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. click Model Graphics Style. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floors. 31 In the Project Browser. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. 35 On the Design Bar. 40 Select grid line A. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. and on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. under Views ➤ 3D Views. under Floor Plans. 39 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. and click Activate Dimensions. and click OK. 32 Select the floor. double-click 05 Roof Garden. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. Adding Floors | 57 . and enter 4500 mm. and lock the edges. select 05 Roof Garden. click Edit. under Floor Plans. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level.24 On the Design Bar. double-click 00 Foundation. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. and unlock it. Alternatively. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 37 On the View Control Bar. 38 In the Project Browser. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name.

“Adding a Roof ” on page 58. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. under 3D Views. 43 On the Standard toolbar. 58 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. double-click {3D} to view the grid. you add a sloped roof over the corner of the building. 44 In the Project Browser. and lock the dimension that you unlocked in a previous step. click to restore the grid bay size to 7500 mm. double-click 00 Foundation. 45 Proceed to the next exercise.42 In the Project Browser. Adding a Roof In this exercise.

click Training Files. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Defines Slope. or the perimeter. The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and specify which roof edges will define the roof slope. enter 1800 mm. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Lines. Click . and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof.To create the roof. double-click 06 Roof. ■ ■ For Offset. under Floor Plans. When a green dashed line displays. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. and press ENTER. click to place the roof line. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Adding a Roof | 59 . of the roof in a plan view. 3 On the Design Bar. You sketch the footprint.

move the cursor slightly below the grid line. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. For Offset. and lock it. click to place the roof line. and lock it. 7 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Defines Slope. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. enter 0 mm.6 Select grid line 5. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line. ■ 60 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 10 Press ESC. and when the green dashed line displays. click (Trim/Extend). The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker.

and on the Options Bar. and click OK. place a dimension between the roof slope edges and the grid to constrain them. double-click 06 Roof. View the roof 19 On the View toolbar. Adding a Roof | 61 . 13 On the Design Bar. click .00. click Finish Roof. under Dimensions. View the roof 14 On the View toolbar.12 Optionally. enter 4. under Floor Plans. click . 15 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. for Slope Angle. 17 Select the roof. click . Change the roof slope 16 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Element Properties dialog.

so if you resize the grid. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. enter Retail Storefront. for Spacing. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ Click . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you add a curtain wall. enter 2100 mm. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. for Join Condition. 3 In the Type Selector. When you duplicate a type. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. Under Construction. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. click 01 Entry Level. select Horizontal Grid Continuous.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 6 In the Name dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. for Spacing. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . “Adding a Curtain Wall” on page 62. click Training Files.rvt. for Type. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the curtain wall resizes with it. enter 1050 mm. Click OK twice. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 20 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. The type is saved in the project. select Curtain Wall: Storefront. click Wall. click Duplicate.

■ ■ ■ For Level. but opt to keep the constraint when prompted. select 01 Entry Level. and move it slightly toward the building interior. 11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. If you want to hide them. If the grid moves. click to place the 1st curtain wall segment. These dimensions are not in a sketch. you can delete the dimension. the locks ensure that the curtain wall will move with it. and lock the dimensions. 13 On the Design Bar. select 05 Roof Garden. and trim each curtain wall segment. enter 600 mm. 9 Move the cursor over the grid line 1 near its endpoint. dimension both corners of the curtain wall to the grid. For Offset. 10 When a green dashed line displays. click (Trim/Extend). so they remain in the view. click Dimension. For Height. Adding a Curtain Wall | 63 .

and click Shading with Edges. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Click Model Graphics Style. and click Hidden Line. “Creating an Entrance” on page 65. 15 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click To Building.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. and click Medium. click Detail Level. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. All the elements in the list are selected. click All. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. click Training Files.Creating an Entrance In this exercise. and click None. clear one element to clear all the elements. 2 On the View Control Bar. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. 5 Under Visibility. 6 Under Visibility. Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. To better work with the curtain wall panels. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 4 On the Model Categories tab. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). under Views (all). under the element list. Creating an Entrance | 65 . and double-click South.

click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. 14 In the Select View Template dialog. select System Panel: Solid. click Modify. as these usually represent internal pilasters. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. 10 Select 1 panel. and click OK. 7 Click OK. 15 Zoom to the drawing extents. 12 With the panels selected. select Architectural Elevation.Do not select Columns. 9 On the Design Bar. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. in the Type Selector. press and hold CTRL. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown.

If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 17 In the Project Browser. 18 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. you see that the visibility of many of the Model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. in this case an architectural elevation. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. double-click {3D}. Creating an Entrance | 67 .16 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. double-click To Building. 19 In the Project Browser.

click Add or Remove Segments. select another mullion to the right. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown.20 In the Project Browser. and click to select it. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. click Curtain Grid. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. double-click South. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. 24 On the Options Bar. 23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line.

29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. 30 On the Design Bar. and unpin it. 33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion.27 On the Options Bar. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). 34 On the View toolbar. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. click . 32 In the Type Selector. Creating an Entrance | 69 . 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. and view the new entrance. select One Segment. click Modify.

press TAB until it is selected. and unpin it. 70 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . remove the mullions from the 2nd. 38 Press DELETE. 39 Using the same process. select it. 3rd. and 4th panels. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion.36 Zoom in to the first panel.

Creating a Drop Ceiling | 71 . double-click 01 Entry Level. “Creating a Drop Ceiling” on page 71. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. open the North elevation. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. select 02 Level. for Underlay. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click in the view. under Floor Plans. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise.40 Optionally. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. and click View Properties. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. 5 Click OK. under Graphics.

which indicates you must draw the callout. The cursor changes to a pencil. select the grip closest to the callout head.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select the callout. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. click Callout. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. 72 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. and specify a point to complete the callout.

15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. enter Display Area. and specify a point past grid line D. 14 Press ESC.9 In the Project Browser. and click Flip Section. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 73 . right-click. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 12 Draw a section line. Move the cursor horizontally to the left. 16 Select the section box. 13 Select the section line. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. click Section. ■ ■ Specify the section start point just below the right framing elevation marker. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. and click Rename.

and click Rename. Lock both alignments. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. expand Sections (Building Section). and lock the dimension. select Wall faces. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm rectangular wall inside the grid lines. select Basic Wall: Interior-135mm Partition (2 hr). and click OK. 25 Press ESC.17 In the Project Browser. click Wall. click Ceiling. 27 On the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. right-click Section 1. 32 In the Type Selector. click (Align). Click . click Dimension. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Sketch. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600 mm Grid. under Ceiling Plans. 21 In the Type Selector. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click . and lock the dimension. 18 In the Rename View dialog. 30 In the Project Browser. 26 On the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. select Finish Face: Exterior. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. under Floor Plans. 19 In the Project Browser. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. For Loc Line. 28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. 24 On the Tools toolbar. enter Section Display Area. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. for Prefer. 74 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. click Finish Sketch. The ceiling grid displays inside of the walls. 41 On the Options Bar. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 75 . double-click Section Display Area. 36 Press ESC. 39 On the View Control Bar. 37 On the Design Bar. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. click . and click to select the walls.■ Click Click . 38 In the Project Browser under Sections (Building Section). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. ■ 34 Sketch the ceiling within the walls.

42 In the Element Properties dialog. 48 Modify the ceiling grid: ■ To start the tiles on a wall edge. 46 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. ■ 76 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK. under Ceiling Plans. under Constraints. click Move. for Height Offset From Level. select any horizontal or vertical ceiling grid line. and specify a distance. and click OK. To position the grid. 47 In the Project Browser. 43 On the Design Bar. for Top/Base. double-click 01 Entry Level. select a grid line. Select the 02 Level Floor. 44 Select the ceiling. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. press TAB until you select the wall chain. for Base Offset. click Attach. On the Options Bar. on the Tools toolbar. click Modify. enter 2700 mm. and click to select the walls. enter 2700 mm. and click . and drag it to the interior face of the horizontal or vertical wall.

click (Rotate). 50 In the Element Properties dialog. 53 Click OK. 58 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. under Construction.View the ceiling structure 49 Select the ceiling. for Structure. Rotate the ceiling grid 56 Select the center ceiling grid line. click Edit/New. and click . 52 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Edit. 51 In the Type Properties dialog. for Type. view the ceiling structure. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 77 . 54 In the Type Properties dialog. 57 On the Options Bar. click Cancel. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. click Cancel.

59 Click. 61 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. 78 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and press ENTER. enter 45. 60 Press ESC.

click Shadows Off. 66 Proceed to the next exercise. you must cut an opening through the floors on each level. under 3D Views. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. and then copying it to the 05 Level. 65 Optionally. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. 64 On the View Control Bar. “Creating Multi-Level Stairs” on page 79. double-click To Building.View the building in 3D with shadows 62 In the Project Browser. You begin by creating a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. After the stairs and stairwell have been copied to levels 01-05. 63 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows On. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 79 .

click Ref Plane. 2. When the temporary dimensions indicate the cursor is 1500 mm from the grid line intersection. double-click 01 Entry Level. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. C. click to specify the start point of the reference plane. 2 Zoom in to the area defined by grid lines B. Move the cursor to the left along grid line 3. 5 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor over the intersection of grid lines C and 3. ■ 80 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair_. and 3. 3 On the View Control Bar. You will create the stair in the area between these columns. click Training Files. and specify the reference plane endpoint on grid line B. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. Move the cursor vertically.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. and specify a point to create first stair flight. 7 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. click Stairs. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 81 .■ Draw another reference plane 1500 mm from grid line 2.

8 On the Options Bar.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. beyond the end of the stair. select Basic Wall: Generic . ■ 12 Draw walls around the stair. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. 16 Using the same technique. 11 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. 82 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . including its handrails. click Wall. 10 In the Type Selector. select Finish Face: Interior. and specify a point. with a message that 20 risers have been created and that 0 remain. 9 On the Design Bar. and lock the alignment. and select the 2nd reference plane. click Align. Move the cursor down. and click to select it. The complete stair displays.225mm Masonry. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. 14 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. Click . 15 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. 13 On the Tools toolbar.

Select the bottom of the stair. select both reference planes. click Dimension. The stair and walls move to the left. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. select Wall faces. Click Modify. a warning displays. 23 While pressing CTRL. and specify a point away from the wall. enter 1200 mm. and press DELETE. and press DELETE. 19 Select the dimension. and press ENTER.17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select the interior face of the wall. 18 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Prefer. click . select the dimension value. Select the wall. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 83 . Lock the dimension. 20 Click OK to delete the dimension. Because the dimension is constrained. 21 Select the stair. 22 On the Standard toolbar. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints.

click Door. click Modify. 25 In the Type Selector. for Base Constraint. 28 On the Design Bar. Click OK. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. press and hold the left mouse button. Click OK. click . 31 Select the stair. verify Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. select all 4 walls. Under Constraints. select 00 Foundation. for Multistory Top Level. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. 26 On the Options Bar. For Top Constraint. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. 33 On the View toolbar. but if you view the top level of the building. . TIP To flip the door swing. 29 While pressing CTRL. select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm. 27 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. and move the cursor to spin the building model.Add a door to the stairwell 24 On the Design Bar. click 34 On the View toolbar. and click . clear Tag on Placement. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the left corner of your screen. 35 Press SHIFT. and click 30 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . select 05 Roof Garden. 84 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

Copy the door to multiple levels 46 Select the door. ■ 40 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. under Floor Plans. 41 On the Tools toolbar. 43 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. and lock the alignments. 42 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. 37 Zoom in to the stairs. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 85 . 38 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Create a shaft opening 36 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. 48 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Align. 44 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. 47 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 45 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. and lock the alignment. . 39 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click .

and click OK. and click OK. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. and spin the building so you can see the roof. 52 In the Project Browser. . By offsetting the base. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. ■ For Top Constraint. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. 57 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. . Under Constraints. under Floor Plans. click . click . 55 On the View toolbar. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . click 51 On the View toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. for Base Offset.49 In the Select Levels dialog. View the shaft and stair 50 On the View toolbar. 53 Select the shaft. enter 300 mm. click 56 On the View toolbar. 86 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

58 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. “Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height” on page 87.rvt. 59 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. click Training Files. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 87 . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof Level. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level.

You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. 5 In the Type Selector. select Core Face: Interior. under Graphics. 2 Right-click in the view. Select the dimension value. click Modify. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 Change the dimension value: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and click OK. and press ENTER. Enter 1050 mm.225mm Masonry. click Wall. under Floor Plans. 9 Dimension the space between grid line C and the left face of the wall on grid line 3. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . select 06 Roof. click Dimension. select Basic Wall: Generic . for Loc Line. for Underlay. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Select the wall. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and draw a 10650 mm wall along grid line 3. 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Move the cursor near the column at the intersection of grid lines C and 3. and click View Properties.Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser.

22 Move the cursor horizontally 1520 mm to the left. and then select the right face of the wall. 15 Select the wall. double-click Elevation: South. 16 In the Go To View dialog. 19 Press ESC. and on the Options Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. 13 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. click Lines. 12 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. 23 Press ESC. Modify the profile of the wall 14 On the Design Bar. The South elevation displays. 20 On the Design Bar. click Edit Profile. move the cursor up 6000 mm. The profile of the wall that you just modified displays as a purple sketch. and click to place a line. and click to place a line.11 On the Tools toolbar. click (Align). 18 Select the top endpoint of the left vertical profile line. click Modify. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 89 . click Lines. move the cursor up 4500 mm. 21 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical profile line. and click to place a line.

27 Press ESC. 30 Using the Quadrant snap. click Lines. Select the top horizontal profile line. Select the top right portion of the circle. snap to the top of the circle. 26 Snap to the endpoint of the line that you just drew.24 On the Design Bar. Press ESC. 33 Trim the profile lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. and click to place it. Select the top right portion of the circle. 25 On the Options Bar. click the drop-down arrow that displays next to the sketching tools. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1520 mm displays. and click (Circle). 90 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 29 On the Options Bar. 32 Click Modify. and select it. and select the endpoint of the left vertical profile line. click . click (Trim/Extend). 31 Move the cursor to the left. Select the short right profile line. 28 On the Design Bar. click Lines.

you maintained the relationship to the roof level. 43 In the Warning dialog. click . note that for Top Constraint. click Continue. Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. click Finish Sketch. and press DELETE. click Finish Sketch. click the Close button. select the short horizontal line on the right. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1000 mm displays. 48 Change the 06 Roof level height to 19000 mm. 38 On the Design Bar. 41 Select the horizontal line across the middle of the profile sketch. 39 In the Error dialog. 40 On the Design Bar.34 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 35 On the Options Bar. 47 Click Cancel. and press DELETE. click Modify. click Modify. and click to place it. instead of lengthening the existing edge. under Constraints. 37 On the Design Bar. 36 Snap to the endpoint of the short horizontal line. click Lines. 44 On the Design Bar. 42 On the Design Bar. and select the wall. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 91 . click . You need a closed sketch to complete the profile. By adding extra height to the wall. unlock it. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 On the Options Bar.

You learn how to load these components into the project. “Adding Entourage and Site Components” on page 92. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. double-click 3D. you place planters on the 05 Roof level to create a roof garden. and how to place and adjust them in project views. 51 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. View the wall 50 In the Project Browser. click to restore the original height of the roof.49 On the Standard toolbar.

Create the roof garden 1 On the Project Browser. click Component. as shown. TIP After you place the 1st planter. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 93 . under Floor Plans. 3 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. between grid lines C and D.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select M_Planter : 1200 x 1200mm. and open Metric\m_RRB_host.rvt. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed green line that helps you to place the next planter.

and then click OK twice. under Other.5 On the Basics tab. under Floor Plans. click Edit/New. for Plant Height. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. under Floor Plans. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click {3D}. 16 In the Type Properties dialog.5 Meters. and click OK. click . click Component.5 Meters. under 3D Views. select Tree . 18 While pressing CTRL.Deciduous: Cornus Florida 1. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. and on the Options Bar. enter Cornus Florida 1. 19 In the Project Browser. 94 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 11 In the Project Browser. for Type. 17 Click Apply. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click . Create a sidewalk outside of the building 20 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Type Selector. select the 2 remaining trees. 12 Select 1 of the trees. and in the Type Selector. enter 1500 mm. 8 On the View toolbar.Deciduous: Cornus Florida 4. select M_Tree . double-click 01 Entry Level. 10 View the roof. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. and press ESC.5. click Duplicate. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. 15 In the Name dialog. 13 In the Element Properties dialog.

21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 2400 mm. ■ ■ For Offset. 27 On the Options Bar. 26 Using the same method. 23 On the Options Bar: Click . click Floor. 22 On the Design Bar. and click to place the line. 25 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 95 . enter 0 mm. click Lines. 29 Select the right vertical floor line. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. and click to sketch a line. 28 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. and click to sketch a line. 24 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. for Offset.

and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. 32 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. 38 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and click to finish the line. 34 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. clear Chain. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. move the cursor up 900 mm. 35 Select the line that you just drew. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. click . 96 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. The completed sidewalk displays.30 On the Options Bar. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. and click to finish the line. click (Trim/Extend). 31 On the Options Bar.

click Component. 48 In the Type Selector. 45 Click OK. The circle is divided in half by a line. enter -250 mm. for Type. In plan view. and specify a point to rotate him so he is facing the column. 42 In the Name dialog. click . Adding Entourage and Site Components | 97 . select M_RPC Male: Alex. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. click Duplicate. 53 In the Type Selector. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. 49 On the Options Bar. enter Sidewalk. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to place her on the sidewalk. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. 51 Move the cursor so the rotation line displays along Alex’s line of sight and specify a point. select Rotate after placement. RPC people are represented by a circle. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 52 Move the cursor toward the column. and second line inside the circle indicates the person’s line of sight. 43 Click OK twice.Next. and on the Options Bar. under Constraints. 39 Select the sidewalk. for Height Offset from Level. as it is currently a floor element. near Column E5. create a new type for the sidewalk element. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 41 In the Type Properties dialog.

for Offset. 60 In the Element Properties dialog. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. 56 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. under Elevations. When you select a host for a component. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. and click . you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. and on the Options Bar. 62 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. 63 Select and drag both Cathy and Alex above the sidewalk. 59 In the camera view (3D View 1). enter -300 mm. click Pick Host. click the car. select M_RPC Beetle. Next. and click OK. 55 In the Type Selector. 57 Press ESC. under Constraints. 61 In the Project Browser. 98 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click West. 58 On the View tab of the Design Bar.54 Rotate Cathy so she is facing Alex. 64 Select Cathy. click Camera.

67 Click the sidewalk. under 3D Views. 69 Using the same method. “Linking a Service Core to the Building Project” on page 99. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 99 . NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. If the sidewalk changes height. and on the Options Bar. View the front of the building 70 In the Project Browser. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. double-click To Building. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. click Pick Host. and replace them with a service core.65 Click the sidewalk. 66 Select Alex. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. 68 Select and move both Cathy and Alex until they are standing on the sidewalk. 71 Proceed to the next exercise. both Cathy and Alex will move with it.

and shaft opening. 100 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and open Metric\m_RRB_add_host_style_railings. including the stairs. 4 On the View toolbar. click .rvt.The service core is contained in an external file that you link to your current project. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. . and press DELETE. After the service core is linked to your project. under Floor Plans. 3 Select the entire stairwell. double-click 06 Roof. press SHIFT. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. walls. you must cut another shaft opening around it. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 On the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and spin the building. click 5 On the View toolbar. you delete the entire stairwell. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. so it will cut through the floors of the building. By deleting the stairwell from the 06 Roof.

13 On the Tools toolbar. The building service core displays in your drawing. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 101 . 8 In the left pane of the Add Link dialog. 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. 10 At the bottom of the dialog. select m_RRB_link. under Positioning: ■ ■ Select Manually place. 14 Select the top horizontal floor line. click Training Files. Do not click the lock to constrain the core and floor. and then select the top horizontal core wall. click (Align). 11 Click Open.rvt. under Floor Plans. You cannot constrain elements in the current project to elements in linked models. double-click 01 Entry Level. 12 Specify a point to place it between grid lines B-D.Link a new service core into the building model 6 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Metric folder. Select Cursor at center.

click . click Finish Sketch. 16 On the Design Bar. click Lines. View the service core in the building model 23 On the View toolbar. 18 On the Options Bar. Click OK. select Chain. 102 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . select Up to level: 06 Roof. click . 21 Select the shaft opening and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. For Top Constraint. click 24 On the View toolbar. for Base Offset. enter 300 mm. 17 On the Options Bar. Under Constraints. 19 Trace the outer edges of the core elements to sketch the service core as shown: 20 On the Design Bar.Create a shaft opening for the service core 15 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

“Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings” on page 103. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can see that the service core cuts through the floors of the building.. You copy the railing type into your project from another project.rvt. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. and spin the building to get a better view of the core. press SHIFT. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. expand Renderings. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 103 . and double-click Lounge Perspective. After you modify it. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. click Training Files. 25 Proceed to the final exercise. you add glass railings around the floor edges. where it is hosted within a railing family. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. in the Project Browser. The rendering displays. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. and open Metric\m_Conference. click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 3 In the new project.

click Edit. expand Families. and Parapet. 12 Select the floor. press and hold CTRL. 15 On the Design Bar. 10 Close the warning dialog that displays.rvt. 5 Expand Railing. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog.Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. and expand Railings. 104 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and on the Options Bar. The floor sketch displays. click (Split). Handrail only. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. click OK. double-click 02 Level. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. click Modify. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and click to split the floor. and select Glass.rvt or m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. Modify the 02 Level floor 11 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Window menu ➤ Revit Retail Building. under Floor Plans. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D.

19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. and click to draw another line. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 26 Select grid line D. click . 24 On the Tools toolbar. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. click Lines. click (Align). 27 On the Tools toolbar.18 On the Design Bar. and lock the alignment. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. and click to place it. 25 Select grid line B. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 105 . move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. 20 Move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm and click to draw another line. 23 Complete the sketch as shown.

click Dimension. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. 31 In the Revit dialog. click Dimension. select Glass. click Finish Sketch. for Type. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 106 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .29 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. Lock the dimensions. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click . For Offset. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. 33 On the Design Bar. enter 100 mm. 37 On the Design Bar. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. 30 On the Design Bar. click Railing. click Railing Properties.rvt project.

39 Click Finish Sketch. click Camera. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. Click Model Graphics ➤ Shading with Edges. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics ➤ Hidden Line. A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You can view the railing that you just added. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 107 .

43 Close all project drawings.■ Click Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region to hide the frame around the view. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. lofty ceilings. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. balconies. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2008.Documenting Your Projects 3 In this section of the tutorials. 109 . and a roof garden. exterior fire stairs. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District.

slight modifications to the building design have been made.NOTE For training purposes. 110 | Chapter 3 Documenting Your Projects .

you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. including plan. elevation. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views ■ 111 . section.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 3 In this tutorial. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Create new project views.

how to create section and elevation views. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You learn how to create new views from existing views. you learn how to create views from a building model.Creating Views In this lesson. Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 112 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

expand Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser.rvt. under Floor Plans. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 7 In the Project Browser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. select Level 2. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Training Files. Duplicating Plan Views | 113 . and click OK. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Project Browser. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 4 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 8 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans.

double-click Vicinity Plan. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. 12 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. and click OK. under Floor Plans. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 13 In the Project Browser. and click 1: 1000. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. Next. click the current scale. 114 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 11 Under Floor Plans. enter Vicinity Plan. 14 On the View Control Bar.

17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.rvt.16 Right-click. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 115 . Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.

double-click Level 1. 116 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. select Elevation: Building Elevation. click Elevation. 3 In the Type Selector. for Scale.rvt. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.South East elevation view Section view Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. select1:100. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 11 In the Project Browser. 7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. enter South East. double-click South East. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. under Elevations. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Creating Elevation and Section Views | 117 .

15 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. select Section: Building Section. select 1:100. for Scale. Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 118 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. 14 In the Type Selector.Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. ■ Move the cursor down. click Section. under Views (all). and double-click Level 1.

Click the midpoint of the section line. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar.18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. drag it to the right until it cuts through the stair. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 119 . click Split Segment. and click to place it. 19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint.

View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. click Modify.21 On the Design Bar. 23 On the View Control Bar. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. 24 Select gridline F. 120 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and double-click Section 1. expand Sections (Building Section). and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right.

Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Resulting callout view . 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. To create each view.Enlarged Stair Plan Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.rvt.25 On the Design Bar. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. click Modify. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Creating Callout Views | 121 . you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of the each new callout view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise.

6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. select 1:50. and specify a point to complete the callout. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. double-click Level 1. click Callout.Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. for Scale. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. 4 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan. under Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Draw the callout around the large stair in the center of the plan: ■ Specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. 122 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. 3 In the Type Selector. and select the callout boundary.

click Modify. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.■ Select the middle grip. Creating Callout Views | 123 . 7 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Rename View dialog. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. and click OK. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head.

click Callout. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. and specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. for Scale. under Sections (Building Sections). 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Section 1. select Detail View: Detail. 124 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 In the Type Selector. 14 On the Options Bar. select 1:50. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Creating Callout Views | 125 . 18 In the Rename View dialog.16 Modify the callout leader as shown. and click OK. expand Detail Views (Details). under Detail Views (Details). and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. enter Roof Overhang Detail. 17 In the Project Browser.

Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. You change the appearance of the section mark head. Existing stair callout head and boundary 126 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . the elevation markers. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises.

for Section Head. and click OK. double-click Level 1. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. Section Tail . 15 Under Category. and click Open. 12 For Section Tag. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. and can be applied to the section line. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 127 . . enter Section Head – Custom. under Floor Plans. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog.Modified stair callout head and boundary Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 10 On the floor plan. click Load into Project. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. select Custom-Section Head.rfa.rvt. Section Tail – Filled. scroll to Section Line. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. click Training Files. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.Filled. click Duplicate. select the current project. select Section Head . 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit/New.Custom. open Metric\Families\Annotations. click the Annotation Objects tab. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. clear any others. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. select the section line. and click OK. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. and click OK twice.

select 12. click Edit/New. 27 Click OK twice. 128 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. .5mm Square.16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. For Dimensions ➤ Width. 19 Click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog.rfa. and select 3. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog.5 mm. select the current project. open Metric\Families\Annotations.5mm Square. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. and on the Options Bar. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. enter 12. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. and click OK. select Square. select Custom-Callout Head. For Line Weight. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. Click OK. and select 2. scroll to Section Marks. 17 Under Category. enter 12. On the floor plan. On the floor plan. and click OK. for Elevation Tag. and click Open. notice the square elevation markers that display. click Training Files. 22 In the Name dialog. select 3. 30 On the Design Bar. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. click Load into Project. clear all others. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Duplicate.

for Callout Tag. . 47 Select Callout Leader Line. click the Annotation Objects tab. select . Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radiusand click OK. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 129 . scroll down to Callout Boundary. enter 6 mm. 43 Under Category. 39 Click OK twice. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 45 For Line Pattern. expand Callout Boundary. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. enter . and select 4. select the callout. Click OK. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and on the Options Bar. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. and select 7. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. select Dash. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head.33 In the Type Properties dialog. 46 Under Category. click Edit/New. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click Duplicate. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 49 Click OK. 34 In the Name dialog. 36 In the drawing. For Corner Radius. 40 Press ESC.

130 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and apply it to multiple elevation views. You learn to create view templates. View templates provide and easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. and visual overrides. The crop region displays as red. under Elevations. Creating a View Template In this exercise. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson.50 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. and double-click East. To accomplish this. masking regions. Presentation view Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. click Training Files. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. filters. In the left pane of the Open dialog. view regions. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. and features blue triangular grips and break marks.

6 On the Project Browser. under Elevations. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. under Visibility. click Zoom to Fit. right-click East. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 9 On the View Control bar. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections Creating a View Template | 131 . clear Entourage.3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. 4 On the Design Bar. clear Crop Region Visible. 8 Click OK. click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black. under Extents. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 12 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click Properties. 13 Under Visibility. 5 On the View Toolbar.

19 In the Project Browser. and click Create View Template From View. and click Apply View Template. Callouts. 132 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click OK.14 Click OK. 15 On the View Control bar. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. and section lines are now hidden in the view. elevation markers. 20 In the Project Browser. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. 18 In the View Templates dialog. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. grids. and click OK. right-click East. 17 In the New View Template dialog. 16 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. right-click North. and click OK. double-click North. levels. click Apply. under Elevations. 21 In the Select View Template dialog. select Black and White Presentation Elevation.

You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan.rvt. double-click Penthouse. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. View Range and Plan Regions | 133 . 23 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. Click OK twice. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. select Level Below (Level 4). for View Range.22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. select Penthouse. Under View Depth. right-click.rvt. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. for Bottom. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. click Edit. under Extents. 2 In the Project Browser. for Level. select Level Below (Level 4). and click Properties.

and click Properties. for View Range. select Level 4. 6 In the Project Browser. under Extents. click Edit. double-click Roof Plan. select Level 4. Under View Depth. right-click. 134 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. under Floor Plans. select Roof Plan. for Bottom. for Level. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK twice.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser.

10 On the Design Bar. select Unlimited. 16 On the Design Bar. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). 11 On the Options Bar. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. click Finish Sketch. Under View Depth. for Bottom. 17 On the Design Bar. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. Move you cursor diagonally. View Range and Plan Regions | 135 . 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. In the left corner of the building. for Level. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. for View Range. select Unlimited. click Modify. Click OK twice. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. click Edit. under Extents. click Region Property. click Plan Region. 13 On the Design Bar.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Lines.

select Walls. under Views (all). 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.rvt. under Categories. and click OK. the fire rating of the walls. After you apply the filter. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ For Filter by. under Filters. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. 1 In the Project Browser. click (New). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.18 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 7 In the Filters dialog. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. click Edit/New. 5 In the Filters dialog. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Fire Rating. in this case. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. enter Rated Walls. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. 136 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click the Filters tab. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill.

11 Select Rated Walls. click Add. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Rated Walls. click Override under Patterns. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. 9 Click OK. 12 On the Filter tab. and click OK. under Basic colors. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. click Remove. select Solid Fill. for Color. To accomplish this. Masking Portions of a View | 137 . and click OK. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. you obscure or ''wipe out'' geometry in portions of a view. select the red color. 14 In the Color dialog. under Projection/Surface. 16 Click OK. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 17 Using the same method. for Pattern. click No Override. click OK. 10 On the Filter tab. Enter Hr. and click OK. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.■ ■ Select contains. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. under Floor Plans. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Show Crop Region. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 5 On the View menu. 4 On the View Control Bar. right-click.rvt. 138 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. and click OK. as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.

12 On the Options Bar. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. click (Rectangle). 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. 11 In the Type Selector. 8 Select the crop region. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. select Invisible lines. 9 On the View Control Bar. click Masking Region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.7 On the View menu. Masking Portions of a View | 139 .

14 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 1 In the Project Browser. 140 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. under Floor Plans.rvt. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. right-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 1. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan.

click black. Working with Visual Overrides | 141 . right-click. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Override. click the current scale. and click Rename. and click 1: 50. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. select Solid fill. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Visibility. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click No Override. and click OK. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. 4 On the View Control Bar. click in the Patterns field. for Pattern. and click OK. select Walls. 11 Click OK twice. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Pattern Overrides. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. right-click. for Color. 7 Under Cut. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1.

14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Floors. click Modify. 142 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view. under Visibility. clear Grids. 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 16 Under Visibility.

19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.18 Right-click. Working with Visual Overrides | 143 . and click Hide in View ➤ Category.

22 In the Line Graphics dialog. for Pattern. and click OK. select the sofa. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. By using the previous method to make the selection. under Lines. click a purple color. and click OK twice. 25 Click OK twice. click Override. select a bright green color. right-click. select Dash. click By Category Override. 21 Under Projection/Surface. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 144 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 29 In the Color dialog.20 Right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 28 For Color. 23 In the Color dialog. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. for Color. click No Override. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. click Projection Lines.

and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. The hidden crop region is also revealed. right-click. Working with Visual Overrides | 145 .30 On the Design Bar. 32 Select one of the lamps. click . Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. click . click Modify. 33 On the View Control Bar. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color.

how to add views to the sheets. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. and click OK. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.rvt. 146 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Creating Sheets. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. right-click. click Sheet. select A0 metric. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. and click View. click Training Files.

The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 .A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. enter Site Plan. under Identity Data: ■ ■ (Properties). For Sheet Name. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 When the title block highlights. 3 In the Project Browser. and select the title block. For Sheet Number. Creating Drawing Sheets | 147 . enter A101. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. click Modify. on the Options Bar. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. expand Sheets (all).Unnamed.

7 On the Design Bar. Smith. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. click Modify. enter 15 May. enter Freighthouse Flats. The new project information displays in the titleblock.■ Click OK. for Project Address. 14 Click OK. For Project Name. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. For Project Status. For Project Number. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. click Edit. 148 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter For Approval. MA 12345 12 Click OK. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. For Client Name. 2007. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter J. enter 2007-1.

and drag it to the sheet.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Modify. 4 On the Design Bar.Floor Plan. you add views to these sheets. and click Rename.rvt.Elevations A105 .Layout Plan A104 . you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. under Sheets (all). Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. select A0 metric. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. for Name. Adding Views to Sheets | 149 . right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. double-click A102 . and click OK. select Level 1. right-click. enter Floor Plan. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. 17 In the Project Browser.Elevations A106 . The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. and click Save.Elevations A107 . select the new sheet name.Sections A108 . 2 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.rvt. and click to place the view. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.Stairs In the following exercise. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.

8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. double-click A104 . 6 In the Project Browser. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets (all).Elevations.The red border around the view no longer displays. and click to place it. and click to place it. 150 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . align it with the East elevation. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

Adding Views to Sheets | 151 . 12 On the Design Bar.Sections. under Sheets (all). click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. and on the Options Bar. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. for View Scale. double-click A107 . drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet.Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. . drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. 16 Select title bar. click Modify. and click to place it. and click to place it. select 1:5.

Stairs. move the cursor over it. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Under Floor Plans. double-click A108 . under Sheets (all). drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 152 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. under Floor Plans. click Modify. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. double-click Level 1. and press TAB until it highlights. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. zoom in to the grip. 19 On the Design Bar.

Sections. double-click A107 . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. you must first activate the view on the sheet.22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. under Sheets (all). Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. and then make changes and deactivate the view. In order to do this. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.rvt. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 153 .

5 On the Design Bar. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Deactivate View. enter 16700 mm. under Elevations (Building Elevation).2 Select the building section view. and press ENTER. and click Activate View. 154 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. 7 In the Project Browser. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. click Modify. 6 Right-click. double-click North. right-click.

The camera view displays. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number.rvt. double-click Level 1. 7 Place the camera as shown. and click OK. For Sheet Name. and click Properties. 3 In the Project Browser. enter T. under Floor Plans. select the new sheet name. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You modify the view to hide the view title. select A0 metric. Click OK. click Camera. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. enter Title Sheet. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. right-click. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. After you create the sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 155 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.

14 Under 3D Views. 156 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 In the Project Browser. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . for Eye Elevation. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. select Far Clip Active. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet.Title Sheet. 12 On the View Control Bar. enter 18000 mm.8 On the Options Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. enter 1500 mm. 11 On the View Control Bar. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. For Far Clip Offset. Click OK. Under Extents. Under Camera. For Target Elevation. double-click T . enter100000 mm. under Sheets (all). 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building.

21 In the Type Properties dialog. Click Apply. and on the Options Bar. and then click OK. enter Viewport/no title mark. select Scale (locked proportions). . click Modify. click Size. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Crop Region dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. under Graphics.15 With the view selected. select No. enter 635 mm. 25 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 19 Select the view on the sheet. for Show title. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 24 Click OK twice. on the Options Bar. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. click Modify. 22 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 157 . click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. for Height. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. click Duplicate. Under Model Crop Size.

and close the exercise file. 158 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

such as room and window schedules. such as doors and windows. You also learn to create different types of schedules.Tagging and Scheduling 4 In this tutorial. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. in your Revit Architecture 2008 projects. 159 .

Because of the open style floor plan. click Training Files. click Room Separation. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. and click Room and Area. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. 160 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. 2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Tagging Objects In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Level 1.

and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). move the cursor to the right. as shown: 5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right.4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 161 . as shown: 6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.

Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Load. indicating that it can be edited. click OK. click Training Files. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Tags dialog. verify that Tag on placement is selected. and click to place the room and tag. click Modify. click Room.rfa. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. The room tag number displays in blue. and select the room tag. and the rectangle contains the room tag. click Modify. 162 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 9 In the Tags dialog.7 On the Design Bar.

19 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 17 Click the room text label. click it.16 Zoom in on the tag number. and press ENTER. Click to place the new room and tag. 18 On the Design Bar. click Room. enter U18-1. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. and press ENTER. enter Entry. ■ Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 163 . click Modify. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor.

enter Kitchen.NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. 164 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. Sequential letters are also supported. 21 Click the room text label. 22 Use the same method to place rooms and tags. and Living): Hide the room separations 23 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 20 On the Design Bar. Dining. and press ENTER. click Modify.

30 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms.24 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click Modify. Tagging Doors and Windows | 165 . and double-click Unit 18 Plan . expand Floor Plans. and click OK. 27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. you learn how to place door and window tags. 28 On the Design Bar. Tag rooms on upper level 25 In the Project Browser. and moving clockwise. but they need to be tagged.rvt. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. The rooms are already placed. expand Lines. in the Project Browser. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. under Floor Plans.Level 1. double-click Unit 18 Plan . Model Categories tab. click Room Tag. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. clear Room Separation. 26 On the Design Bar.Level 2.

enter U18-2. click (Properties). 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. enter U18-1. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. and click OK.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. under Identify Data. 166 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Living room door 5 On the Design Bar. for Mark. and on the Options Bar. and press ENTER. 3 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. click Modify.

9 Using one of the methods you just learned. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. 13 On the Design Bar. Tagging Doors and Windows | 167 . 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select Door Tags. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. under Category. click Tag All Not Tagged. and drag it down to center it in the doorway. double-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 2.

18 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 21 Click OK. click Load. 19 In the Tags dialog. click Training Files. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK.15 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway.rfa. 168 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and double-click Level 1. select Window. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. 16 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 17 In the Project Browser. click Tag All Not Tagged. 23 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.

25 Under Floor Plans. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . double-click Level 2. 26 On the View toolbar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag. you learn how to tag furniture objects. click Tag ➤ By Category. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. Zoom flyout. Tagging Other Objects | 169 . 3 On the Options Bar. 5 At the confirmation prompt. click Yes to load a tag. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Training Files. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.24 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. click Tag All Not Tagged. 27 On the Design Bar. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser.Level 1. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. and modify the tag placement and display.rfa. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. 28 Select Window Tags. click Zoom To Fit to see the entire drawing.rvt. 4 Select a dining room chair. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Window tags are placed in the Level 2 plan view. select Leader.

14 Click Modify. and drag it above the chair tag.8 Select the furniture in the living room. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. 11 Select the tag for the table. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. 13 Optionally. 12 Click the elbow control. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 9 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 170 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . clear Leader. and drag it up to form an angled leader.

and on the Design Bar. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. Tagging Other Objects | 171 . click Tag All Not Tagged. and click OK. 18 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click (Filter Selection). All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. 20 On the Options Bar. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. click Modify. select M_Furniture tag : Standard. double-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 2.

21 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. click Check None. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. and click Modify. 22 In the Type Selector. you learn to add schedules. select Furniture Tags. 172 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule.rvt. that is. a schedule that lists every window in the building. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Next.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. Finally. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. Creating a Window Schedule | 173 . in which windows are listed by window type. click Training Files.

174 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 6 Under Available fields. and click View. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. select Windows. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Category. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. click Schedule/Quantities. right-click in the Design Bar. 9 Click OK. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. and double-click Level 1. select Comments and click Add.Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. and click OK. 7 Using the same method. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. click the Fields tab. 4 For Name. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. enter Building Window Schedule.

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. for Sorting/Grouping. expand Schedules/Quantities. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. right-click the schedule. for Sort by. click Close. However. If no open view shows the selected element. NOTE By clicking Show. select Type Mark. under Other. click Show.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. 13 In the Project Browser. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. and on the Options Bar. and click View Properties. click Edit. Creating a Window Schedule | 175 . 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. this can be a time-consuming process. and click OK twice. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. in large building models with many views. you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area.

double-click Level 2. change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A. for Sorting/Grouping. The window type schedule is displayed. 18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.The window schedule is displayed. sorted by type mark. 176 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 20 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. and press ENTER. as shown: 24 In the Project Browser. 22 Click OK twice. 23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. Change type mark from the schedule 17 In the window schedule. clear Itemize every instance. 21 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click View Properties. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 19 Right-click on the schedule. click Edit. under Other. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H.

for Name. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and double-click Building Window Schedule. 6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. jamb. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. click OK. 5 Click OK. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.25 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. select Type. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 177 . Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. For Discipline. Under Parameter Data. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. In this case. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. and sill conditions for a window can be found.rvt. enter Head Detail. expand Schedules/Quantities. you cannot use them to tag objects. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. unlike shared parameters. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. For Group parameter under. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. click Add to create the new parameter. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. select Construction. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. click Group. for Fields. Jamb Detail. Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. 14 On the Options Bar. click in the Head Detail header. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. and click Properties. and Sill Detail. under Available fields. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. select Head Detail. right-click Building Window Schedule. select the following fields. click Edit. and while pressing the left mouse button.Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. TIP To select all 3 headers. under Other. so that they are listed before Comments. enter Window Details. 12 Click OK twice. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 178 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. enter 1/A107. 4 Click OK. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. click the Fields tab. select the following fields. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. and for Sill Detail. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. 3 In the New Schedule dialog.16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 179 . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. select Doors. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. click Schedule/Quantities. expand Floor Plans. Verify Schedule building components is selected. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. enter 2/A107. Under Name. Verify the Phase is Phase 1. for Jamb Detail. under Type Mark A. Select contains in the second field. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. For example. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Level 1. enter 3/A107. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Head Detail. You then hide the column used for the filter. enter Unit 18 .rvt. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field.Door Schedule. 6 Under Available fields. Enter U18 in the third field. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. 13 In the Project Browser. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.Unit 18. select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). expand Sheets (all). click Unit 18 .Door Schedule. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. click Modify. 9 Click the Formatting tab. and drag it to the sheet. select Hidden Field. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. 180 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click OK. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper-left corner of the sheet. 10 Under Fields. and double-click A102 . 11 Under Field formatting. 15 On the Design Bar. select Mark. but is not included as a column in the schedule.

under Available fields. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser.Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. Creating a Room Schedule | 181 .rvt. under Floor Plans. and click View. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. select Rooms. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. under Category. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 5 Using the same method. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. 19 On the Design Bar. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 7 To the right of Header text. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Modify. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. right-click in the Design Bar. select Number. double-click Level 1. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. and click Add. 8 Click OK.

The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. 10 Edit the number to be 101. The room Number is U17-9. and press ENTER. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. for Name. for room 101. click New. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. add 5 more rooms. 11 Using the same method. and press ENTER. For 105. select Storage. next to Rows. enter Corridor. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. 101-106. For 103. and press ENTER. For 104. enter Storage. enter Building Entry.NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. select Corridor. Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. For 102. 182 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

you add room separation lines. enter Stair. click the Lines field. and modify room names. under Floor Plans. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. In the Lines field. under Projection/Surface. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select 9. under Visibility/Graphics Overrides. For Room Separation. Under Custom colors. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Override.rvt. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. expand Lines. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 183 . In the Line Graphics dialog.■ For 106. and click OK. click the Color field. place rooms from a program list. click the bright green swatch. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Click OK. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. double-click Level 1. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. click Room Separation. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. For Weight. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser.

8 On the Design Bar. click Modify.7 Click to add 2 room separation lines to the right side of the drawing in the corridor. 184 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . draw the horizontal line. Place rooms from a program list 9 On the Design Bar. click Room. Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. First.

for Room. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 185 . 13 For Offset.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. enter 2400 mm. 12 On the Options Bar. for Room. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 Click to place the room in the newly-defined entry area (lower-right). select 102 Storage. select 101 Building Entry.

and zoom in to the Corridor. 15 Use the same method to place the following rooms. Place 106 in the space with the stairs. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101.14 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. click Modify. double-click Room Schedule. 16 On the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 18 In the Project Browser. 186 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Change the room bounding behavior of walls 17 In the Project Browser.

Create key schedule 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. enter As Selected. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. 25 In the New Schedule dialog. select Rooms. 30 For Key Name. double-click Room Schedule. click Modify. under Available fields. and click OK.19 While pressing CTRL. select the 3 small walls (in the 2 storage areas). and Wall Finish. under Category. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 187 . and click Add. click New to add a new row. clear Room Bounding. 29 On the Options Bar. and for all 3 finishes. as shown: 20 On the Options Bar. Floor Finish. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 23 In the Project Browser. and click OK. enter Units. click Schedule/Quantities. click (Properties). select Base Finish. 28 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. while pressing CTRL. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. 26 Select Schedule keys.

click Check None. for Room Style. right-click Room Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. click Room Style. 40 Draw a selection box around floor plan. under Other. 37 Under U17-8. for Fields. 188 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 41 On the Options Bar.31 Using the same method. Zoom flyout. 34 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Zoom To Fit. click Edit. 36 In the Project Browser. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. for Available fields. and click OK. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. 35 Click OK twice. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 38 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 42 In the Filter dialog. double-click Room Schedule. under Floor Plans. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. select Units. and click Add. 39 On the View toolbar. click (Filter Selection). select Rooms.

3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Service. right-click Level 1. 11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Views (all). you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. 5 For Title. enter Room Type. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. and click OK. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and 106. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. click (Properties). click the Color Scheme field. and click Properties. double-click Room Schedule. select Public. enter Room Type. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 6 For Color. 45 In the Project Browser. click (Duplicate). Creating a Room Color Diagram | 189 .43 On the Options Bar. and click OK. for Room Style. 47 Click File menu ➤ Save. 46 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. at the warning prompt. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. select Room Style. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Since you are creating a new color scheme. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. select Room Type. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. and double-click Level 1. under Schedules/Quantities. under Floor Plans. under Identity Data. for Name. 104. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 103. select Units. 8 Click OK. and apply it to the Level 1 view. click OK. 9 In the Project Browser. For rooms 102 and 105.

18 On the Options Bar. 19 In the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). click Edit Color Scheme. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). clear Visible. 20 In the Options panel at the bottom of the dialog. and click OK twice. under Custom color. 190 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click the value in the Color column. 16 On the Design Bar. select Foreground. click Color Scheme Legend. 22 In the Color dialog. select blue. expand Lines. select the color legend. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click Modify. A legend displays at the tip of the cursor. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 17 In the drawing area. for Display Color Fill in. click Edit. Add a color scheme legend 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. and clear Room Separation.12 For Visibility/Graphics Overrides. and click OK.

for Swatch Width. 24 Click OK. enter 5 mm.23 Use the same method to change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray respectively. and click OK twice. under Graphics. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. (Properties). Creating a Room Color Diagram | 191 . enter 25 mm. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. 28 Under Title Text. for Size. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. on the Options Bar.

Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. 192 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .29 On the Design Bar. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. double-click {3D}. 2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. under 3D Views.

4 In the Type Selector. 11 Click the Formatting tab. Clear Itemize every instance. select Family and Type. 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK.Insulation on Plywood Deck . Creating a Material Takeoff | 193 .EPDM. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 12 Click OK. and click Add. select Material: Area. Under Field formatting. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. select Calculate totals. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. and specify the following values: ■ ■ Under Fields. under Available fields. 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. 9 Using the same method.3 While pressing CTRL. click Modify. and specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays. select Roofs. Select Grand totals. For Then by. click Family and Type. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. under Category. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. select Material: Description.

click Estimated Cost. 22 For Field formatting. for Name. 21 Click the Formatting tab.TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). and click Properties. for Fields. 194 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . right-click Roof Material Takeoff. enter Estimated Cost. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK twice. 19 For Formula.40 50. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. and click Add. enter the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Wood Joist Value 16 13. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be calculated.80 5. and under Fields. right-click Roof Material Takeoff.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. under Available fields. 20 Click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. for the Material: Cost field. 17 Click Calculated Value. under Other. click Material: Cost. and click Properties. 24 In the Project Browser. select Calculate totals. 23 In the Material Takeoff. click Edit.

An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. you create a shared parameter file. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. regardless of category. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. click Estimated Cost. for Formatting. click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and reporting the shared parameters. In this lesson.25 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Click OK 3 times. tag the line. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters.rvt. creating a generic tag to tag the family. and schedule the total distance of each path. ensuring consistency across families and projects. These shared parameters can be added to any family. You draw a travel path line. For Units. under Fields. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. For Rounding. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Fixed. 27 Click Field Format. select 2 decimal places. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 195 . click Edit. adding the shared parameters to a family. you create an exiting plan for the building. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. In the left pane of the Open dialog. either within family components or within the project template. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. and are defined and stored in an external file. 26 On the Formatting tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.

2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click Training Files. enter Exiting. and click Save. and click OK. click Create. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. for Name. under Floor Plans. click New. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 4 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. enter Travel Distance. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.txt.1 In the Project Browser. 7 Under Parameters. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 11 Click OK. under Groups. for File name. 196 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . enter Path ID. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click New. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. for Name.rvt. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1.rvt. for Name. and click OK. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 9 Under Parameters. select Length. and click OK. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. enter OfficeStandardsParameters. click New. for Type of Parameter.

and click OK. group it under Dimensions. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. under Parameters. otherwise the family loads into the current project. click Add.rvt. in the Load into Projects dialog. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Shared parameter. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 197 . 7 For Group parameter under. and select Instance. for Travel Distance Formula. 12 Click Apply. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 4 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. 8 Select Instance. Click Training Files. 3 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Family Types dialog. 10 Use the same method to add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. under Dimensions. following the equals symbol (=). verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. and click OK. enter Length. click Load into Projects. select Constraints. click Add. 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK.2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. If you have multiple projects open. 14 If necessary. 9 In the Family Types dialog. and click Select. under Parameters. Create a tag using shared parameters 15 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol.rfa. and click OK.

19 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 25 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. and click OK 3 times. click Label. 198 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . select Travel Distance.rft. 26 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Modify. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. click Training Files. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. 17 Select Generic Tag. 24 On the Design Bar.16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Label. and click Open. click Add.rft. click Select. under Parameters.

for File Name. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. After the lines are tagged. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans.rvt is selected. and click OK. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. 28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. Placing.rvt. and press DELETE. and click Save.Tagging.Level 1. enter M_Travel Distance Tag.Tagging. double-click Exiting Plan . Placing.27 In the drawing window. 30 In the Save As dialog.rfa. select Path ID. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 199 . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. and move it down. under Floor Plans. click Load into Projects. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. 29 Click File ➤ Save As. 32 On the Load into Projects dialog. 31 On the Design Bar.

2 Zoom in to the corridor. 6 Move the cursor to the right. above the exterior door as shown. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 200 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click Component. 4 On the Options Bar. select Chain. and click in the center of the corridor.

and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 201 . 11 Select each of the travel path lines. click Tag ➤ By Category. 10 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. 8 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 17 On the Options Bar. and click OK.Tagging. click Modify. Placing. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. for Path ID. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. through the door. and click (Properties). double click Exiting Plan . and click outside of the building.7 Move the cursor down.Level 2. enter 1-1. click Component. under Constraints. select the 2 dashed travel lines. click Modify. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Chain is selected. 13 While pressing CTRL.

and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. click Component. and click above the door to the stair. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. move the cursor near the right corner.18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. move the cursor to the left. 22 Click at the center starting point. 19 Move the cursor up through the door. and click. 202 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

Tagging. and click in the stair. click Modify. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog.23 Move the cursor down. 24 On the Design Bar. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. for Path ID. enter Level 1 Exit Distance. and click OK. 33 For Name. (Properties). click Tag ➤ By Category. 27 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. Placing. under Constraints. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 203 . click Modify. enter 2-1. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 28 While pressing CTRL. 30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. under Category.

41 Under Fields. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Path ID. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. 35 Click the Filter tab. and click OK twice. 46 In the Project Browser. select Travel Distance. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 204 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 44 In the Project Browser. in the second field. and click OK. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. under Schedules/Quantities. and under Field formatting. for Filter. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Schedule/Quantities. while pressing CTRL. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. and click Add. under Other. Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Calculate Totals. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 36 For Filter by. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. select Path ID. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. in the third field. click Edit. in the first field. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. under Available fields. 43 In the Project Browser. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. 42 Click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter 1-. select Path ID and Travel Distance. click Training Files. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. select contains. 38 For Sort by. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and in the third field. enter 2-. enter Level 2 Exit Distance. and click View. 40 Click the Formatting tab. 45 In the Rename View dialog.rvt.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Filter by. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Rename. and click Properties. right-click the Design Bar. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays.

expand C . under Categories. right-click Generic . and click Properties. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 205 .Drywall w/ Metal Stud. and click the browse button. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 4 Under Available fields. for Assembly Code. click C1010145 . 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog.Interior Construction\C1010 Partitions\C1010100 .Partitions .2 In the New Schedules dialog. select Walls. click the Value field. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. and click OK. click the Fields tab.152 mm. and click OK twice.Interiors\C10 . expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall. select the following fields.Fixed Partitions.

8 In the New Database dialog. click OK in the dialog. 3 Click New. click Create.mdb for Database Name. Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. 10 When the confirmation displays. and open the database in Microsoft Access. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). 10 Close the exercise file. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 6 Click Finish. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson.9 In the schedule. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. under Database Name. and click Next. and click OK to create the database. 206 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 9 Under Directories. 1 On the File menu. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. and click Next. enter Revit_Project. click OK. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. Additionally. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. select a location for the database file. under Database. click the File Data Source tab.

These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule.A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. in addition to the Id column. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 207 . Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. 13 Close the exercise file. For example. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project.

208 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

209 . you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2008 projects.Annotating and Dimensioning 5 In this tutorial.

You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it.Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 210 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .

and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1. click Training Files. Relocating a Project | 211 . you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project.Relocating a Project In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

The south elevation is displayed. for Elevation Base. click (Properties). By entering 10000 mm in this step. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. By selecting the Level 1 line. 6 Click OK twice. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1.Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. 10 On the View menu. 8 Select the Level 1 line. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. and press ENTER. In the Name dialog. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. Under Constraints. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. enter8 mm Head . 4 In the Element Properties dialog. select Shared. expand Views (all). If you did that now.Shared Elevation. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. and click OK. 212 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. click Edit/New. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. 3 On the Options Bar. you specify the new location of the project. enter 10000 mm. The levels in the project are not shared. However. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. and double-click South.

under Elevations. as well as other views of the building model. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. select Level : 8 mm Head . The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 14 In the Project Browser.Shared Elevation. 12 In the Type Selector. 13 On the Design Bar. Relocating a Project | 213 . double-click North. click Modify.

214 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Level : 8 mm Head . On the Design Bar. and select Levels 2-4. the Penthouse level. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. In the Type Selector.15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ ■ ■ Press and hold CTRL. click Modify. and the Roof Plan level.Shared Elevation.

Dimensioning In this lesson. Dimensioning | 215 .16 If you want to save your changes. multi-segmented. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. and double-click Level 1. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. radial. “Dimensioning” on page 215. click File menu ➤ Save As. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. permanent dimensions are created automatically. Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. In Revit Architecture. In this case. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. expand Floor Plans. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. and angular dimensions. You place linear. expand Views (all).

snap to wall centerlines. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. and when a green dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and when a green dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. By default. dimensions are aligned. 4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. 216 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Dimension. and are created by selecting individual reference points. select it. select it. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar.

indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. 6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked. 7 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension.5 Move the cursor above the view. click Dimension. Creating Dimensions | 217 . Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

and select it. select Wall Faces. 15 Move the cursor to the right. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. but below the first dimension that you placed. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 12 13 On the Options Bar. 218 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . above the plan view of the building. Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. select the right side of the curtain wall. 17 Move the cursor up. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. 16 After you select the reference points on the final planter. and select its left exterior face. 11 Using the same method. select the right endpoint of the planter. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. 14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. for Prefer.

27 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. For Prefer.19 On the Basics tab. select Wall faces. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. and specify a point to place the dimension. click Modify. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. suffix 20 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. and select it. 23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). 24 Move the cursor outside the wall. Creating Dimensions | 219 . click Dimension. 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 26 Select the radial dimension.

33 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). click (Properties). Place an angular dimension 31 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.28 With the dimension still selected. 30 On the Basics tab. 34 Select the horizontal line.. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. enter Typ. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. For Prefer. on the Options Bar. verify Wall faces is selected. and click OK. 220 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . for Suffix. click Modify.

and click to place the dimension. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. “Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 221. 37 On the Basics tab. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. When you dimension the wall. you select only the wall. 35 Select the left exterior face of the planter. 36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building.This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 221 . instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. click Modify.

These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. Click OK. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. expand Views (all). For Pick. and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. select Openings. select Wall centerlines. and select Widths. Click Options. select Entire Walls. 4 In the Automatic Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select References.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. click Dimension. Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. expand Floor Plans.Automatic wall dimension Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 222 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .

in some cases. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. 7 On the Basics tab. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. expand Views (all). for a multi-segmented dimension. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. and click to place the automatic dimension string. For example. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. Controlling Witness Lines | 223 . Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. However.Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. When you place dimensions. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. “Controlling Witness Lines” on page 223.

select Individual References. and select it. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. 7 Using the same method.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. For Pick. 224 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . move the cursor down. select the right edge of the planter. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. and click to place the dimension. verify Wall centerlines is selected.

10 Using the same method. and specify a point to place the dimension.8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. select the bottom right endpoint. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. Controlling Witness Lines | 225 . and select it. 11 Move the cursor down.

Dimension the partition walls to center lines 12 On the Basics tab. click Modify. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 13 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. select it. and click to place the dimension. 15 Moving the cursor to the right. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. and when the wall centerline highlights. for Prefer. select Wall centerlines. click Dimension. 18 Press and hold SHIFT. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. and drag the dimension down the wall. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. 226 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark.

and using the same methods. 20 Release SHIFT. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. click Modify. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. “Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on page 227. 22 On the Basics tab. and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. you change the Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 227 .19 Release SHIFT. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise.

enter Office Standard. Under Text. and select the lower dimension. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 5 In the Name dialog. select CityBlueprint. for Text Size. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. For Text Font.2 mm. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. select Arrow 30 Degree. Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. text font. 2 Click (Properties). enter 3. click Edit/New. 228 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .dimension tick mark. and click OK. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. for Tick Mark.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan.

The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. click Modify. ■ Click OK twice. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 229 . select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 7 On the Basics tab. click Modify. 10 On the Basics tab. and select the bottom dimension. select another font. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 9 In the Type Selector.NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system.

you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building.11 Using the same method. 12 Proceed to the next lesson. create a new angular dimension type. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. 230 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. and how to add leaders to the text notes. “Creating Text Annotation” on page 230. select the angular dimension on the planter. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson.

but below the upper dimension string. zoom to planter near grid line 5. click (None). and click and drag to create a text box. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 231 . click Text. for Leader. 3 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

enter 6 mm Arial Notes. 10 In the Name dialog box. and click . select Arc Leaders. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. 232 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . If so. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. under Graphics. and click OK. and click OK. click Duplicate.5 In the text box. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Select the text box. and click OK. click Modify. enter 6 mm. for Text Size. 11 Under Text. enter EXISTING BUILDING.

and enter Planting Bed. click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 233 . 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). 15 On the Design Bar. click Modify.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. click Modify. click Modify. Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. Click OK twice. select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Graphics. for Leader Arrowhead. Under Text. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Click Rename. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. select CityBlueprint. In the Rename dialog. enter Standard Notes. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 24 On the Design Bar. 234 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Edit/New. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter.■ Click (Add Left Arc Leader). 20 On the Design Bar. for Text font. and click OK. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. for New. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 235 . 27 On the Options Bar. click to place the text box.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. select Text: Standard Notes. click Text. click (Arc). 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. over the Planting Bed text. for Leader. 26 In the Type Selector. 30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text.

31 Click in the text box. 236 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . click File menu ➤ Save As. Wall. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and enter 457 mm Conc. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 32 If you want to save your changes.

You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. These components display at the required scale. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. 237 . you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2008.Detailing 6 In this tutorial. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. plywood. and metal studs. like a standard door header condition.

which means that all detail components. add detail components. They are also view specific. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Detailing the View In this exercise. click Training Files. After you add components. you trace over the building model geometry. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. and use the model as an underlay for the detail.rvt. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. as well as detail lines. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. and insulation objects.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you detail the view of the roof edge. In the callout view. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. You load detail components. 238 | Chapter 6 Detailing . you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In order to detail from the building model. region objects.

2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. for Pattern ➤ Detail. and click Open. enter 406. and click OK. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. 17 In the drawing area. click Repeating Detail. 13 In the Name dialog. The roof overhang detail displays. and click OK. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 On the Options Bar. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. click . select Corrugated Metal. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Delete the component. click Detail Component. click Training Files. 16 Click OK twice. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. select As underlay. Exact location is not important.5mm. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. 7 In the drawing area. 15 For Spacing. double-click the detail callout head. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. click Duplicate. Detailing the View | 239 . 5 In the alert dialog.

21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component.18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. click Detail Component. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. and on the Edit toolbar. click (Move). click Modify. click Load. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. and press DELETE. Add lumber detail components 22 On the Design Bar. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 19 On the Design Bar. ■ Click Modify. 240 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 23 On the Options Bar.

press SPACEBAR 3 times. 33 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. Because you still have several components to load.rvt. click Training Files. and click Open.rfa. Detailing the View | 241 .24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 29 In the Duplicate Types dialog. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. 31 In the Type Selector. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. 28 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 26 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. Load components as a group 27 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 32 To properly orient the component. and place it in the detail view as shown. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 34 In the Type Selector. 25 In the Type Selector. and click Open. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 30 On the Design Bar. click OK. click Detail Component. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. you load them as a group from a single file.

37 Place the wallboard component as shown. click the Flip instance arrows. 39 Select the horizontal segment. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. select Chain. 38 Click Modify. 242 | Chapter 6 Detailing . select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. 36 On the Options Bar. and click Modify. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. click Insulation. Add insulation 40 On the Design Bar.Add wallboard detail component 35 In the Type Selector.

43 Click Modify. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. as shown. 46 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. For Offset. 47 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 44 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. click (Move). 42 Place 2 segments of insulation. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. Add lumber components 45 On the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. ■ Click Modify.41 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. enter 140mm. Detailing the View | 243 . select to near side.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. 244 | Chapter 6 Detailing . “Adding Detail Lines” on page 244. 49 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. and lock the component.rvt. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. 2 In the Type Selector. Like detail components. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. as shown. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. 51 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. meaning they display only in this view. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you add lines to your detail. click Detail Lines. 52 Click Modify. select Thin Lines. Add rigid insulation 50 In the Type Selector.48 In the Type Selector. 4 Click Modify. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. they are view specific.

For Offset. 11 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Lines. For Offset. as shown. enter 10mm. select Thin Lines. Adding Detail Lines | 245 . 7 In the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. 10 On the Design Bar. enter 10mm. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. as shown. and press ENTER.Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result.

Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. select Thin Lines. 18 In the Type Selector. click (Draw). and draw the detail lines as shown. as shown. and clear Chain. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. select Chain. 246 | Chapter 6 Detailing . draw the detail lines as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component.

and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. enter 10mm. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. select Do not display.20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. Adding Detail Lines | 247 . When you turn the display model off. and click Properties. and click OK. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). click Detail Lines. select the Penthouse level line. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. 26 In the Type Selector. select Vapor Barrier. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 24 On the View Control Bar. 22 In the Project Browser. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. right-click. For Offset. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. and press ENTER.

30 In the Type Selector. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. you add text notes to complete the detail. click Text. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail.rvt. press SPACEBAR as necessary. click Detail Component. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. “Adding Text Notes” on page 248. select M_Break Line. 248 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 32 Click Modify.29 On the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Adding Text Notes In this exercise.

7 Select the dimension line.2 On the Options Bar. enter Typ. and click OK. Enter the text. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. 6 Click Modify. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Arc) to create an arced leader. and click (Properties). Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. and click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. Click again to specify the location of the text box.. Adding Text Notes | 249 . for Text ➤ Suffix.

10 Proceed to the next exercise. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. enter Roof Overhang Detail . Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. select all the coping linework. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. while pressing CTRL. and selecting the chain. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click 6 In the Filter dialog. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. right-click. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. and save the exercise file. and click OK. “Creating Detail Components” on page 250. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes.9 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Roof Overhang Detail. and click Rename. right-click. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment.Keynotes. 3 In the Rename View dialog. select a text note.rvt. 7 Click Modify. on the Options Bar. 250 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Select All Instances. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. and press DELETE. right-click. pressing TAB. (Filter Selection). and click OK.

10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 14 Click Modify. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. 24 On the Options Bar. and click Save. 23 Using a window. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. enter Roof Edge. and click Open. click Detail Component. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 21 To place the component. 16 Click Modify. 15 Use a window to select all linework. 11 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Load into Projects. select Medium Lines. in the Type Selector. and click OK. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and the component can be placed in the detail. double-click it in the Project Browser. click Training Files. for File name. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. clear Detail Items. select the coping.Keynotes view is not the open view. The original linework remains selected. 18 In the Save As dialog. click .9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. navigate to your preferred location. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 22 Click Modify. Creating Detail Components | 251 .rft. While pressing SHIFT. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. 25 In the Filter dialog. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping.

B5. click Detail Component. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. 30 In the drawing area. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. In the Keynotes dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Training Files. you place keynotes on objects. 27 On the Design Bar. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open.rvt. Adding Keynotes In this exercise.26 Press DELETE. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. click Keynote ➤ Element. click Load. Click to place the leader arm. “Adding Keynotes” on page 252. and click OK.rfa. and click Open. 2 In the alert dialog. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 31 Using the same method used previously. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. 28 On the Options Bar. click Training Files.rfa. 252 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 63mm Rigid Insulation. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. delete the underlying linework.

for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. use keynote 07645.C1. use keynote 06110. 13 Tag components: ■ (Properties). 9 In the Type Properties dialog. use keynote 06160. For the 50 x 150.G1.5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. navigate to 07645.F1. FasciaProfile_1. Adding Keynotes | 253 . 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK 3 times. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For the 50 x 300.D11. use keynote 06160.I1. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. For the metal coping. select the metal fascia with drip edge. 6 Click Modify.D1. 19mm Plywood. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. click in the Value column.F1. use keynote 06110. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties.D11. Roof Edge4. click Keynote ➤ Element. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. For the 50 x 200. click Edit/New. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. use keynote 09250. use keynote 06110. For the 19mm Plywood Siding.

and click Modify. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. 4 In the Type Selector. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. navigate to your preferred location. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.20 Ga. using keynote 07460. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. 15 In the Type Selector. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. click Load into Projects.14 On the Design Bar. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 254 | Chapter 6 Detailing . click Lines. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog.A8. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. click Detail Component. select the left end point of the reference line.rft. 18 Save the file. 22mm Corrugated Steel . 6 Lock the line. click Training Files. 9 On the Design Bar.rvt. select Corrugated Metal. and select the right end point. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. for File name. 8 In the Save As dialog. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. You do this in order to keynote the component. 17 Keynote the component. and click Save. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 5 In the drawing area. and click Open. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 254. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based.

click Edit/New. 37 Click OK 3 times. 20 Click OK 3 times. 24 While pressing CTRL. 31 Select the component. click Detail Component. and hidden) used in the view. invisible. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. 25 Next. 27 On the Design Bar. and click . select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. select m_Light Line Detail Component.A1. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click the end points at the top of the roof. enter EPDM Membrane. click Detail Component. 28 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. and click Open. 19 In the Name dialog. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click Load. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the Value column. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 23 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 Click Modify. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. and m_Light Line Detail Component. 16 Select the component. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. click Detail Component. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. click Duplicate. and click OK. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 255 . Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. You add the components to the project and keynote them. and click (Properties). click Duplicate. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 13 In the Type Selector. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 30 Click Modify.11 Press DELETE. 22 On the Options Bar. 29 In the drawing area. select Medium Line Detail Component. click Training Files. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 34 In the Name dialog.

click Detail Component. 47 Select the component. click Detail Component. name the component Air Barrier. on the Edit toolbar.A5. 44 On the Design Bar. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. and click . 53 On the Options Bar. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. select Chain. 41 Select the component just added. click Detail Component.G1. and click the lower end at the break line. (Move). 42 Using the same method used previously. 48 Using the same method used previously. 256 | Chapter 6 Detailing .38 On the Design Bar. 49 With the component selected. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. and assign it keynote 06110. 52 In the Type Selector. against the 3/4" plywood. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. and assign it keynote 07260. 46 Click Modify. Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. and click . select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 40 Click Modify.

Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. and assign it keynote 07260. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component.A4. and Vapor Barrier. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. click Keynote ➤ Element.55 Click Modify. 58 Using the method used previously. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 257 . Air Barrier. 60 On the Design Bar. name the component Vapor Barrier. leaving the detail component lines. and click . 50 x 200 Framing. 61 In the drawing area.

63 In the drawing area. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. and close the text editor. select Invisible Lines. and click . 69 Using the method used previously. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component.rvt. and press TAB. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. click Load into Projects.A4. 3 In the text editor. 67 In the drawing area. name the component Batt Insul.txt. 68 Select the component. in the Type Selector. Enter 07460. add a keynote for the component. click File menu ➤ Save. and press TAB. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rfa. 72 Proceed to the next exercise. 71 Save the file. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. “Modifying a Keynote Database” on page 258. Enter 07463. click Detail Component. and press ENTER. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 258 | Chapter 6 Detailing .rfa. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing.. and assign it keynote 07210. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. select the component. 70 In the drawing area.A9.Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component.A1. The database file opens in a text editor. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. and click OK. Each keynote displays as a simple number. ■ Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. 11 Click Modify. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. 9 In the drawing area. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. under Path Type. you learn how to create a drafted detail. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. 13 Click Modify. and click to place the note. click Browse. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. These details do not update with changes to the building model. 14 Save the file. In the Type Selector. and click Open. click to place the leader.Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. click Keynote ➤ Element. ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. select all the keynotes.A1. 6 In the Select Keynote File dialog. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. Creating a Drafted Detail | 259 . select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). navigate to 07463. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. After you create a drafting view. select Absolute. and click OK. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library.txt. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. under Keynote Table.

For Positioning ➤ Automatically place. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. 260 | Chapter 6 Detailing . enter EPDM Metal Coping. select Center-to-center. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. Dataset Use the dataset you used in a previous exercise. right-click Drafting 1. For Layer/Level Colors. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. click Training Files.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. select Reference other view. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Click Open. for Scale. The detail that you import is in DWG format. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select Black and white. “Creating a Reference Callout” on page 260. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. and click OK. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. The detail is imported as an import symbol. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. select 1 : 5. 6 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). click Callout. and click Rename. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View.rvt. and click OK. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 7 In the Rename View dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping.dwg.

Creating a Reference Callout | 261 . 6 Select the callout.No Reference. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Detail . and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. for New. click Modify. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. delete the existing value. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. 12 Click OK twice. 10 In the Rename dialog. and double-click the callout. and click OK. and click Properties. click Edit/New. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 5 Click Modify. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. click Rename.

for Name. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. “Creating a Detail in a Drafting View” on page 262 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. double-click A105 . verify that the scale is 1 : 5. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 262 | Chapter 6 Detailing . and click OK. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. enter Header @ Sliding Door.rvt. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. 18 Save the file. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail./Det. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.Elev. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail ./Sect. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view.No Reference). The callout is updated with the sheet information. 3 On the View Control Bar.

select the left and bottom edges of the region. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. click Filled Region. 19 In the Type Selector. enter Gyp. Board. 11 In the Name dialog. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it.5mm. 14 Click OK 3 times. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. select Wide Lines. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Duplicate. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 17 Click Modify. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. . select Gypsum-Plaster. 16 Select the left edge of the region. and click OK. select the width dimension. 5 In the Type Selector. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 While pressing CTRL. click Region Properties. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 263 . for Name. click . and enter 20. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. click Edit/New. Draw a rectangle as shown.

and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). 24 Select the mirrored region. and on the Edit toolbar. Move the cursor up. and click above the top of the region as the end point. (Draw). Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point.20 On the Design Bar. click 22 On the Options Bar. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click Finish Sketch. 264 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

click Duplicate. click Edit/New. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. 33 Click OK 3 times. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 265 . click Filled Region. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.25 Click Modify. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 30 In the Name dialog. enter Wood . click (Align). 29 In the Type Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. and select the right edge of the wood region. . click . Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. click Region Properties. for Name. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that the thickness is 19mm.Finish. Draw a rectangle as shown. and click OK. in the Type Selector. 37 On the Design Bar.Finish. select Wood . Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 34 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. select Medium Lines. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar.

select Medium Lines. click Finish Sketch. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. click Ref Plane. 46 On the Tools toolbar. click Filled Region. enter 6mm. click . For Offset. click (Align). sketch the new region as shown.5mm. 42 On the Design Bar. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick). and press ENTER. 39 In the Type Selector.38 On the Design Bar. 266 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 40 On the Options Bar. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it.

and click to select the point. enter 10mm. Move the cursor left 25mm. and click to select the point. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. click Filled Region. and press ENTER. For Offset. 54 On the Tools toolbar. Select Chain.47 Click the reference plane. and select the bottom horizontal line. enter 0. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. 56 On the Design Bar. 52 On the Options Bar: Click (Draw). 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. 48 Click Modify. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. and click to select the point. Move the cursor right 25mm. Move the cursor down 305mm. click (Trim/Extend). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 267 . click Finish Sketch. and press ENTER.

59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset. 268 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 60 Select the left. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. and press ENTER.Add mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. 62 Select the left detail line. and right edges of the door panel region. enter 76. select Medium Lines. click Detail Component.rfa. select the height dimension. 65 On the Options Bar.2mm. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. and click Open. enter 3mm. top. 61 Click Modify. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. and press ENTER. 58 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. click Load. click Detail Lines. 66 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. click Detail Lines.TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. click Load. 76 In the Type Selector. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. 72 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 70 On the Design Bar. click Training Files.rfa. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. 69 Select the bolt. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. 68 Click Modify. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 269 . drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. 71 On the Options Bar. click Detail Component. use the images as a guide. select Wide Lines. and click Open. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. 74 Select the expansion bolt.

click Detail Lines. 80 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. (Mirror). 85 On the Options Bar. click . select Thin Lines. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 84 On the Design Bar. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 79 In the Type Selector. 82 Select the rectangle. and on the Edit toolbar. click . 270 | Chapter 6 Detailing .78 On the Design Bar.

as shown. select Medium Lines. 90 In the Type Selector.87 Click Modify. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 89 On the Design Bar. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 271 . Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. click Detail Lines.

click . 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. and on the Edit toolbar. 95 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER.92 Select the line. 97 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 272 | Chapter 6 Detailing . click (Mirror). and click to place the arc as shown. select the length dimension. enter 3mm. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line.

101 On the Design Bar. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 102 In the Type Selector. and click Modify. click Dimension. click Detail Component. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. select M_Break Line. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 273 . 103 Add two break lines as shown.99 Click Modify. Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. 105 In the drawing area. 106 Click to place the dimension. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements.

and click to place the text. and click Modify. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. Add text notes to complete the detail 111 On the Design Bar. and click Modify.107 On the Design Bar. select the gypsum board region on the left. 274 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 108 In the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. Board. 115 Select the note. 110 Select the dimension line. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. 112 In the Options Bar. 116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. click Text. drag the text for the smaller dimension. click Dimension. using the Drag Text grip.5mm Arial. click to create an arced leader. 113 In the drawing area. click (Add Right Arc Leader). 114 Enter Gyp.

click Modify to end the command. 119 Save the file. 118 On the Design Bar.117 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 275 .

276 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. including: ■ ■ Creating a note block containing typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources from other applications.Finishing the Sheets 7 In this tutorial. such as images and text into project sheets ■ ■ ■ 277 .

click Symbol. and double-click East. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa.Finishing-Sheets. enter 1. click Training Files. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).Using Note Blocks In this lesson. for Number of Leaders. click Modify. 278 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 7 On the Design Bar.rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 8 Drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Hexagon. 5 On the Options Bar. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the notes text.

under Identity Data.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. and click above the tag to place a copy. 12 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK. click (Properties). enter Seal existing doors and insulate. click (Copy). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Note Block | 279 . 13 Select the tag. for Text. on the Options Bar.

14 With the copy selected. as shown: NOTE To create a vertical mirror image. on the Options Bar. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. clear Copy. 19 On the toolbar. 20 Select the tag on the left. click (Mirror). 18 Use the same method to make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. 15 For Text. 17 Click OK. click (Properties). and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. 280 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. enter Repair existing door surround. enter B. 16 For Tag. and on the Options Bar. and click.

for Sort by. and click Add. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Create. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B C D E F G H Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Repair existing door surround. and moving counter-clockwise. for Note block name. Clean existing concrete loading dock. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.21 On the Design Bar. Clean exterior brick wall. select Tag. click Modify. using the table as a reference. Repair as required. Creating a Note Block | 281 . Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Tuckpoint as required. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean cut and repair wall as required. and click OK. format. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. select Tag. Remove all existing windows. under Available fields. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. Saw cut existing brick wall. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. enter Exterior Construction Notes. and click Add. 22 Optionally. Select Text.

click Modify. enter Description.■ ■ On the Formatting tab. 30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet. For Header text. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 34 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. select Exterior Construction Notes. and select Bold. and click Save. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. expand Sheets (all). 26 Click OK. 29 In the Project Browser. select Center. On the Appearance tab. 282 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 31 On the Design Bar. verify Arial in the first field. 27 In the column header (text). expand Schedules/Quantities. enter 6 mm in the second field. 28 In the Project Browser. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. and drag it to the sheet.rvt. and double-click A103 .Elevations. for Heading. and for Alignment. enter Mark.

select Sheet Number. in the first field.Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 7 In the Project Browser. under Available fields. The drawing list displays. and click Add. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. in the second field. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. select Sheet Number. double-click T . On the Filter tab. under Sheets (all).Title Sheet. double-click T . 5 In the list title field. and click Add. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. enter T. and in the third field. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. under Sheets (all). 2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. ■ 4 Click OK. select Sheet Index. select does not equal. enter Sheet Index. for Sort by.Title Sheet. 6 In the Project Browser. select Sheet Number. Select Sheet Name. and drag it to the sheet. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. for Filter by.rvt. expand Schedules/Quantities. Using Drawing Lists | 283 . 1 In the Project Browser.

2 In the New Legend View dialog. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. door frame schedule. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. windows. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. doors. Finally. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block.rvt.8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower-right corner. and click OK. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. and door frames. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. and so on). On construction documents. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. click Modify. 284 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . for Name. On construction documents. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. enter Typical Symbol Legend. 9 On the Design Bar. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. click New ➤ Legend. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule.

selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. and click OK. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 6 On the Options bar. click Duplicate. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Creating a Symbol Legend | 285 .Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . 13 Working from the top down. enter Legend Text. for Name. enter 3mm. 12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note. click .Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head .Filled Level Head . and click OK twice. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 10 For Text Size. click Symbol. select Arial. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Text. 9 For Text Font. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. you create a text type with the necessary size. click Edit/New.

17 On the Design Bar. 286 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . click Typical Symbol Legend. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. double-click A102 . and click to place it. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet.■ Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 14 In the Project Browser.Unit 18. select Viewport : No Titlemark. expand Legends. 19 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Type Selector. under Sheets. click Modify. 18 In the Project Browser.Site Plan/Floor Plan. 15 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). and click to place it. click Typical Symbol Legend. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. and double-click A101 .

select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save.20 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 On the View Control Bar. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Modify. For View. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. select1 : 50. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Section. Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. 3 For Scale. for Name.rvt. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. select Medium for Detail Level. Creating a Component Legend | 287 . select Viewport : No Titlemark. click New ➤ Legend. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. enter 900 mm. and click OK. For Host length. enter 4th Floor Wall Types. 21 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. click Legend Component. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

for Family. click Modify. 12 In the Type Selector. 10 Select the second wall. 288 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.9 On the Design Bar. click Text. and on the Options Bar. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. for Leader. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. click to add text with a single-segment leader. Creating a Component Legend | 289 . 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. 19 Enter the following text.13 On the Options Bar. and enter Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. The text note with leader is added to the legend. click to add text without a leader. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. Add text to the legend 16 On the Options bar.

The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. drag it onto the sheet. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. 26 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. select Level 4. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. select 4th Floor Wall Types. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. 29 In the project Browser. right-click Sheets (all). The open drawings are both visible. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 23 In the Project Browser. under Legends. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the new sheet. and click New Sheet. 290 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . double-click Level 4. click Modify to end the command. under Floor Plans.

33 In the floor plan view. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. Creating a Component Legend | 291 . Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. select the Wall Type 2 component.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. click (Match Type). 34 Draw a rectangle around the lower-right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. The view zooms in to the patio divider wall. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region.

292 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 38 Click File menu ➤ Save. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. 36 On the View Control Bar. select Medium for Detail Level. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. contractor inquiries. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. 37 Optionally. You can create a sequence of revisions. These changes can be due to owner requests. click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project.35 Select the patio divider wall.

any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. 3 In the Revisions dialog. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. In general. the revision is locked and issued to the field. When you use this option. If you select By Sheet. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. under Floor Plans.rvt. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. 5 For Description. if the active revision is number 1. click Revisions. In most instances.unanticipated changes in construction conditions. enter Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. For example. or changes in building material availability. When Issued is selected. Using the table. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. Add a revision to the project 4 For Release Date. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. 7 Under Visible. enter a date. 2 On the Settings menu. double-click Level 4. yet as concise as possible. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. If Visible is not selected. Setting Up a Revision Table | 293 . and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. under Floor Plans.8 Click OK. 4 On the Edit toolbar. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. double-click Level 4. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. you make changes to the project floor plan. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. including revision number and revision date. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 294 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 5 Select the partition. 3 Select the divider. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. move the cursor up. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. Revision clouds have read-only properties. click (Move).

and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. 11 On the Design Bar. 8 In the drawing area. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. Sketching Revision Clouds | 295 . Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click Finish Sketch. click Revision Cloud. click Modify. click near the partition you moved.6 On the Design Bar. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment.

14 In the Object Styles dialog. 16 Click OK. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. click Tag ➤ By Category. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click the Annotation Objects tab. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 296 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Level 4. for Line Weight. select 6. you load a revision tag into the project.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. under Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise.

Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. You then issue a revision. you create a sheet view in your project. Working with Revisions In this exercise.rfa. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 10 In the drawing area. scroll down to Revision Clouds. 5 In the Tags dialog. the cloud is tagged as number 1. Because you chose to number by project. 11 Click to place the tag. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 2 Enter ZR and zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock.Unnamed. In the Tags dialog. You do this by issuing the revision. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. Add a revised view to a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and because the revision is the first in the project. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. click OK. Working with Revisions | 297 . click Training Files. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. double-click A107 .4 On the Options Bar. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. click Tags. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. on which you place a revised view. you need to add one. 6 Click Load. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. under Sheets. you prevent further changes to the revision. the tag is displayed inside the cloud.rvt. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. 8 In the Tags dialog. select Leader. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left.

NOTE After you issue a revision. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. On the Settings menu. 8 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. click Revisions. click New.Issue a revision 3 On the Settings menu. select Issued. and click OK. under Add. 7 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. 298 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . for Visible. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. click Revisions. 6 In the Revisions dialog. You can continue to add revisions. Create additional revisions 5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. you can no longer modify it. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. select None for each issued revision. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and place it on a sheet. and spreadsheets.JPG. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. into a project.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. Importing from Other Applications | 299 . such as images. you learn to import information from other applications. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.9 Click OK.Title Sheet. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Training Files. Importing Image Files In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click T . and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. text. under Sheets. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project.

6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Importing Text Documents In this exercise.5 On the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click to add text without a leader. click Text. Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. 3 On the Options Bar. under Sheets. double-click T . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 Select the text.doc text file in another window.rvt. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Leader. 300 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify.

NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format.Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. click Desktop. This exercise demonstrates a common method. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. with the new text box still selected. 3 In Microsoft Excel. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. and saved as Fixture Schedule. click Modify. NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit Architecture. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet.mdi. for File name.JPG. under Sheets. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. double-click A102 . Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. click Modify. 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. This process may vary from system to system. click Training Files. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. for Name. click File menu ➤ Print. 4 Under Printer. enter Fixture Schedule.rvt.xls. and click Save. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select the document writer. 9 On the Design Bar.JPG. 6 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet.Unit 18. 5 Click OK. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. This step has been completed for you. 10 On the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. Importing Spreadsheets | 301 .

12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 302 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .

you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. as well as a large lab building. The large floor plan. To effectively document this project. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. 303 . called dependent views.Using Dependent Views 8 In this tutorial. you break up the plan into sections. or footprint.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 304 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .

| 305 .

306 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . The dependent view opens. 4 In the Rename View dialog. click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. for Name. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. 3 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. select the crop region. and click OK.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. under Level 2. right-click Level 2. 6 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views.Aviary. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 5 Click in the drawing area. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter Level 2 . click Training Files.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 307 . 8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. and the model crop is the interior crop region. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building.The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible.

14 Click in the drawing area. and on the Zoom flyout. and click Rename. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). 15 Select the crop region. right-click Dependent on Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. 10 On the Zoom flyout. right-click Level 2. 12 In the Project Browser.9 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom To Fit. enter Level 2 . 11 In the Project Browser.Labs. 13 In the Rename View dialog. for Name. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click OK. click (Hide Crop Region). 308 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .

17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. 22 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. double-click Level 2. click (Hide Crop Region). Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 309 . 20 On the Zoom flyout. 19 On the View Control Bar. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split. 18 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Matchline.

23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.) ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. 24 On the Design Bar. Click above the left corner of the lab building. and click. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 310 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. click Finish Sketch.

28 For Line Pattern. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. and drag it onto the sheet. right-click A101 . 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. for Line Weight. and click OK.Unnamed. 33 In the Project Browser. 27 Under Matchline. click Level 2 .Aviary. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select Double Dash. click OK to accept the default titleblock. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 311 . 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. and click OK. for Name. 31 In the Project Browser. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. select 9. enter Level 2 Aviary. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. expand Sheets.

38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. 39 On the Options Bar. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. 312 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . for Target view. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs.35 On the Design Bar. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser.Aviary is selected. and place the Level 2 . You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views.Labs dependent view on the sheet. click View Reference. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . 36 Use the same method to create another sheet.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 313 .Labs. 44 On the Design Bar. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. 41 On the Options Bar.Aviary. 46 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. for Target view. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. click Zoom To Fit. click (Show Crop Region). double-click Level 2 . 47 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. 45 On the Zoom flyout.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. select Floor Plan: Level 2 .

49 If. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. right-click. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing.48 Select the crop region. click the far right control. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. after modifying the annotation crop region. 314 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. 50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference.

After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. 57 On the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. and click OK. select all views in the list. 55 On the Zoom flyout. 54 In the Project Browser. but are not placed on sheets. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale.51 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). Apply dependent view settings to other plans 52 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 315 . and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. and click Apply Dependent Views. right-click Level 2. expand Level 1. click Zoom To Fit. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. 53 In the Select Views dialog. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. select the Crop Region. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 3 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Rename View dialog. right-click South Elevation. expand South Elevation. The matchline is already placed in the view.Left. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter South Elevation . expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 5 In the drawing area. and click OK. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. and click Rename. The dependent view opens. click Training Files. and double-click South Elevation. 316 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . 2 In the Project Browser.

and drag it toward the center of the drawing. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 317 . for Name. 13 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). right-click South Elevation. and click OK. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and click Rename. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 16 In the Project Browser. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. click (Hide Crop Region). 8 In the Project Browser. under Sheets. and click OK. 11 Select the crop region. 7 On the View Control Bar. cropping the view to the lab building. enter South Elevation. enter South Elevation . cropping the view to the aviary. 9 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and click Rename. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. right-click A103 Unnamed. and drag it toward the center of the view.Right.6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. for Name.

25 On the Options Bar. for Target view. click View Reference. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. under Elevations.18 In the Project Browser. and drag it onto the sheet.Left. under Elevations.Right. click South Elevation . verify that Elevation: South Elevation . 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation.Left is selected. 318 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and drag it onto the sheet. double-click South Elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline. 20 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 22 On the Design Bar. click South Elevation .

31 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 30 On the Design Bar.28 On the Options Bar. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.South Elevation. select Elevation: South Elevation . double-click A103 . Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 319 . under Sheets (all).Right. for Target view.

NOTE If the view references are not visible. you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. 320 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and click Activate View. Right-click the view. and use the annotation crop controls to modify it. Select the crop region.

Viewing and Rendering 4 321 .

322 | Chapter 9 Viewing and Rendering .

You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotations within views. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. 323 . how to control fill pattern colors. you learn to create and customize views of building information models.Viewing 9 In this tutorial. More specifically. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans.

locate the Project Browser. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. click . sections. you learn how to access different views of the building model. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. and double-click East. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. click Training Files. expand Elevations. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotations within views. 324 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 2 In the Project Browser. including elevation and three-dimensional views. and open Metric\m_Viewing_Exercise. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. You create elevations. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. and three-dimensional (3D) views. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotations within building model views.rvt. on the Standard toolbar. expand Views (all).

the east elevation. scroll down and clear Window Tags. 6 Under Visibility. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. click Model Graphics Style. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. Create a 3D view of the building model 8 On the View toolbar. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog. and click Hidden Line. This change is applied only to the active view. click Visibility/Graphics. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. The default name of the view is {3D}. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. Exploring the Building Model | 325 . click the Annotation Categories tab. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. click . This change is applied only in this elevation view.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. 7 Click OK.

and click OK. Move the mouse to pan the view. . and expand 3D Views. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. 11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. 326 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 15 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. under 3D Views.9 On the View toolbar. and click Rename. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog. right-click {3D}. click X to close the view. expand Views (all). Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. 16 In the Rename View dialog. The view follows the movement of the cursor. enter My 3D View. Save the current 3D view 14 In the Project Browser. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down. click to reorient the view. 18 In the Project Browser. 12 Press and hold CTRL. double-click My 3D View. 13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen. 10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. 17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. You can pan. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. zoom. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. .

3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. and distance from the target. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. After you specify the second point (the view target). Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 327 . click Camera. eye height. expand Views (all). right-click in the Design Bar. “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 327. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera.rvt. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. and click View. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. outside of the dimension lines. as shown in the following illustration. and double-click Level 1. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Viewing_Exercise. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. Cameras define the eye point.Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags.

Move the cursor up. Press and hold the left mouse button. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 328 | Chapter 9 Viewing . You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog to move the camera position and change the view. and sideways to see how the view changes.4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. 5 On the View menu. click Dynamically Modify View. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region and move them out. Press and hold the left mouse button. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. down. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu.

11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. and target 12 On the Window menu. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. click Tile. 13 On the View menu. Press and hold the left mouse button. Change the camera position. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. height. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 329 . Four views of the model display in the drawing area.

16 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. double-click Level 1. and click Show Camera. double-click 3D View 1. 330 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 15 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views.14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

click to create a new 3D view. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. 20 On the View Control Bar. and click Shading. Click OK. and move it to another location. and click Element Properties. TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. under Camera. click Model Graphics Style. In the Element Properties dialog.17 In My 3D View. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. 3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. right-click. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 331 . ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change.

24 Click the section box. as shown in the following illustration. A section box is displayed around the model. select Section Box. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces.21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. and click OK. 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. under Extents. 332 | Chapter 9 Viewing . A rotation tool is also displayed. click View Properties. 22 On the View menu.

you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and rotate the section box around the model. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click Section.26 Click and hold the rotation tool. “Creating a Section View” on page 333. and maximize this view. m_Viewing_Exercise.rvt. double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. Creating a Section View In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Section View | 333 . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

6 In the Project Browser. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. or in the Project Browser. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. and double-click Section 1. View the section 5 To view the section. select the section view. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. select Floor Plan: Level 1. 4 On the Design Bar. and click Find Referring Views. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. right-click. double-click the section head. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. expand Sections. 7 In the Go To View dialog. 8 Select the section line. and click Open View. click Modify. 334 | Chapter 9 Viewing .3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line.

you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. click Modify. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. Notice the change in section depth. double-click Level 1. m_Viewing_Exercise.9 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. “Creating Elevation Views” on page 335. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. 3 Without clicking in the drawing area. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. Creating Elevation Views | 335 . Notice the change in the view direction. move the cursor around the building model. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 12 Select the section line. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. under Floor Plans.rvt. click Elevation.

double-click Elevation 1 . View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. 336 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 7 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and click.a by default. The elevation is named Elevation 1 . 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. double-click Level 1. 10 In the Project Browser.4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. Elevation 1 . zoom in. Do not select the arrow.b. Elevation 1 . indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. and double-click the elevation symbol arrow. click Modify. under Elevations.a. 5 On the Design Bar. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes.b. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors.

in this case. This includes walls. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model.rvt. and the insulation color to pink. and open Common\c_Showroom. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. a shade of gray. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. such as the one below. and other families. click Training Files. where each layer is assigned a different material. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Save As. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material.11 If you want to save your changes. such as Brick on CMU. and save the exercise file with a unique name. For example. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 337 . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. on the File menu. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. and applies to phasing override materials as well. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. floors. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In addition. roofs. in a compound wall.

A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog. expand Views (all). The surface pattern of the brick is black. select Masonry . select red. and double-click Wall/Floor Join . Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. 9 In the Materials dialog. expand Views (all). 5 In the Color dialog. click Materials. 338 | Chapter 9 Viewing . The brick cut pattern on the left is displayed as red. and click OK twice. 3 In the Materials dialog.Level 3. 4 Under Cut Pattern. click Materials. expand Sections (Section Head .Brick for Name.Brick for Name. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. 2 On the Settings menu. click Color. select Masonry . 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls.Filled). and double-click 3D. expand 3D Views.Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser.

10 Under Surface Pattern. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). 11 In the Color dialog. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. click Color. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. 2 On the View menu. and double-click Level 1. and click OK twice. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click View Properties. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 3 Click Cancel to exit the dialog without making any changes. “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 339. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 339 . 12 Proceed to the next exercise. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. c_Showroom. select white. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. The view level of this view is set to display in Coarse detail as indicated by the Detail Level instance parameter value under Graphics.

7 In the Color dialog. 12 On the View Control Bar. Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. click Modify. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click 9 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click Fine. . click Save As.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 4 Select the south arced wall. 10 On the Design Bar. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 If you want to save your changes. right-click. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. View the arced wall in fine detail 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Edit/New. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. and click OK three times. although they may have 340 | Chapter 9 Viewing . on the File menu. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. click Detail Level. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. 13 Zoom in on the arced wall. By default. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. select Solid fill for Name. and click OK. If you create more than one plan region in a file. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall that display in a coarse detail level are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. double-click Level 2. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. select a shade of gray.

refer to the online Help for more information. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. or pattern. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height.coincident edges. and you cannot control their visibility. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. line type. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Architecture files. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Plan_Region. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 341 . you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Architecture. line color. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view.

Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. expand Floor Plans. 3 In the Level 1 view. click Lines.View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. 342 | Chapter 9 Viewing . and the view depth plane. and double-click Level 1. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. On the Options Bar. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). so you can view the height of the walls and windows. right-click in the Design Bar. the top and bottom clip planes. You use the view range property to control the cut plane. In the following illustration. the south elevation is also displayed. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. click Plan Region. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. view range. and click View. which is similar to the view range for plan views. click . Plan regions have a single property.

top and bottom clip planes. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. the line turns red. click Modify. Press ESC to end the command. and enter 2800 for the cut plane Offset. click Finish Sketch. 6 In the View Range dialog. and click Element Properties. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 343 . By selecting Parent View’s Level. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. The plan region displays as a dashed green line. click Edit for View Range. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. 7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. and then click OK twice.■ ■ On the Design Bar. right-click. 4 Select the plan region. 8 Click Apply. When you select the plan region. under Extents. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut Plane. 9 On the Design Bar.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. 344 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 10 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. click Save As. 11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region.

345 .Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 10 In this tutorial. to place and render decals to create signs. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Revit Architecture 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. and posters. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. billboards. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Architecture that is used to produce rendered views.

You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. After you create the perspective view. the floor. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. and create the perspective view that you want to render. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. In this exercise.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. you select a scene that defines the model environment. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. 346 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . When you complete these changes.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. click . 9 Under AccuRender. click Wall. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed.Cavity Wall . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 347 .Brick. select Masonry . verify that Co-house . click Training Files. Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. under Name. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Materials. click Edit for Structure. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Brick. 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. right-click in the Design Bar. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . and click the tab in the context menu. 8 In the Materials dialog. and click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Construction.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type.

27 On the Design Bar. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. under Name. for Layer 2. select Carib. under _accurender. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. 26 Click OK twice. click Duplicate. select Site . 12 Click OK twice.Running. click Modify. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building.Asphalt. under _accurender. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. 348 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. under Construction. 18 In the Materials dialog. . under Name. 24 In the Material Library. 21 In the Materials dialog. and click Aluminum. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. and click . click Edit/New.Plain. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click Materials. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog. 14 On the Options Bar. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. 25 Under Name. 11 Under Name.200mm. select Polished. 22 In the New Material dialog. click Edit for Structure. 19 Click OK four times. expand Masonry and click Brick. Polished and click OK. enter Aluminum. expand Metals.A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. 23 Under AccuRender.

Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click Region Raytrace. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click No. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. floor. and then click . This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. under Materials and Finishes. click . 32 In the Materials dialog. verify that New is selected. under Name. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. click Edit/New. 33 Click OK three times. Polished. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 349 . 29 On the Options Bar. select Exterior under Type. select Aluminum.TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. click in the Material field. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. select the curtain wall mullion again. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene.

39 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. 38 On the Design Bar. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe.rvt.The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. when you render an exterior view of the model. 350 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . floor. In a later exercise. m_Cohouse. Cnst. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. you place two different types of trees on the building site. and double-click 1st Flr. producing a photorealistic effect. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Views (all). “Adding Trees to the Site” on page 350.

and click Site Component. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. select any of the deciduous trees. and click .2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. and click to place a tree. click Site Component. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.9 Meters. select M_Tree . and click Site. Adding Trees to the Site | 351 . Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. right-click in the Design Bar. Create a new type of tree. 7 In the Type Selector. click Modify.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . 4 In the Type Selector.

and click OK. 10 In the Name dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. and click OK twice. 352 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Other. select Black Oak for Type Comments. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 18 Proceed to the next exercise.8 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Trees and Shrubs. 12 In the Plant Library. 15 Under Other.rvt. and then click display the Plant Library. and place two black oak trees. to 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. click Edit/New. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. under Identity Data. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. enter Black Oak. 13 Under Name. “Creating a Perspective View” on page 352. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. Black. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. as shown in the following illustration. m_Cohouse. under accurender. click in the Value field for Plant Name. select Oak. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. and click Deciduous.

view open. on the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. Creating a Perspective View | 353 . The new perspective view is displayed. Cnst. 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration.

5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Cnst. double-click 1st Flr. and click Show Camera.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. Cnst. view. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). 354 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. expand 3D Views.

Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 355 .rvt. m_Cohouse. enter Exterior. and click Rename. and click OK. and environment settings that you use to render the view. you select a scene and specify time.7 In the Project Browser. place. lighting. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. under 3D Views. date. right-click 3D View 1. “Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View” on page 355. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click Exterior. 8 In the Rename View dialog.

8 Under Time. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. click Settings. Time. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. 6 Select By Date. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. and click Sun.You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. 7 Under Date. under Scene Settings. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. click the Solar Angles tab. 356 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog.

27 On the Options Bar. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. 11 Scroll down. The Ground Plane tab displays.9 Click the Place tab. select Grass. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 357 . select Autumn for Plant Season. 17 Under Advanced. 10 Click in the Cities list. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. and select Boston. MA.20 for Cloudiness.) 14 Click OK. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. 19 In the Material Library. 20 In the Name list. click Image Size. under Scene Settings. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 13 Enter . 18 Click Material. click Environment. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. and click OK. and click OK. select Ground Plane. and enter bo. 26 On the Design Bar. click . under _accurender. 21 Click OK twice. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. click Capture Rendering. click Raytrace. 12 Click the Settings Tab. under Background Color. Rye. under Scene Settings. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. click No. 16 In the Environment dialog. USA. Dark. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. click Site. select Good for Quality. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar.00 (many clouds. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. Cnst. and double-click 2nd Flr. m_Cohouse. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. “Rendering an Interior View” on page 358.30 On the Design Bar. click Save As. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 358 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. expand Floor Plans. define the view and render scene settings. To create the rendered scene. expand Renderings. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. on the File menu. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all).rvt. 32 If you want to save this exercise. Adding RPC People In this exercise. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. and finally. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor.

select Rotate after placement. 7 Repeat steps 4 .2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast).6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. click Component. 4 In the Type Selector. Adding RPC People | 359 .

you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. 360 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera.8 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. “Creating the Interior Perspective View” on page 360. m_Cohouse.rvt.

double-click 2nd Flr. 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view.■ Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 361 . The interior perspective is displayed. Cnst.

under Size. Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar.4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. right-click 3D View 1. click the dimensions for Size. enter 229 mm for Width. 362 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Rename. enter 178 mm for Height. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and click OK. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog.

15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. enter Interior. under Extents. click to display the 3D view of the building model. 11 On the View menu. select Section Box. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. A section box is displayed around the building model. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. click View Properties. and click OK.9 In the Rename View dialog. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. and select the section box. 12 On the View menu. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 363 . and click OK. Grips are displayed on the section box. 14 On the Design Bar.

16 Proceed to the next exercise. date. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. 14 Click Save. you reduce the rendering time. 17 In the Environment dialog. under Scene Settings. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. and select Boston. and environment settings used to render the view. MA. click OK. 11 Click in the Cities list. m_Cohouse. 12 Scroll down. on the Main tab. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. you create a render scene to specify the time. select New. 10 Click the Place tab. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time.This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. under Scene Settings.rvt. 8 Under Date. click the Solar Angles tab. “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 364. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. click Environment. and click OK. under 3D Views. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. 13 Click the Settings tab. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. 4 Under Type. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. select Interior. and click Sun. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. place. and click Save. and enter Interior Scene for Name. 7 Select By Date. Time. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. 9 Under Time. click Settings. under Background Color. and enter bo. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. By limiting the geometry. 364 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. USA.

Dark. under accurender. 21 In the Name list. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. select {3D}. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View | 365 . 22 Click OK twice. select Ground Plane. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. select Summer for Plant Season. “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 365. You can select families with transparent materials. The Ground Plane tab displays. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Rye. Curtain Wall 1). 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog. such as windows and doors. and click OK. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 19 Click Material. under 3D Views. double-click Interior. click Site. 20 In the Material Library. 24 Under Scene Settings. m_Cohouse. double-click {3D}. as daylight sources. click OK.18 Under Advanced. click Radiate. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. under Use View’s Section Box. 5 On the Design Bar. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. click Daylights. select Grass.rvt. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view.

7 On the Design Bar. click Save As. When radiate completes. 10 Close the exercise file. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. click Raytrace. and save the exercise file with a unique name. which can take several minutes. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. begins. the following rendered view is displayed.The radiosity process. . and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. 9 If you want to save your changes. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. 366 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you rendered an exterior and an interior view. on the File menu. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. 8 On the Options Bar.

Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. In a plan view. and change unit formats as desired. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. or section view. click Settings ➤ Project Units. proceeds through the dining room. If you prefer to use Metric values. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2008. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. and open Common\c_Townhouse. and ends in the far corner of the living room. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. you must select or define a scene. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. elevation. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 367 .rvt. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. click Training Files. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Architecture software.Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. The walkthrough path is a spline. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. but you can also define it in a 3D. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse.

of the walkthrough. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). click . on the Options Bar. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. and click to specify the start point. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. 3 On the Options Bar. 368 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and double-click Walkthrough 1. and click the tab in the context menu. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. expand Floor Plans. click Walkthrough. 6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. expand Walkthroughs. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. or the first key frame. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed.Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 1st Floor. right-click in the Design Bar.

click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. 12 On the View menu. 13 On the Options Bar. and select the crop boundary. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 14 Click . 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. If it is not. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. click Edit Walkthrough. 9 On the Options Bar. and click OK. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration.The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. select the crop boundary. Creating a Walkthrough | 369 . click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). verify Field of view is selected. 11 Under Change. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing.rvt. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. and click OK. 17 Click . Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). “Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position” on page 370. 370 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. clear Far Clip Active. press ESC. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit Walkthrough. 2 On the Options Bar. proceed to the next exercise. 16 On the Options Bar. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time.15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. and click OK. The walkthrough plays. under Extents. double-click 1st Floor. enter 1 for Frame. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click . Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. c_Townhouse.

You can move any camera target or key frame position. 6 On the Options Bar. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 371 . select Path for Controls. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). Blue grips are displayed at each key frame.The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room.

shaded with edges. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Edit Walkthrough. The AVI is recorded. select <Shading> for Display mode. or with AccuRender raytracing. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. and click OK. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. When you export the walkthrough. and then click to play the walkthrough.7 Click the third key frame position. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. 9 On the Options Bar. 2 In the Save As dialog. click Export ➤ Walkthrough. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. 3 Under Output Length. hidden line. specify 15 for Frames per Second. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. If you are unsure of what option to use. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. shaded. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. 5 In the Video Compression dialog.rvt. 372 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . c_Townhouse. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. without opening Revit Architecture 2008. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. and click Save. double-click Walkthrough 1. 1 On the File menu. 4 Under Format. under Walkthroughs. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 372.

specifying the number of frames. and save the exercise file with a unique name. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.7 Try creating other walkthroughs. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. on the File menu. reducing the size of the image. Recording the Walkthrough | 373 . perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. 8 If you want to save this exercise. click Save As. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second.

374 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

375 . In this tutorial. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. More specifically.

click Camera. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. A 3D view is created. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. expand Views (all). 376 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. click Training Files. expand Floor Plans. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. Creating a Solar Study . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. 1 In the Project Browser. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies.Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. as shown. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. and double-click 01 Entry.Courtyard View In this exercise.rvt.

7 Click the view boundary to select it. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. and click OK. 9 In the Rename View dialog. as shown. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. if necessary. enter Solar Study . as shown.Courtyard View. 10 On the File menu. right-click 3D View 1.4 On the View toolbar. double-click 01 Entry. 5 In the Dynamic View dialog.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 377 . you create a section cutaway view. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View” on page 377. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. click Save As. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. expand 3D Views. click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view. click to reorient the view. 8 In the Project Browser.

3 On the Design Bar. to reorient the view. 8 In the Rename View dialog. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. double-click the section head. right-click Section 1. click 10 On the View toolbar. 378 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Section. expand Sections. and click Rename. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. and click OK. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. click Modify. 7 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 To view the section. click .

as shown. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. do not display many elements in 3D. 15 In the Rename View dialog. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. and click Rename. under 3D Views. then Fine. click Callout. Typical plan views. double-click 01 Entry. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. as shown. right-click {3D}.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. and click OK. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. click Section for Solar Study Cutaway. “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 379. clear Section Boxes. On the Annotation Categories tab. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 379 . 17 To hide the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. then select Medium. click Save. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.11 In the Dynamic View dialog. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right. 13 On the Design Bar. 18 On the File menu. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Project Browser. and under Orient to a View. including the house. click Modify. you create a plan cutaway view. select Section: 12 In the Dynamic View dialog. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. under Floor Plans. 16 On the View Control Bar. to expand the dialog. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. In some cases. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway.

11 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and under Orient to a View. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. click . and click Rename. 380 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Modify. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 10 In the Dynamic View dialog. to reorient the view. and click OK. 5 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog. as shown. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building.4 In the Project Browser. as shown. 6 In the Rename View dialog. click 8 On the View toolbar. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. select Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway.

right-click {3D}. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. under 3D Views.15 Select the Roof. 19 In the Rename View dialog. so you can see into the building from the top. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 20 On the View Control Bar. 21 On the File menu. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 381 . 16 On the View Control Bar. click Save. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and click Rename. and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 17 On the View Control Bar. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category.

click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. .Courtyard View. you specify the location. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . and click Duplicate. or multi-day solar study. expand 3D Views. USA. click . 9 In the Name dialog. MA. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. 2 On the View Control Bar. and time range. for City. single-day. you specify the location. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. click . click Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. For the Multi-Day solar study. expand Views (all). USA is selected. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. For this study. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. and click OK. date range. For the Single-Day solar study. select Los Angeles. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. Creating Solar Studies . You can create a still. and double-click Solar Study . 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. leave the slider at 50.rvt dataset you used in the previous lesson.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. CA. date. 382 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. 10 Under Place. and time. 3 Select Cast Shadows. Dataset Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. and click OK.Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. enter Summer Solstice. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. Los Angeles.Boston. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. Click the Single-Day tab.

select June 22. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. click OK. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . enter Winter Solstice. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. 19 On the File menu. Under Frame. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. For Time Range. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. click Save. 16 In the Name dialog. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. 2006. enter 10 and press ENTER. enter 20 and press ENTER. and click OK. 14 In this case. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. select December 22. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 383 . verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. Clear Ground Plane at Level. and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. ■ ■ To display the previous sequential frame. click OK. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. Los Angeles. click . 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click To display the next key frame. and click OK. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . on the Single-Day tab. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. .rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select Winter Solstice. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. 6 On the View Control Bar. Los Angeles. for Date. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 2006. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. confirm that Summer Solstice. under Frame. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 2 On the View Control Bar. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. “Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 383. 7 On the Options Bar. Los Angeles is selected.Courtyard View is currently displayed. and click Duplicate. ■ For Time Interval. click . You can select the level to be used for shadow display. under Sun and Shadows Settings. 8 On the Options Bar. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes.

Los Angeles. click . Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. click To play the animation from start to finish. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. click . Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. approximately as shown. 384 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 14 On the Options Bar. click . 13 On the View Control Bar.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. Click outside of the text box to end the command. ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. double-click 01 Entry. on the Single-Day tab. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. select Summer Solstice. under Sun and Shadows Settings. under Floor Plans. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click OK. click Text. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Click and enter Dining. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. The solar study animation plays. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. and click OK.■ To display the next sequential frame. . PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. approximately as shown.

click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab. on the Single-Day tab. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. ■ ■ ■ Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. On the Options Bar. as shown. select Section Boxes. 11 To display the section box. and click OK. and click OK. expand 3D Views. Exporting the Study as AVI | 385 . click . 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Lines. 8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 6 On the View Control Bar. as shown. Los Angeles. select Summer Solstice. 5 In the Project Browser. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway.4 Sketch rooms: ■ On the Design Bar. click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click .

and click OK. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. To maintain the proportions of the frame.Los Angeles. For Frames per second. and enter 5 to 50. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. 14 Click outside of the section box.12 In the drawing area. For Dimensions. if necessary. 15 To hide the section box. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . 17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Under Format. verify that Hidden Line is selected. For File name. Under Output Length. clear Section Boxes. verify that the value is set to 15. as shown. For Save as type. for Model Graphics Style. 386 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. select AVI Files. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. On the Annotation Categories tab. select Frame range. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. enter 450 in the first field (width). select the section box. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area.

enter 450 in the first field (width). The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. click OK. BMP. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. verify that the value is set to 15. and click OK. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. Under Output Length. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. click Save. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Save. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. as shown: Exporting a Study as PNG | 387 . For Frames per second. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. NOTE When you export to PNG. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and enter 5 to 10.Los Angeles. you open each image. depending on the Frame Range. 3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. “Exporting a Study as PNG” on page 387. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. 8 In the Save As dialog. For Save as type. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. select Winter Solstice. 2 On the View Control Bar. verify that Hidden Line is selected. or GIF. 18 In the Save As dialog. 20 On the File menu. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. click Save. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. for Model Graphics Style.NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. TIFF. 7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon. In this example. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. or any single-frame format. such as JPEG. on the Single-Day tab. of the animation separately. To view the animation. click . Los Angeles. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . 21 Proceed to the next exercise. select Frame range. or frame. select PNG. for Compressor. For Dimensions. For File name. and click OK. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. Under Format.

Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. 388 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 2 Select the section box in the drawing area. click Save. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. under 3D Views. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building.9 On the File menu.

5 Select the roof. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. and on the View Control Bar.NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 389 . as shown. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top.

8 On the View Control Bar. In the Save As dialog. specify 2:00 pm. USA. select One week. and click OK.Boston. On the Annotation Categories tab. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). under Sun and Shadows Settings.Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. for File name enter 2pm . for Compressor. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. and click Duplicate. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 16 In the Video Compression dialog. Click the Desktop icon.Week Interval. you compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. For Time Interval. and click OK. 390 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. 12 In the Name dialog. and click OK. clear Section Boxes. and click Save. 9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. MA. 18 On the File menu. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. For Time. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. click the Multi-Day tab. click Save. 17 On the View Control Bar. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and click OK.Los Angeles . Orienting to True North for Solar Studies In this lesson. click OK.

9 Under Date and Time. select Cast Shadows. 7 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 11 Under Date and Time. specify 11:00 AM for time. and click OK. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. View still solar studies 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Plan Cutaway is displayed in the drawing area.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and select Winter Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click . you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. click . Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. and click OK. change the time back to 12:00 PM. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. and click OK. click . In this exercise. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Then. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Apply. on the Still tab. 10 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For example.Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that project north is the top of the view. select Summer Solstice. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click the Still tab. Orienting to True North | 391 . Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy.

13 On the View Control Bar. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click . click the Still tab. Rotate project to True North 17 In the Project Browser. click OK. 392 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry. and select Winter Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. On the Options Bar. click OK. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. under Graphics. NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North before you can change the angle value. and select View Properties. Notice that the project rotates in the view. select True North. for Orientation. 18 Orient the project to True North: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the drawing area. enter 45 and press ENTER to set the angle of rotation. In the Element Properties dialog.12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. in the Angle from Project to True North field. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings.

click OK. 23 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. For Save as type. click the Still tab. click . 22 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Export animated solar study 26 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. click Summer Solstice. click the Single-Day tab. 25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. verify that AVI Files is selected. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. In the Save As dialog. Orienting to True North | 393 . are saved with the project.NOTE Settings for the location and orientation. and click Apply. including the angle from True North. under 3D Views. 19 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select Summer Solstice. 21 On the View Control Bar. for File name. Los Angeles. 24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

Rendered views do not have this limitation. On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. enter 600 in the first field. and click OK. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. select Winter solstice 2pm in LA.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. for Scene. under 3D Views. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. double-click 01 Entry. ■ 27 In the Video Compression dialog. and select View Properties. Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. for Dimensions. select Draft (75 dpi). Since a rendered image is temporary. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. and click Save. under Floor Plans. 394 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . under 3D Views. 2 In the Project Browser. for Resolution.■ Under Format. click Raytrace. under Graphics. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. select Project North. In this exercise. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. click Save. it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project North for documentation and annotation purposes: ■ ■ ■ In the Project Browser. Right-click in the drawing area. In the Element Properties dialog. for Orientation. click GO. On the Options Bar. 29 On the File menu. The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. you also capture the image and export it as a JPEG file for future use. Refer to “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345 for additional information on rendering. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. capturing it. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. Click the Desktop icon. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. and exporting it as a JPEG image. 4 Render the scene: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click OK. for Compressor. 28 Once you are finished with the study.

Rendering an Interior View | 395 . select JPEG. so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project. click Export Image. click Capture Rendering. Notice that you can clearly see where light enters the windows and how the shadows fall on the floor. In the Project Browser. 7 Review some captured images of the building.■ ■ On the Options Bar. select Presentation (300 dpi). In the Save As dialog. 5 On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. The scene is rendered in high resolution. and click Save. click GO. for Save as Type. double-click each of the following images: ■ ■ ■ living area summer living area winter to house and studio summer solstice 8 On the File menu. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. under Renderings. 6 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ on the Design Bar. for Resolution. click Save.

396 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. type. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Architecture can be found under “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345. sections. and Section Boxes. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique." In Revit Architecture. elevations. and details. a consultant. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. Whether the audience is the general contractor. length. Advanced Model Graphics. or the client. you explore the stylistic approach. an outside reviewer. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. For the realistic approach. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. In this series of exercises. To express texture beyond material specifics. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular 397 . the Linework Tool. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. there are several options for expressing the architecture.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. In this tutorial. A majority of tools in Revit Architecture 2008 are intended to describe number. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work.

398 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Using the pre-built building model.building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. Co-house. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views.

and open Metric\m_Cohouse. Cnst. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. In the left pane of the Open dialog. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. expand Views (all). click Training Files. you create a copy of the plan.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 399 .rvt. expand Floor Plans. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. you create a presentation floor plan. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click 2nd Flr. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. 400 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 8 Click OK. elevations. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. and so on in this view. and click OK. Up Arrow. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan.2 In the Project Browser. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. sections. 7 Under Visibility. Down Arrow. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Annotation Categories tab. and click Rename. Cnst. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. 10 On the File menu. and clear DOWN Text. exit the menu. click in the drawing area. this represents the view getting smaller. click Save As. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. expand the Stairs category. Notice that no annotations display in this view. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. click the Scale control and select 1:100. This turns off the visibility of all tags. under Floor Plans. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. UP Text. 3 In the Rename View dialog. dimensions. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.

select Sun and Shadow Settings. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. 8 Select Boston. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. modify. on the Still tab. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. MA. click the Place tab. select By Date. 7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you can create. double-click it in the Project Browser. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. specify 35 for Shadow.rvt. click for Place. Under Shadows Properties. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. navigate to the folder of your choice. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 401 . 2 On the View Control Bar. USA for City. “Using Advanced Model Graphics” on page 401. 5 Under Settings.rvt. and click Save. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Time and Place. The higher the number. 12 Proceed with the next exercise.11 In the Save As directory. ■ Under Intensity. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Cast Shadows. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. click . 6 Under Settings. the darker the shadows. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Within a Project. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. At that place. and click OK.

402 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click . 18 Proceed with the next exercise. you can enter any city you wish. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. however. and select 1st Flr. click OK. be aware that if you enter a different city. click OK. “Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet” on page 403. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. clear Ground Plane at Level. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Save. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. 17 On the File menu. 11 Click OK. 10 Select Ground Plane at Level. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under Settings. specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time. Cnst. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. Turn off the ground plane shadows 13 On the View Control Bar. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.NOTE For this step. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground.

right-click the Design Bar.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. click Modify. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. and notice a view title displays. and click View. 6 On the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. select Arch Portrait. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Sheet. and click to place it. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 403 . click Add View. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Views dialog. TIP If the View tab is not available. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. and click OK.

Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. click Duplicate. and click OK. enter Presentation. under Graphics. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. click Edit/New. 404 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. To accomplish this. and click Activate View. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 In the Name dialog. click OK. click . you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. 9 On the Options Bar. For this analytique. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select No for Show Title. and click OK. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport.

TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. click . TIP Use care when sketching this chain. click Edit/New.16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. 25 In the Name dialog. click Region Properties. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. If necessary. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. and click OK. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. fill properties. click Filled Region. under Graphics. 17 In the Type Selector. click . 22 On the Design Bar. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. and select Chain. click Duplicate. When you are finished drawing the chain. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. 20 On the Options Bar. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. enter Solid Black. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 405 . and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. for Fill Pattern. and the boundary of the region. select Invisible Lines. click . 18 On the Options Bar. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes.

Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast.27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 34 On the File menu. click OK. Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. and click Deactivate View. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. select Solid Fill. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. and click OK. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. under Name. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. click Save. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. under Identity Data. scroll down. and click View Properties. “Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique” on page 406. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. 30 On the Design Bar. 406 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 28 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Override. right-click Copy of South. on the Model Categories tab. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Visibility. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. scroll up. and click OK. click in the drawing area. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click South. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. clear Visible. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 407 . and click OK. under Views (all). 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. expand Elevations.rvt. 9 Click OK. and click Rename. 2 In the Project Browser. exit the menu. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. click in the Walls row. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. expand the Doors category. and clear Elevation Swing. under Visibility. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. enter Presentation South Elevation. under Elevations. under Pattern Overrides.

20 On the File menu. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. 16 In the Name dialog. click OK. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. click . under Settings. and click OK. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. specify 35 for Shadow. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. Time and Place. click Save. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. By changing the angle of the sun. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 18 Specify 2:30 PM for Time. “Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet” on page 408.Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. select By Date. 12 Under Shadow Properties. 13 Under Intensity. 408 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 21 Proceed with the next exercise. click Duplicate.

expand Sheets (all). under Views (all).Presentation. click Add View. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 409 . 3 In the Views dialog. and click Add View to Sheet.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click A105 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. Notice the viewport displays a view title.rvt.

6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. select Viewport: Presentation. click Modify. 410 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Notice the view title no longer displays.5 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Design Bar.

you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. “Adding Section Views to the Analytique” on page 411. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 411 .8 On the File menu. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. click Save. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views.

and use the flip arrows if necessary.rvt. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. 412 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Floor Plans. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Add the section shown below. To accomplish this. double-click 1st Flr. expand Sections (Callout 1). you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. click Section. To fit correctly in the analytique. Cnst. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Section 2. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). select 1: 100 for Scale.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 On the Options Bar. Section 2 is added to the building model.

click Modify. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 10 In the Project Browser. Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. click the Model Categories tab. clear Visible. under Sections (Callout 1). click Override. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). right-click Callout of Section 2. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. 12 In the Project Browser. select 1 : 100 for Scale. 7 On the Options Bar. 15 Under Visibility. under Pattern Overrides. click Callout. 11 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click OK. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. click in the Walls row. enter Presentation Section 2. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. and click Rename. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 413 .6 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

The outer crop boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. and click OK. Notice that the crop regions no longer display. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. expand the Doors category. under Extents. Hide the crop boundary 21 Select the crop boundary. and clear Elevation Swing. clear Crop Region Visible. click . scroll up. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. The inner crop boundary shows the crop region for model elements. clear Annotation Crop.17 Under Visibility. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. 22 On the Options Bar. When you select the crop boundary. 414 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 20 Click OK.

Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. “Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View” on page 415. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. Under Shadows Properties. specify 35 for Shadow. open the Project Browser and. under Sections (Callout 1). 2 On the View Control Bar.rvt. TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. double-click Presentation Section 2. In addition. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 415 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Click Apply. select Cast Shadows. 25 Proceed with the next exercise. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Save. and click Advanced Model Graphics.24 On the File menu. Under Intensity.

■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click Save. Silhouette Edges. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. was added to this dataset for training purposes. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click OK. 10 Under Silhouette Edges. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. 5 In the Name dialog. under Silhouette Edges. under Settings. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. click Duplicate. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. 416 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Apply silhouette edges 8 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. click . select Relative to View.In the steps that follow. NOTE The line style. and click OK. select Override Silhouettes. and click OK. “Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique” on page 417. 11 On the File menu. select Directly.

and click Add View to Sheet. 6 On the Design Bar. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Add View. select Viewport: Presentation.Presentation. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sheets (all). and click to place the selected view. 5 In the Type Selector. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 417 . double-click A105 .Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the Views dialog. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. click Modify.rvt. select Section: Presentation Section 2. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. The view title no longer displays.

In the steps that follow. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. you click to specify the start radius. and press ENTER. Using a clock as a reference. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. 9 On the Edit toolbar. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. click . under Sections (Callout 1). 418 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. double-click Section 2. To rotate an object. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation.

under Sheets (all).After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. the callout rotates 180 degrees. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 419 .Presentation. Notice the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. 14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. double-click A105 . Notice that the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. and drag it up and to the left as shown.

click Modify. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Presentation Section 2. 4 In the View Templates dialog. enter Presentation. 420 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Create View Template from View.rvt. 3 In the New View Template dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 16 On the File menu. click Save. and click OK. After applying the view template to a new section view. “Working with a Presentation View Template” on page 420. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. click OK. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. 2 On the View menu. under Sections (Callout 1).15 On the Design Bar. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise.

6 In the Project Browser. annotations. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. click Add View. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click A105 . 7 In the Rename View dialog. 12 In the Views dialog. 16 On the View menu. and click Add View to Sheet.Presentation. lighting fixtures. you can simply apply the presentation view template. and click OK. right-click Section 1. under Sections (Type 1). click View Properties. and click Activate View. click Apply View Template. Now. select Viewport: Presentation. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view.Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. and click Rename. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Type Selector. and click OK. select Section: Presentation Section 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. select Presentation. under Sheets (all). Notice the furniture. 9 In the Select View Template dialog. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. Working with a Presentation View Template | 421 . enter Presentation Section 1. and elevation swings no longer display. right-click Copy of Section 1. under Sections (Type 1). 15 Right-click the viewport.

and click OK. “Working in a Callout Analytique” on page 422. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. traditional analytiques contain a detail.17 In the Element Properties dialog. click Save. under Graphics. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. 422 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . In this exercise. and click Deactivate View. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for Rotation on Sheet. 20 On the File menu. 18 Right-click the viewport. such as a tracery window or column capital. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically.

and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown.rvt. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select the callout. click Modify. under Sections (Type 1). Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. double-click Section 1. 4 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). Working in a Callout Analytique | 423 . under Sections (Callout 1). After you add the callout. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. enter Presentation Callout.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Callout. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 5 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Presentation Callout. right-click Callout of Section 1.

clear Crop Region Visible.7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. and click OK. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 424 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click View Properties. under Extents. clear Annotation Crop. 8 Right-click.

and click Deactivate View. and click Activate View. 15 On the Design Bar. and click OK.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. Working in a Callout Analytique | 425 . 14 In the Type Selector. and click Add View to Sheet. double-click A105 . select Viewport: Presentation.Presentation. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. 12 In the Views dialog. and move it into the position shown below. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. 17 On the View menu. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sheets (all). select Section: Presentation Callout. click Add View. select Custom for View Scale. click Modify. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click View Properties. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view.

double-click Presentation Callout. click Filled Region. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. 23 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. activate the viewport. When finished. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. 426 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . In the steps that follow.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. and click OK. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. and make adjustments as necessary. click Region Properties. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. select Solid Black for Type. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. under Sections (Callout 1). the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout.

Working in a Callout Analytique | 427 .Presentation. and click Activate View. and sketch the rectangle shown below. 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.26 On the Project Browser. click Filled Region. under Sheets (all). click . Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. double-click A105 . 29 On the Options Bar.

32 In the Element Properties dialog. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays. under Extents. select Crop Region Visible. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. and click OK. 31 On the View menu. click View Properties. 428 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 33 Select the crop region.30 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.

Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. under Extents. click Save. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. and apply shadows to the views. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. and click Deactivate View. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. click View Properties. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 429 . clear Crop Region Visible. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. and click OK. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaways. “Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes” on page 429.34 On the View menu. 37 On the File menu. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. select Cast Shadows. and click 1 : 200. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Under Intensity. and click OK. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. click Orient ➤ Southwest. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 3 On the View Control Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 2 On the View menu. 430 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . double-click Isometric. specify 35 for Shadow. click the Scale control. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click Duplicate. click . Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. under 3D Views.rvt. Under Shadows Properties. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 7 In the Name dialog.

10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 16 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click OK. Cnst. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Isometric 1. and click OK. and click Rename. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. 18 On the View menu. under Extents. and click OK. enter Isometric 2. 13 In the Rename View dialog. 15 In the Project Browser. double-click Isometric 2. Notice the section box that displays around the building model.8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Select Relative to View. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 431 . under 3D Views. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. 9 Click OK. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. and click OK. and click Rename. in the list. under 3D Views. under Settings. Select Ground Plane at Level. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. select Override Silhouettes. right-click Isometric. select Section Box. 14 In the Project Browser. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Isometric 1. Select 1st Flr. click View Properties. under Silhouette Edges.

and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. 432 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . You can use this to rotate the section box. make a duplicate of the view. click Modify on the Design Bar. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. When you are finished. right-click Isometric 2. under 3D Views. and click Rename. Before turning off the visibility of the section box. under 3D Views. 22 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. 23 In the Project Browser.20 Select the section box.

32 On the Annotation Categories tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. 34 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under 3D Views. 25 In the Project Browser. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. In such a case. Notice the section box no longer displays. clear Section Boxes. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Presentation. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser.24 In the Rename View dialog. When you are finished. either adjust the plane location. double-click A105 . NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. 27 On the Annotation Categories tab. 26 To hide the section box. enter Isometric 3. clear Section Boxes. double-click Isometric 3. and click OK. click Modify on the Design Bar. Next. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 433 . the stairs and railings may display. select Viewport: Presentation. under Sheets (all). 31 To hide the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. in the Type Selector. and click OK. 29 Select the section box. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. double-click Isometric 2.

drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. in the Type Selector. 36 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and. 434 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. select Viewport: Presentation. in the Type Selector. under 3D Views. select Viewport: Presentation.35 In the Project Browser. Notice the filled region partially covers the view.

47 On the Design Bar. The image below shows the lines redrawn. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. 45 On the Design Bar. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. This will make it easier to draw lines. click Region Properties. click Finish Sketch. 43 On the Design Bar. select Solid Black for Type. and click Deactivate View. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. and then click Edit/New. click Region Properties. and click Activate View. select Transparent for Background. under Graphics.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 44 Using the drawing tools. select Concrete for Type. click Edit. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. 42 Click OK twice. 38 Select the poche filled region. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. and click OK. click Lines. 39 On the Design Bar. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 435 .

3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown.rvt.49 On the File menu. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. double-click 1st Flr. then you specify the eye direction and range. you create the final view for the analytique. a cutaway perspective view. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. you add it to the presentation sheet. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. “Creating Cutaway Perspective Views” on page 436. click Save. Cnst. 436 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. click Camera.

Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 437 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics.The view opens immediately. specify 35 for Shadow. 4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. select Cast Shadows. Under Intensity. click . Under Shadows Properties. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.

9 Under Silhouette Edges. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. A section box now cuts through the building model. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. Notice the controls that display on each plane. select Section Box. Add a section box 10 On the View menu.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Extents. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. under Silhouette Edges. click View Properties. and click OK. and click OK. 438 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. 12 Select the section box. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. select Override Silhouettes. and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

On the Annotation Categories tab. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown.Presentation. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. you must specify the actual size of the image. Clear Crop Region Visible. 18 To hide the crop region. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. select Scale (locked proportions). click Size. and click OK. clear Section Boxes. After placing it. 17 Under Model Crop Size.14 Select the crop boundary. 15 On the Options Bar. enter 165 mm for Width. double-click A105 . click View menu ➤ View Properties. under 3D Views. under Change. and click OK. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport : Presentation. and click OK. under Sheets (all). 21 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 439 . 19 To hide the section box. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog.

Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Description. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. 5 In the Name dialog. under Text. “Annotating the Analytique” on page 440. and click OK. click Text. 9 In the Name dialog.22 On the File menu. specify a text size of 40 mm. click Edit/New. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Title. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. select a font. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. select the same font as the title. click Edit/New. under Text. click Save. specify a text size of 6 mm. 2 On the Options Bar. select Text : Title. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. click Duplicate. 10 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click OK. 440 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. click . click Duplicate.

15 In the Type Selector. click Modify. Annotating the Analytique | 441 .14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 18 On the File menu. click Save. 17 On the Design Bar. select Text : Description.

442 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Importing and Exporting 5 443 .

444 | Chapter 13 Importing and Exporting

Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

13

In this tutorial, you learn how to export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk®3ds Max® or Autodesk®VIZ, where you render it and create a daylight analysis. Autodesk 3ds Max is a professional three-dimensional animation package that provides robust animation, modelling, and workflow functionality for the most complex problems in design visualization and visual effects. Autodesk VIZ is a 3D modelling, rendering, and presentation software application that provides state-of-the-art image creation technologies for communicating and sharing your design intent. For simplicity, this tutorial uses 3ds Max, but the same workflow applies in VIZ. NOTE To complete this tutorial, you must have Autodesk 3ds Max 9 installed on your system. If you do not have 3ds Max installed on your system, or if you have an earlier version of the software, you can download a free trial from the Autodesk website.

445

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk 3ds Max and render it. To export the building model to 3ds Max, you select a 3D view of the building in Revit Architecture and export its geometry and data to a DWG file. You then link the DWG file to a new 3ds Max scene. NOTE You can also import the DWG file into 3ds Max, but linking allows you to easily update the 3ds Max scene with any changes that you make to the Revit Architecture model after you initially import it. After you link the DWG file in 3ds Max, you quickly render a view of the building model. The AccuRender materials that are applied to elements in the Revit Architecture building model can be rendered in 3ds Max. After you make some minor adjustments to the materials, you add a daylight system and a sky to produce a more polished rendering.

Dataset
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Export to 3DS.rvt.

Export a Revit Architecture building model to a DWG file
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click To Building. The view of the building that you want to render in 3ds Max displays.

446 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

There are a few steps you can take to reduce the geometry and data in the model to make the export process more efficient. You can change the detail level of the view, use a section box to limit the view geometry, and turn off visibility of building elements. Because this building model is small, it is not necessary to use any of these options at this time.

2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. 3 In the Export dialog:

For Save in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Under File Naming, verify that Automatic and Long are selected. If these options are selected, a file name that consists of the dataset name appended with the view name automatically displays for the File Name.

Click Options.

4 In the Export Options dialog, under Solids (3D views only), select Export as ACIS solids, and click OK. The 3D elements in the building model will be exported as ACIS solids, or as 3D objects with multiple sides. If you select to export as polymesh, each element would be exported as an object made up of multiple polygons that are joined, or ''meshed'' together. When exporting to a DWG for use in Max, it is recommended that you export building models to DWG as ACIS solids. 5 In the Export dialog, click Save. 6 In the alert dialog, click OK to ignore the view crop boundary. The building model is exported to a DWG file in the Training location that you specified. 7 Minimize Revit Architecture but keep it open, as you modify the building model and reload it later in the tutorial. Next, link the file to a 3ds Max scene and render it. Link a DWG file to 3ds Max if you anticipate making changes to the building model that you want to reexport to 3ds Max. Import files when you want to export only one iteration of a design for use in 3ds Max.

Create a 3ds Max scene
8 Open 3ds Max, and if the Welcome screen displays, click Close. 9 Click File menu ➤ New. 10 In the New Scene dialog, select New All, and click OK. 11 Click Customize menu ➤ Units Setup.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 447

12 In the Units Setup dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Display Unit Scale, select US Standard. Verify Feet w/Fractional Inches is displayed. Under Lighting Units, select American. Click OK.

13 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the file as RAC Building.max.

Link the Revit Architecture building model to 3ds Max
14 Click File menu ➤ File Link Manager. 15 In the File Link Manager dialog, click the Presets tab. 16 Under Named Presets, select Revit, and click Modify. This preset contains the desired settings for linking Revit Architecture building models. 17 In the File Link Settings: DWG Files dialog, click the Advanced tab. 18 Verify Use scene material assignments on Reload is selected. This setting ensures that material changes that you make in 3ds Max will be preserved if you reload the DWG file. 19 Click Cancel. 20 In the File Link Manager, click the Attach tab, and click File. 21 In the Open dialog:

For Look in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Select c_Export_to_3DS.rvt-3DView-ToBuiliding.dwg, and click Open.

22 In the File Link Manager dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Preset, select Revit. Click the Attach tab. Click Select Layers to include. A dialog listing all the layers that were created when you exported the Revit Architecture building model to the DWG displays.

23 In the Select Layers dialog:
■ ■

Select Select from list. Scroll to view the layers, and verify that a check mark displays to the left of each layer name to indicate it is selected. In this tutorial, you want all the layers visible, but you can use this dialog control the layers that display in your 3ds Max scene.

Click OK.

24 In the File Link Manager, click Attach this file. 25 In the Proxy Object dialog, click Yes.

448 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

The file opens in the 3ds Max, and 4 different views of the building model display. Only the single camera position that created the 3d To Building view was exported with the Revit Architecture building model.

26 Close the File Link Manager.

Adjust a scene for rendering
27 On the bottom right of the screen, click in the Perspective viewport to set it current. The edges of the viewport are highlighted in yellow when the viewport is current. 28 In the top left corner of the viewport, right-click the Perspective viewport label, and click Views ➤ Camera: To Building.

29 Adjust the view:

■ ■

In the lower-right corner of the screen, click Click in the Camera: To Building viewport.

(Dolly Camera).

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 449

Press and hold the mouse button, and drag the cursor toward you until the view is adjusted as shown.

Render the scene

30 On the Main toolbar, click

(Quick Render).

The scene renders and the rendering displays in the Render window. There are a couple of adjustments that you want to make to the rendering, including the quality of the glass and stone materials. Because this is an exterior view, you also want to add a daylight system (a sun) and a sky in the background.

31 Close the render window. NOTE If you want to save any of your renderings as you progress through this tutorial, at the top of the render window, click .

450 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Improve the quality of the glass and stone materials in 3ds Max

32 On the Main toolbar, click

(Material Editor). (Get Material).

33 In the Material Editor, under the bottom left side of the material slots, click 34 On the left side of the Material/Map Browser, under Browse From, select Scene.

All of the materials applied to the Revit Architecture elements that were exported to the DWG file with the elements display in the right pane of the browser. 35 In the list of materials, select and drag Glass to one of the material slots at the top of the Material Editor.

36 In the Instance (Copy) Material dialog, verify Instance is selected, and click OK. 37 In the Material Editor, change the color of the glass:
■ ■ ■

Under Templates, select Glass - Clear. Under Physical Qualities, for Diffuse Color, click the color swatch. In the Color Selector, specify a golden brown color, and click Close.

38 Change the quality of the stone material on the retaining wall:

■ ■

In the Material Editor, select another slot, and click

(Pick Material from Object).

In the Camera: To Building viewport, move the cursor over the retaining wall and click to select it.

■ ■

In the Material Editor, under Templates, select Stone. Close the Material Editor and the Material Map Browser.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 451

Add a sun and sky
39 Click in the Top viewport and zoom out until you can see the entire building and the camera. 40 Click Create menu ➤ Lights ➤ Daylight System. 41 In the Daylight Object Creation dialog, click Yes.

42 In the Top viewport, to the right of the building, click and drag to place and size the compass rose. 43 Move the cursor down and to the right to place the sun.

44 On the right side of the screen, locate the Command panel and click 45 Under Daylight Parameters, under Position, click Setup. 46 Under Location, click Get Location. 47 In the Geographic Location list, select Boston, MA, and click OK. 48 Under Site, for North Direction, enter 250. 49 Under Time:
■ ■ ■

(Modify).

For Hours, enter 12. For Month, enter 7. For Day, enter 21.

452 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

For Year, enter 2007.

50 Click Rendering menu ➤ Environment, and verify that the Environment tab is displayed. 51 Under Common Parameters, and under Background, click the color swatch, and set the background color to a sky blue color.

Render the scene

52 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene Dialog).

53 At the bottom of the panel, for Viewport, select Camera: To Building, and click the lock that displays next to the selector. The lock lets you adjust the scene in other viewports (which become active as you use them), and then click Render to render the viewport you originally chose. When off, Render always renders the active viewport. 54 Under Output size, click 640 x 480. 55 Click the Advanced Lighting tab, and under Select Advanced Lighting, select <no lighting plug-in>. 56 Click Render. The scene is rendered and displays the adjustments you made to the glass and stone materials, as well as the addition of the daylight system and sky.

57 Click File menu ➤ Save. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max” on page 453.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you create and render 2 similar cutaway views of the building model. You use 2 different techniques to create the cutaway views. You create the first view in Revit Architecture using a section box to limit or ''cut away'' geometry from the building in the front of the To Building 3D view. You then export the geometry to the DWG file you created in a previous exercise, and reload it in the Autodesk 3ds Max scene. You learn how to use a section box to limit the building model geometry that you export, a technique that is useful and time-saving when exporting large building models.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 453

A cutaway view created by a section box in Revit Architecture and rendered in 3ds Max

After you create the first cutaway view, you create a similar view in 3ds Max by adjusting the visibility of the curtain wall elements so they are not visible to the camera, and then rendering the scene in the To Building viewport. Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt and RAC Building.max.

Create a Revit Architecture cutaway view
1 Maximize Revit Architecture. 2 In the 3D To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK. 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom Out.

454 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

A section box displays around the view.

5 Select the section box so that grips display. 6 Select and move the grips until a cutaway view displays as shown.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Reload the cutaway view in 3ds Max and render it
8 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max. 9 When the file is reloaded, render it again.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 455

Create a cutaway view in 3ds Max
10 Open Revit Architecture. 11 In the To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 12 To restore the view, in the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Section Box, and click OK. 13 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max.

14 In 3ds Max, on the Main toolbar, click

(Select Objects by Name).

15 At the top of the Select Objects dialog, enter curtain to select all the Curtain Wall Panel and Curtain Wall Mullion objects that display in the left side of the dialog. 16 At the bottom right of the dialog, click Select. The components of the curtains wall are selected. You will create a named selected set to control the camera’s visibility of these objects.

17 On the Main toolbar, click

(Edit Named Selection Sets).

18 In the Named Selection Sets dialog, click set name. 19 Close the Named Selection Sets dialog.

(Create New Set), and enter Curtain Wall for the selection

20 Right-click in the view, and click Object Properties. 21 In the Object Properties dialog, click the General tab. 22 Under Rendering Control, clear Visible to Camera, and click OK.

23 On the Main toolbar, click

.

A cutaway view, similar to the one that you created with the Revit Architecture section box displays. 24 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Daylight Analysis” on page 457.

456 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Creating a Daylight Analysis
In this exercise, you create a daylight analysis of the Revit Architecture building model in 3ds Max. The analysis will uses daylight levels in a specific location to display a spectrum of colors on the building model. The colors indicate the different levels of light incident on each building surface. The blue and green colors indicate low light levels, while the red, yellow, and orange colors indicate high levels of light. A daylight analysis can be a useful tool in determining the sustainability of your Revit Architecture building models.

Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt, and RAC Building.max. 1 In 3ds Max, click Rendering menu ➤ Environment. 2 In the Environment and Effects dialog, under Exposure Control, select Pseudo Color Exposure Control. Pseudo Color Exposure Control is a lighting analysis tool that provides you with an intuitive way of visualizing and evaluating the lighting levels in your scenes. It maps luminance or illuminance values to pseudo colors that show the brightness of the values being converted. 3 Under Pseudo Color Exposure Control:

Under Display Type, for Quantity, select Illuminance. Illuminance displays values of light incident on surfaces.

■ ■ ■ ■

For Style, select Colored. For Scale, select Logarithmic. Under Display Range, for Min., enter 100. For Max, enter 8000. The display range sets the lowest and highest values to represent in the rendering. Although this tutorial provides display range values, when you create your own daylight analysis you will probably want to test different display ranges to get the results that you want.

4 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene).

Creating a Daylight Analysis | 457

The scene renders and displays a true color rendering in the Render window. The 256 color daylight analysis is then created.

5 If desired, in the Render window, click 6 Save and close the 3ds Max scene. 7 Maximize Revit Architecture.

, and save the file.

8 Save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the file without saving it.

458 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Importing SketchUp Files

14

The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. Once the model has been imported, you can easily add detail with Revit components. In this tutorial, you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family.

After you import the SketchUp model, you create a small building from the front mass form. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building.

459

460 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass
In this exercise, you create a Revit Architecture project, and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project, and not in the library.

Create a Revit project
1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.rte. 4 In the New Project dialog, click OK. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 6 In the Save As dialog, for File name, enter Import SketchUp, and click Save.

Import a SketchUp model
7 On the Design Bar, click the Massing tab. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Massing on the context menu that displays. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Create Mass. 9 In the informational dialog, click OK. 10 In the Name dialog, enter SketchUp Model, and click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 12 In the Import/Link dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Training Files icon. Double-click the Common folder. For Files of type, select SketchUp Files. Click the Sketchup file, buildings.skp. Under Import or Link, for Layers, select All. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements, visible elements, or select from a list.

■ ■ ■

Under Layer/Level Colors, select Preserve colors. Under Positioning, select Manually place, and select Cursor at center. For Place at level, select Level 1. In a new project, Level 1 is the only choice. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from, depending on the complexity of the project.

Under Scaling, for Import units, select Auto-Detect.

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 461

You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information.

Click Open.

The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers.

14 On the View toolbar, click

.

15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. 16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Mass. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs. 17 In the warning dialog, click the Close button.

18 Proceed to the next exercise, “ Creating a Building from Mass Faces” on page 462.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces
In this exercise, you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. You turn their visibility off to view only the building.

462 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

After you create the building from the mass faces, you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.

Create roofs from mass faces
1 Zoom in to the front mass form, and on the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 3 In the Type Selector, verify Basic Roof: Generic - 400mm displays. 4 On the Options Bar, for Level, verify Level 2 is selected. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass, and when the cursor displays a plus sign, select the face so that it highlights in red. The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign, indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection.

6 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. A roof is created from the mass face. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. To see the new roof, on the View toolbar, click to turn off mass visibility in the view. Click again to display masses.)

7 With the Roof by Face command still active, on the Options Bar, verify that Select Multiple is selected. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 463

9 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. 10 Adjust the view:

■ ■

On the View toolbar, click

.

In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin, and move the cursor in the drawing area until you can see the middle mass.

11 Right-click, and click Cancel to end the Spin command. 12 On the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.

14 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof.

464 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

select Core Face: Exterior. to turn off the mass visibility in the view.15 On the Design Bar. click .200mm displays. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. verify Basic Wall: Generic . for Loc Line. and display only the roofs that 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. 22 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 465 . 20 In the Type Selector. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. click Wall by Face. click you created. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. 16 On the View toolbar. 21 On the Options Bar. and adjust the view so you can see the front of the mass form.

click to view only the walls and roofs. 27 Select the left face of the left mass. 466 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files .23 On the View toolbar. click Curtain System. 26 In the Type Selector. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. click Create System. 28 On the Options Bar. 29 Using the same technique. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. 24 Click to redisplay the masses. Create curtain systems from mass faces 25 On the Design Bar.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 467 . click Roof by Face. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. Create walls from mass faces 31 On the Design Bar. click . select the other wall. 34 Select the mass face shown below.30 On the View toolbar. and select it. and on the Options Bar. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. 32 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. and adjust the view so you can see the back of the mass forms. Create a roof from a mass face 33 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. click Create Roof.

click Curtain System. click to view the building that you have created. 36 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. Create the final wall 37 On the Design Bar. 39 Click to redisplay the masses. 38 On the View toolbar. and on the Options Bar. click Wall by Face. 468 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . and select the mass face shown below.Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 35 On the Design Bar. click Create System.

and curtain systems that make up your building Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 469 . specify a point for the camera target. 44 On the View toolbar. 41 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. click Camera. double-click Level 1. to view only the walls. 43 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. The perspective view created by the camera displays. Below the right corner of the view. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. roofs. as shown. In the far left corner of the building that you created. click in the view. 42 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. specify a point to place the camera. under Floor Plans.Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 40 In the Project Browser. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display.

Click the frame to display its grips. click 47 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . for Justification. Modify the roofs 49 On the Views toolbar. select Center. Click OK. Under Grid 2 Pattern. click Modify. Change the justification of the curtain systems 45 On the Design Bar. Under Grid 1 Pattern. click . 470 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . for Justification. 48 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. and select the left curtain system in the view.You may need to resize the view again. 46 On the Options Bar. select Center.

verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. and adjust the view so you can see the front of the building. Add doors to the building 54 In the Project Browser. click . and move the roof edges as shown below. 53 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and click Cancel to end the command. 52 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D View 1. under 3D Views.50 Select each roof to display its grips. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under 3D Views. 57 In the Type Selector. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 471 . 56 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 51 Right-click. double-click {3D}. 55 On the View toolbar. click Door. 58 Add doors to the building as shown below.

472 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files .59 Save and close the drawing.

Creating Families 6 473 .

474 | Chapter 15 Creating Families .

About Families and the Family Editor 15 All elements in Revit Architecture 2008 are “family based. they are still related and come from a single source. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. material set. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. In this tutorial.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Architecture to help you manage your data and make changes easily. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. thus the term family. 475 . or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. shape. Even though various types within a family can look completely different. each with a different size.

however. This makes file management much easier. but you cannot create new system families. floors. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. Family templates are either host-based or standalone. floors. and partition wall styles. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . trees. Host-based families have components that require hosts. exceptions to this rule. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. You can load them into projects. foundation. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. and roofs. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. generic. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. You also learn about the Family Editor. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file.rfa extension. Walls. and when and how to use it. For example. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. for example. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Architecture recognize it as a particular component type. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . The basic walls system family. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project.rfa extension. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. In this lesson. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. Using the Family Editor. In addition. has wall types that define interior. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Architecture is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. transfer them from one project to another. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. such as a dome roof. and roofs are examples of these types of families. while many more are stored in component libraries. exterior. because there is only one file to track. Revit Architecture has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and comprise principle building components such as walls. Standalone families include columns. and furniture. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. There are. 476 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor .

it is saved with the project. Introduction to the Family Editor | 477 .The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. you can drag it into the document window. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. You create in-place families only within the current project. how to access it. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. However. 2 On the File menu. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. In the final exercise. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. for example. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. or 3D. you learn about the Family Editor. In this section. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. or you can load it using the Load From Library. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. Load Family command on the File menu. and also a standalone furniture family component. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. and when to use it. To add a family to your project. custom wall treatments. elevation. you learned about the different types of Revit Architecture families and when to use them. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. After the family has been loaded in the project. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. such as plan. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. if you change the original family. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family.

There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. and click Open. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. such as newsgroups. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. In this case. To start a new family. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. 9 Save the newly-defined family. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. presume it is a bay window that you require. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters.In this exercise. 3 Next. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. navigate to a family file. When the family opens. select the appropriate template. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. modify it as needed. consider checking the web library and other web resources. it opens within the Family Editor.rfa extension and it will open Revit Architecture in the Family Editor. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. you learn when to use the Family Editor. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. you can double-click any file with an . 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. and then load it into the project. and click Open. With Revit Architecture open. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. if you have exhausted your external resources. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. you can click File ➤ Open. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. If you find a close match. it should be available within the Type Selector. 5 Finally. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. 478 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. Within the Windows® environment. open it in the Family Editor. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. how to access it. 4 If you can’t find the component you require.

In each lesson. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. In addition. You create a furniture family. 479 . Using the installed templates. a lighting fixture.Creating Components in the Family Editor 16 In this tutorial. When you create an in-place family. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. you create it within the project file. you learn how to create a different type of component. and several annotation families. you learn how to create specific Revit Architecture 2008 families. not within the Family Editor. you create an in-place family.

and pin those reference planes. Each sketch is set to a different height. line colors. There can be more than one closed loop in the sketch but they must not touch or intersect each other. Step 5: Dimension the reference planes and create parameters. Solids and Voids are sketch based. if required. The sample below shows a start angle of 0° and an end angle of 180°. and export settings for selected geometry. ■ Extrusion: The sketch for an extrusion must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. use the Cut Geometry tool to create the cut. build geometry. The start and end angles of the revolution can be defined in the Revolution properties. The first line of the path defines the work plane for the profile. and Sweep. Step 2: Define additional subcategories. Step 4: Create the skeleton of the family by adding reference planes in all required views. Step 9: Create a single level of 2D and 3D geometry and lock it to the selected reference planes. fill patterns. 480 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Revolve. materials. Revolve: The sketch for a revolved object must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. click Finish Sketch on the Design bar. You can unjoin solids or cancel the cutting of a void on a solid using commands available on the Tools toolbar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Join Geometry Unjoin Geometry Cut Geometry Don’t Cut Process Overview: Creating a Family Follow this best practice process for creating a family: Step 1: Select a family template. When you are in sketch mode. Step 8: Test (flex) the family: switch between the types. Step 10: Repeat the flex procedure until reasonably complete. Step 11: Test the family in a project environment. Step 7: Add 2 or more types in the Family Types dialog with different values for the parameters. and a Profile that must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. To quit the sketch mode. Step 3: Use the Element Properties dialog to define the reference planes that represent the origin of the family. Note that no geometry is created. If you place the void before you add the solid. Blend. switch between the different host types. line patterns. The sketches must not touch or intersect each other. Sweep: A sweep contains two sketches: a 2D Path that can be a closed or open. Step 6: If the selected family template is a host-based template.Creating 3D Geometry All tools for creating 3D geometry can be accessed in the Family Design Bar. and test after each step. both of which must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. continue to incrementally add reference planes. lineweight settings. you can no longer select or modify an element that is not in the sketch. Blend: A blend contains two sketches. tests at this point ensure that the skeleton of the family works correctly. You can also join the geometry of different solids with the Join Geometry tool. it automatically cuts the solid. create different host types for testing purposes. There are four different methods to create Solid geometry and/or Void geometry in the Family Design Bar: Extrusion. Subcategories are used to define visibility settings. if the family includes a host. ■ ■ ■ When a void is placed on a solid. Base and Top.

and create one below. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 5 While pressing CTRL. You should name reference planes to easily identify them in all views. and click OK. select both reference planes. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. and click Open. 4 Navigate to Metric ➤ Templates. 8 Using the same method. click Ref Plane. Adding Reference Planes Next. Select a family template 1 Close all open projects or families. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. select Metric Furniture. Defining the Origin of a Family | 481 . and create one to the right. You have created a new furniture family. click to pin the reference planes. 3 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the existing vertical reference plane. You can control which reference planes are used as origin in the Element Properties dialog. therefore new reference planes are required in plan and elevation views. and on the Options Bar. The furniture family in this lesson has the shape of two boxes. and the family contains 2 reference planes in this floor plan. 6 Select the horizontal reference plane named Center (Front/Back). you define the skeleton of the family with reference planes in plan and elevation views before you create geometry.rft. on the Edit toolbar. verify that Other ➤ Defines Origin is selected. NOTE The direction of the reference planes is not important. Level is open. click 7 In the Element Properties dialog. The intersection of these reference planes now defines the origin and the insertion point of the family in plan view. click Training Files. and click OK. .Defining the Origin of a Family The intersection of 2 reference planes in a view defines the origin and the insertion point of a family in a project. The floor plan Ref. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane above the existing horizontal reference plane. verify that Defines Origin is selected for the Center (Left/Right) reference plane.

for Identity Data ➤ Name. and click OK.4 Click Modify. enter Left. Name reference planes 5 Select the left reference plane and. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 482 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You name reference planes so that you can identify them in different views. click . on the Options Bar.

Defining Priorities for Reference Planes | 483 . The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter. The priority is specified as the Is Reference value in the Element Properties dialog for the reference plane. define the priorities of the reference planes you have created. select Left. left. top). The reference does not snap and shows no shape handles. The reference plane allows minor strength snapping. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click . If a reference plane defines the left edge of a family. Is Reference Value Not a Reference Definition The reference plane can be used in a family. The reference allows minor strength snapping. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes Revit Architecture includes several predefined priorities that you can apply to a reference plane. name the other reference planes Right. use Left for the Is Reference value. The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. When you dimension a family and a strong and a weak reference are close together. the strong reference is always captured first. right. for Other ➤ Is Reference. Front. 1 Select the Left reference plane.7 Using the same method. and on the Options Bar. These behave the same as strong references. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter. Weak Reference Strong Reference Directional References According to these rules. but cannot be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. These are predefined system priorities that define a direction (for example. and Back. as shown.

For Group parameter under. enter 300mm. enter 750mm. and press ENTER. for Label.3 Using the same method. The dimension can have a fixed value or can be driven by a parameter. Repeat for the other reference plane. Width. Front. We want drive Length. specify the Is Reference value to correspond to the name of each reference plane (Right. 6 Select the dimension line. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select Add Parameter. Click OK. 7 On the Options Bar. Repeat for the other reference plane. Dimensioning Reference Planes The dimension controls the behavior of the location of reference planes. Click the temporary dimension. and click above the planes to place the dimension. 1 Dimension the horizontal reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. Click the temporary dimension. and press ENTER. 4 Select the Left reference plane and the Right reference plane. and Height as parameters of the furniture family. select Dimensions. 5 Click Modify. 484 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. and Back). enter Length. for Name. 2 Dimension the vertical reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. Note that the Length parameter has been added to the dimension string.

Dimensioning Reference Planes | 485 . click to place the dimension. Add a multi-segment dimension 10 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.9 Using the same method. dimension the horizontal reference planes. 11 Click each of the vertical reference planes. 12 Using the same method. dimension the outer horizontal reference planes with the Width parameter. and click the EQ symbol above the dimension.

Position and dimension the 4 new reference planes with a fixed distance from the outer reference planes. Now the reference planes can be used in the family.Add base reference planes 13 On the Design Bar. and Base Back. 14 Create 2 horizontal reference planes and 2 vertical reference planes within the existing outer reference planes. click the base reference planes. Base Right. Base Front. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and press ENTER. select Not a Reference. 16 While pressing CTRL. enter 50mm for the left temporary dimension. for Other ➤ Is Reference. click Ref Plane. 18 Click the Base Left reference plane. you need to specify the Is Reference values. but do not appear in the project. Because the base planes should not be used as a reference for dimensions or alignments. 486 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . name them Base Left. and click . 15 Using the Element Properties dialog.

21 Select the Left and Base Left reference planes. 20 On the Design Bar. position the remaining new reference planes. click Dimension.19 Using the same method. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 487 . and lock the dimension.

Click OK. double-click Front. the family contains a level and a reference plane that defines the origin of the family in the elevation view. Make sure that you use consistent views to add dimensions. under Elevations.22 Using the same method. and lock the dimensions. 28 Change the lower temporary dimension to 150mm. 25 Create 2 horizontal reference planes above the existing horizontal reference plane. 24 On the Design Bar. you add a reference plane and the Height parameter of the family in the Front view. click Ref Plane. select Not a Reference. and section views. 488 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . For Identity Data ➤ Name. 23 In the Project Browser. You can dimension reference planes in plan. 26 Select the middle reference plane. and click 27 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . elevation. The front view displays. By default. Next. dimension all other reference planes for the base with the outer reference planes. enter Base Bottom. Under Is Reference.

and save the file as Cabinet. Under Is Reference. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. on the Options Bar. Click OK. In the next exercise. 37 Select the last dimension added. 33 Select the lower reference plane and the Base Bottom reference plane. Click OK. navigate to Training/Metric/Families. enter Height. 38 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 36 Click Modify. The basic skeleton of the furniture family is completed. select Add Parameter. for Label. 30 With the top reference plane still selected.29 Select the top reference plane and change the temporary dimension to 1450mm. select Dimensions.rfa. select Top. click Dimension. and click to place the dimension. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 489 . for Name. you create 2 types of the family in the Family Types dialog. Under Group parameter under. 34 Lock the dimension. 32 On the Design Bar. enter Top. click 31 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 35 Dimension the lower reference plane and the Top reference plane. For Identity Data ➤ Name.

under Family Types. 1 In the Project Browser. each type is represented with selected parameters. clicking OK adjusts the geometry and closes the dialog. 5 Using the same method. click in the titlebar of the Family Types dialog and drag it so that both the dialog and the drawing area are visible. enter 600 x 1500 x 1600. for Width. for Width. 6 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and dimensions are specified. enter 1000. create a new type named 800 x 1000 x 1800.Managing Family Parameters and Family Types Parameters and their values can be managed in the Family Types dialog. for Height. and click OK. under Floor plans. NOTE In order to see changes applied to the reference planes. When a family is loaded in a project. 10 Click Apply. 7 Click Apply. 4 In the Name dialog. click Family Types. but no geometry has been added. for Name. enter 1000. Family types allow you to predefine variations of a family. For Length. clicking Apply adjusts the geometry without closing the dialog. Note that the reference planes and the dimensions adjust according to the entered values. the types defined in the family editor appear in the project. Family types are also a good way to test your family for correct behavior. parameters. For Length. click New. 8 Using the same method. double-click Ref. NOTE In the Family Types dialog. enter 1800. Level. Best practice is to perform the first tests when the reference planes. 490 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . create a new type named 1000 x 2000 x 2800. 3 In the Family Types dialog. enter 2800. 9 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Note that the name of the type you have created is displayed in the Name selection box at the top of the dialog. enter 800. for Height. check the family as often as possible by switching between different types. enter 2000. 11 Click OK. 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

Lock geometry to reference planes Locking sketch lines: Lines of a sketch can be locked to a reference plane in plan view to ensure that the edge of the solid is maintained if the dimension of the reference plane changes. under Floor Plans. Sketch an extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. Change a work plane for existing geometry: You can also use the Work Plane dialog to change the work plane for existing geometry in a drawing. double-click Ref. Reference planes have the ability to define a work plane if they are named. You constrain the extrusions to the reference planes you created in previous exercises. The Family Editor offers multiple tools to set a work plane current: Define a work plane before adding geometry: Using the Work Plane dialog. edges of a solid form can also be locked to reference planes. Creating Solid Forms Use the simplest form to create solid geometry for a furniture family. there is an option on the Sketch tab of the Design Bar to Set Work Plane. This option will display the Work Plane dialog. Creating Geometry In this lesson. select the geometry. you use extrusions to model the solid geometry of a cabinet family. In such an instance. create an extrusion from the plan view. Define a work plane in sketch mode: While in sketch mode. Locking edges of solid/void forms: In elevation view. you can select a named reference plane or define a work plane by picking a plane or a line in the drawing area before you sketch geometry. and click Edit Work Plane on the Options bar. A work plane is a planar surface on which you can add sketch lines or others components. Because you lock the planar edges in plan view. In that case. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. where you can define the plane. Defining Work Planes Any solid/void form is created on a work plane. Lock geometry to reference planes | 491 . you access the Work Plane dialog by clicking (Plane) on the Tools toolbar. Level. Make sure that you have set an appropriate work plane when you create 2D or 3D geometry in your family. you only need to lock the top and bottom edges of the solid geometry. 2 On the Design Bar.

An example of sketch lines drawn off of reference planes An example of sketch lines aligned on the desired reference plane 492 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click .3 On the Options Bar. You can use the Align tool to align the sketch lines with the desired reference planes. 6 On the Sketch tab. do not sketch directly on the reference planes. with multiple reference planes or when you need to sketch with the Line tool. The sketch of the extrusion is now locked to the outer reference planes in plan view. When the setup is more complex. 4 Sketch the rectangle directly on the outer reference planes. When the parameters Length and Width change. the extrusion is changed accordingly in plan view. NOTE Only sketch directly on the desired reference planes when the situation is clearly arranged. click Finish Sketch. 5 Lock each line of the sketch with the reference plane.

9 Select the Top reference plane as the alignment reference. under Elevations. 10 Lock the dimension. 8 On the Options Bar. double-click Front. and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane. NOTE You can also drag the top edge of the solid geometry with the extrusion shape handle to the top reference plane and lock it.Adjust extrusion height 7 In the Project Browser. click (Align). Creating Solid Forms | 493 .

17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 21 Click the base geometry and on the Options Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. click Visibility.11 Align the bottom of the extrusion to the Base Bottom reference plane and lock the dimension. under Floor Plans. clear Plan/RCP. click . and lock all the sketch lines with the reference planes. Level. click Finish Sketch. 13 On the Design Bar. 20 Click Modify. double-click Front. under Elevations. click . 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. Create the base geometry 12 In the Project Browser. 19 Select the Base Bottom reference plane as the alignment reference. 23 Save the file. double-click Ref. 15 Sketch the rectangle directly on the reference planes for the base (the inner reference planes). 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The base should display only in elevation and 3D views. and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane. under View Specific Display. 494 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 18 On the Tools toolbar.

1 In the Project Browser. The lines display again. clear Coarse. select the symbolic line. verify that the Line tool is active. and section views of the family. select both lines and. 7 Draw a symbolic line from the lower left corner to the top right corner. under Detail Levels. double-click Ref. and section views. but not in coarse. There are 2 methods for adding 2D geometry available from the Family tab of the Design Bar: Model lines: these can be added in all views. select a different family type. under Floor plans. Hiding the existing solid geometry before you create the symbolic lines helps you create the lines on the intersections of the reference planes. Model lines and symbolic lines can also be constrained to reference planes. elevation. and lock the geometry. 4 On the Design Bar. They are view direction specific. lines need to be added as symbolic illustration in plan views. on the Options Bar. When you use 3D geometry. they show only in views that are parallel to their creation view. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 14 On the View Control Bar. Test the family 11 On the Design Bar. and click the locks to create the constraint. 3 On the View Control Bar.Creating 2D Geometry You can create families using 3D and 2D geometry. click Family Types. the software automatically creates the correct plan. select the base geometry and the furniture geometry. as the current displayed detail level is Coarse. 2 While pressing CTRL. NOTE You have to exit Symbolic Line mode to lock the geometry. The family geometry should change each time you apply a different type. The lines are greyed out. Click Modify. 10 On the View Control Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. click Symbolic Lines. and lock the geometry. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 8 While pressing CTRL. and click Apply. the lines need to appear in medium and fine detail levels. Level. click Visibility. 9 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 12 In the Family Types dialog. 13 Click OK. Creating 2D Geometry | 495 . By design. For the furniture family. For example. 6 Draw a line from the top left corner of the reference planes to the lower right corner. use model lines to display additional lines in the 3D view of the family. Symbolic lines: these can be added in plan. elevation. and click OK.

under 3D views. Save a 3D view 1 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. double-click View 1.The geometry of the furniture family is complete. The last view creates the thumbnail view of the family. 3 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. Loading a Family into a Project Families can be loaded directly from the family editor into selected open projects. set a 3D view of the family current. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Save View. This opens a predefined 3D view. 496 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Before you save the family. 2 On the View Control Bar. 5 Save the file.

The family is loaded into the new project. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. click Load into Projects. You can press SPACE to change the orientation of the type.rfa 3D View: View 1 to switch to the family. and click to place them. 9 In the Project Browser. drag each of the types into the drawing area. 12 On the Views toolbar. Creating a Door Family In this lesson. All the family types you created are listed as options. 10 In the Project Browser. 13 Close all open projects or families. Create a project 6 On the Standard toolbar. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. expand Families ➤ Furniture ➤ Cabinet. click (3D). click . If required. Creating a Door Family | 497 . under Cabinet. you can create additional types with different dimensions in a project. this view is maintained when the family is opened again. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click Window menu ➤ Cabinet.NOTE If you save the family in a 3D view different than the default {3D} view and if you have saved the orientation of your view. 11 Click Modify.

Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Door. The door type has a variable height and width. and thickness.rft. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Training Files.You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. height. 498 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you draw the plan view components for the new door family.

Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. Labelled dimensions. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes.4 On the View menu. click Tile. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. are also displayed. click . click Symbolic Lines. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. 10 On the Options Bar. part of the door properties. Notice the four tiled views. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 499 . Level. and represent the door opening profile. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. 9 In the Type Selector. 7 Enter ZF. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Floor Plan: Ref. 6 Maximize the window. select Doors [projection]. 5 On the Window menu.

Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown. 500 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension.

select Thickness for Label. select Width for Label. Because labelled dimensions are parameters. click Modify. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. 19 On the Options Bar. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 501 .Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness.

In the image below. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. you first specify the arc center. When drawing an arc from center and end points. 502 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 24 Enter SI. click the down arrow button. along with the witness line controls. select Plan Swing [cut]. click Symbolic Lines. then you specify each end point.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. 22 In the Type selector. and select the command from the menu. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. click . the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. 23 On the Options Bar. as shown. 21 On the Design Bar. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location.

you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. click Lines. double-click Exterior. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser.Add a reference plane for the exterior face of the door 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. click Set Work Plane. under Elevations. “Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 503. 2 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click . enter 50 mm for Depth. under Specify a new Work Plane. 3 On the Design Bar. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 503 .

504 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Left. click Dimension. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. 10 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference.8 On the Design Bar. then click to specify the dimension witness line.

13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 17 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 19 Under Detail Levels. click Visibility. and Fine are selected. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 505 . 16 Select the door leaf extrusion. under Floor Plans. Medium. under View Specific Display. double-click Ref. Left/Right. verify that Coarse.12 On the Design Bar. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. select Thickness for Label. and clear Plan/RCP. click Modify and select the dimension. Level. 14 In the Project Browser. select Front/Back. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. and When cut in Plan/RCP.

click OK. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click . you assign a material to the door leaf. select Panel for Subcategory. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu.20 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Materials dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select Oak Door for Name. under Materials and Finishes. 6 Click OK. “Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 506. 506 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 9 On the Options Bar. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. click Modify. 7 In the Materials dialog. 2 In the Materials dialog. select Oak Door.No Gloss. under Name. for Material. click Duplicate. 21 In the Element Properties dialog.Dark. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. and click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Material Library dialog. and click OK. and click OK.Red/Stained. click . 3 In the New Material dialog. It also defines its appearance when rendered. click OK. click 11 In the Materials dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 On the Options Bar. click . 22 Proceed to the next exercise. for Material. enter Oak Door for Name. click Materials. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. click 17 In the Materials dialog. click for Texture. and click OK. click OK. under AccuRender.

click the Model Graphics Style control. under Views (all). 22 Zoom in on a door corner. The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. and select Shading with Edges. double-click View 1.The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. Assigning Materials to the Door Components | 507 . under 3D Views. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. 21 On the View Control Bar.

enter 125 mm for Frame Width. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. enter 2000 mm for Height. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Click Apply. under Family Types. Under Other. 25 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog and see how the new door reacts. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. In the Family Types dialog. 3 In the Name dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 2500 mm for Height. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. Under Other. Enter 1000 mm for Width. 27 Click OK. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. By flexing the new component. Enter 1500 mm for Width. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. 2 In the Family Types dialog. Try to move the dialog off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. 24 On the Design Bar. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. click Family Types.Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. 508 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . “Defining New Door Types” on page 508 Defining New Door Types In this exercise. and click OK. click New.

16 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Place new door types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. click Load. enter 2100 mm for Height. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. Training Door. and click OK. navigate to the location where you saved the door family.rfa. click Browse. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. select Project. 11 Click OK. Click Apply. 22 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. click Door. 17 Under Create new. 19 On the Options Bar. click Save. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click New. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click New. 15 In the New Project dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click OK. 8 Under Family Types. and click OK. 10 In the Family Types dialog. 9 In the Name dialog. Defining New Door Types | 509 . Click Apply.4 In the Family Types dialog. 5 Under Family Types. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. under Template file. 20 In the Open dialog. Enter 750 mm for Width. Click Apply. 12 On the File menu. 6 In the Name dialog. Training Door. 7 In the Family Types dialog. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.rte. Define the second new door type. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. click Wall. Enter 925 mm for Width. select it. click New ➤ Project. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. click Training Files. Enter 1220 mm for Width. Define the third new door type. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. and click Open. enter 2000 mm for Height.rfa. enter 2134 mm for Height.

click Door. 29 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. click the Model Graphics Style control.23 On the View toolbar. 28 In the Type Selector. click . and select Shading with Edges. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. 24 On the View Control Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. 27 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. 26 In the Type Selector. 510 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

height. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. This completes the lesson. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. and specify values for the window width. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. default sill height. Creating a Door Family. 32 You can close all files without saving. Finally. and create the window sash as a sweep. 31 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. Creating a Window Family | 511 . glazing and mullions as extrusions. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. and mullion offset. You create the window frame.30 In the Type Selector.

512 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you specify the parameters for the new window family. 2 On the File menu.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. is one of the type parameters. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Window. The window type has a variable height and width. The label name. click Training Files.rft. 4 Maximize the Elevation: Exterior view. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. click New ➤ Family. equally spaced vertical mullions. 6 Two dimension strings display with their labels. Height and Default Sill Height. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. also one of the window properties. 5 Enter ZF. When you add labels to dimensions. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.

then sketching the sweep profile. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window opening. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 513 . Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. click . 10 Click OK. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. click Sketch 2D Path. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. This is the starting point for the new window. 9 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. click Family Types. 4 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Family Types dialog.Modify the new window type height and width parameters 7 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 513. 2 On the Design Bar. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. and click Apply. This process is called “flexing the model. Enter 1800 mm for Width. and click Apply. 11 Proceed to the next exercise.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. Click Apply. Change the height and width values again. click Lines. 3 On the Design Bar. enter 1300 mm for Height. Snap the cursor to each corner. Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.

and specify an offset of 50 mm. and click Open View. click Sketch Profile. 9 In the Go To View dialog. The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. click . 514 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 12 On the Design Bar. select Elevation: Right. click the Scale control. 7 On the Design Bar. click Finish Path. click Ref Plane.6 Click the locks so the sweep is locked to the opening size. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 8 On the Design Bar. and select 1:10. 10 On the View Control Bar. 11 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. 14 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. 13 On the Options Bar.

click . sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. select Chain and click . 17 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. click Lines. click Modify.15 On the Design Bar. 19 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. Sketch the window frame profile 23 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 16 On the Options Bar. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 515 . 21 On the Options Bar. enter Sash for the Name. 18 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. and select the reference plane. 25 Below the red dot. and click OK. select Prefer: Wall faces. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click Dimension. under Identity Data. and select the dimension. 24 On the Options Bar.

28 Select the left edge of the frame section. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. 516 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and drag it to the interior face of the wall. click Modify. 27 Select the right edge of the frame section. However. When the lock displays. When the lock displays. 26 On the Design Bar. the exact dimensions are not critical.NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall.

and specify the dimension value. click Modify. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 517 . select the line you want to move. as shown. TIP After adding the dimension. 30 On the Design Bar. When the lock displays. click it to lock the line to the reference plane. 31 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. click Dimension.29 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane.

click Finish Sweep. 37 On the Design Bar. zoom out until it displays. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. click Finish Profile. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. click the lock to constrain the present value. click the lock to constrain the present value. click . 34 On the Tools toolbar. 33 Select the 20 mm dimension. 518 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . When the lock displays.Modify each dimension if necessary. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. 35 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. Next. this is the top of the window opening. When the lock displays. Align the new profile to the window opening edge 32 Select the 40 mm dimension. 36 On the Design Bar.

45 mm for Depth.The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. Chain of walls or lines. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. “Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry” on page 519. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. click Lines. double-click Exterior. 38 In the Project Browser. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. under Specify a new Work Plane. 39 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. and select Lock. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. If necessary. 4 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry | 519 . 2 On the Design Bar. and select the option. under Views (all). expand 3D Views. click Set Work Plane. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. under Elevations. and double-click View 1. click . and enter .

The entire sash outline is selected. 520 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame. and lock icons display on each line. ■ ■ Enter . ■ Click . set the following options: Click . and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle. 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle.50 mm for Offset. Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.

11 In the Project Browser. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 521 . under 3D Views. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. double-click View 1. under Elevations. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles.10 In the Project Browser. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. “Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 521. double-click Right. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. The window sash extrusion is now complete.

2 On the Design Bar. and enter 30 mm for Offset. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. click . Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 522 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Ref Plane. double-click Right.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

16 On the Options Bar. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. 15 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. under Specify a new Work Plane. double-click Exterior. 7 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 17 Select each of the sash extrusion lines to create the glass boundary. 11 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 523 . 14 In the Work Plane dialog. under Elevations. enter -12 mm for Depth. click Set Work Plane. under Identity Data. click Lines.5 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. click Dimension. and click OK. click . 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. click Modify. click . Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. and select Lock. 8 Select the reference plane.

click Finish Sketch. 23 On the Design Bar. View the window model with frame. 20 Select the glass extrusion. under Elevations. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. double-click Right. 524 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. click Modify. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. click . specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter.18 On the Design Bar. After the family is loaded into a project. under Identity Data. 21 On the Options Bar. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. sash.

Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 525 . enter 1500 mm for Height. Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.24 In the Project Browser. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. Move the Family Types dialog off to the side so you can see the window model. click Family Types. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. For example. under 3D Views. Click Apply. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. 26 In the Family Types dialog. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. Under Other. NOTE After flexing the model. Enter 1500 mm for Width. double-click View 1.

NOTE When you draw each reference plane. 28 On the Edit toolbar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Dimension. the exact location is not critical. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. 2 On the Design Bar. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 526. click Ref Plane. double-click Exterior. 526 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .27 Click Cancel. under Elevations. click to return the window to its original dimensions. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar.

Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. 5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. as shown. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. After adding the dimension. Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. Do not be concerned with dimension values. Do not be concerned with dimension values. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 527 . as shown. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it. click Modify.

9 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. Under Parameter Data. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. 12 In the Family Types dialog. 528 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. enter Mullion Offset for Name.. Notice the dimension value becomes editable.> for Label. click Family Types. and click OK. select Family parameter. 11 On the Design Bar. Click OK.. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. select Dimensions. Under Group parameter under. under Dimensions. Select Instance. select <Add parameter. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type.

As you did before. click Lines.14 Click the dimension value. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. select Mullion Offset for Label. and click OK. and enter 350 mm as the new value. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. move the dimension value as shown. 21 In the Work Plane dialog. 20 On the Design Bar. enter 14 mm for Depth. click Modify. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 529 . 15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 22 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. and click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. under Specify a new Work Plane. 18 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. click Set Work Plane. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. However. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. 23 On the Options Bar.

Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. 26 On the Design Bar.After you complete the sketch. Move the dimension values as shown. click Dimension. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. 530 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

click Modify. 29 On the Design Bar. Under Parameter Data. 30 On the Options Bar. enter Mullion Width for Name. select <Add parameter> for Label. select Family parameter. select Dimensions. Under Group parameter under. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 531 . and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps.28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. Select Type. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Click OK. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog.

and on the Options Bar. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. Remember. 532 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Family Types. click Finish Sketch. ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left.32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. This is changed in later steps. and click Apply. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. select Mullion Width for Label. 35 In the Family Types dialog. 33 On the Design Bar. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. Select the dimension. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously.

40 On the Design Bar. Under Other. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog. click to return the window to its original dimensions. and aligned with the sash edge. 38 On the Edit toolbar. In this case. evenly spaced. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 39 On the Design Bar. Click Apply.Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. NOTE After flexing the model. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 37 Click Cancel. enter 1500 mm for Height. click Set Work Plane. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. or undoing the same. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. 41 In the Work Plane dialog. under Specify a new Work Plane. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 533 . you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. and click OK. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. Enter 1500 mm for Width.

44 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. 46 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. as shown. click Lines. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. 48 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. 534 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Do not be concerned with the dimension value.42 On the Design Bar. 49 On the Design Bar. 47 On the Design Bar. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. click Modify. 45 On the Design Bar. click . click Dimension. 43 On the Options Bar. click Dimension.

Move the dimension value as shown. Select the dimension. 51 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. Remember. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously.50 On the Options Bar. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. click Finish Sketch. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 535 . ■ ■ 52 On the Design Bar. select Mullion Width for Label. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. and on the Options Bar. select Mullion Width for Label.

Join the mullion geometry 53 On the Tools menu. double-click View 1. under 3D Views.The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. If necessary. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. 54 Select the horizontal mullions. and select the vertical mullions. 536 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Join Geometry. 55 In the Project Browser.

59 Click Cancel. so when you open the Family Types dialog. you can still see the window. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. 58 In the Family Types dialog.Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. 57 On the Design Bar. Under Other. Click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. Flex the window model 56 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. enter 1500 mm for Height. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 537 .

under AccuRender. 2 In the Materials dialog. sash. click Duplicate. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. 9 Select the window frame sweep. and the mullions. “Assigning Materials to the Window Components” on page 538. Dark. click the Model Graphics Style control. 3 In the New Material dialog. click OK. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. under Elevations. and click OK. No Gloss. click to return the window to its original dimensions. select Stained. 8 On the View Control Bar. 4 In the Materials dialog. you assign materials to the frame. 5 In the Material Library dialog. and click OK.60 On the Edit toolbar. click Materials. 6 In the Materials dialog. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. click for Texture. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. 61 Proceed to the next exercise. enter Pine Frame for Name. the sash. double-click Exterior. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. sash. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. Yellow/. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. and select Shading with Edges. 538 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

18 On the Design Bar. verify that Coarse. verify that Coarse. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). select Edit for Visibility. and Fine are selected. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 539 . Medium. click Modify. select Pine Frame for Name. under View Specific Display. click . under 3D Views. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. 20 Select the glass extrusion. click Visibility. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. double-click View 1. 23 Under Detail Levels. and click OK. and Fine are selected. 21 On the Options Bar. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. clear the other view options. under Identity Data. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Medium. 16 Under Detail Levels. click OK.10 On the Options Bar. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. 13 In the Materials dialog. under View Specific Display. and click OK. click for Material. Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. 24 In the Project Browser. double-click Right. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory.

sash. and glass display their assigned materials. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. “Defining New Window Types” on page 540. Defining New Window Types In this exercise.25 Zoom in on a window corner. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. 540 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The window frame. mullions.

Defining New Window Types | 541 . and click Apply. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. and click Apply. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. verify that 2000 mm is specified for Height. Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. In the Family Types dialog. 3 In the Family Types dialog.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Family Types. 2 On the Design Bar.

The window height is doubled. under Family Types. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. enter 1000 mm for Height. and click OK. Click Apply. verify that the following parameter values are specified: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. 8 In the Family Types dialog. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. 7 In the Name dialog. 5 In the Family Types dialog. Enter 1250 mm for Height. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog. and click Apply. 542 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click New.

click Load. Enter 1300 mm for Height.9 Under Family Types. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name.rfa. Click Apply. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. 14 In the Family Types dialog. 13 In the Name dialog. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. 11 In the Family Types dialog. click Save. Click Apply. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. Defining New Window Types | 543 . Training Window. Click OK. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. 15 On the File menu. 10 In the Name dialog. click New. and click OK. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. click New. click Window. 19 On the Options Bar. click to start a new project based on your default template. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. Enter 1500 mm for Height.

clear Tag on Placement. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. 34 On the View toolbar. click Thin Lines. 544 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 33 Zoom in on the center window. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. click the Model Graphics Style control. and select Shading with Edges. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. 23 On the Design Bar. select it. click Window. 25 In the Type Selector. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. 29 In the Type Selector. click Wall. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. Notice the detail that displays. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. 27 In the Type Selector. 24 On the Options Bar.20 In the Open dialog. click .rfa file. 35 On the View Control Bar. 32 On the View menu. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. click Modify. and click Open. navigate to the location of your Training Window. 31 On the Design Bar.

model lines. elevation. Revit Architecture allows you to specify a parameter as instance or type parameter. the easiest way to create a window frame is to create an extrusion including two rectangles for the frame edges in an elevation view of the family. Linework: You can create model lines and symbolic lines in a family. sketch. You can also switch on/off selected subcategories in a project. that each family in a project can have a different value for an instance parameter. line colors. you plan. Solid Sweep) you can decide in which view you start to create your solid geometry. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. and symbolic lines are usually assigned to selected Subcategories. Creating a Complex Model Family In the following exercises. Basically. Parameters: You should carefully define the parameters in a family. line patterns. and section views of a family. a parameter drives geometry in a family. Instance parameter means. A large number of parameters reduce the performance of the family. Model lines are displayed in every view.You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. Solid geometry: Use solid geometry as often as possible to represent a family because it automatically gives you the correct plan. where symbolic lines are view direction specific: they show only in views that are parallel to the view where they have been created. Planning a Complex Model Family Before you start to create a complex model family. Formulas between parameters drive the behavior of parts of the family. and materials of the subcategories. Solid Blend. you should sketch the design of the family and make notes of the desired behavior: ■ Subcategories: Solid geometry. and create a complex window family with a complex opening. ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a Complex Model Family | 545 . This allows you to drive lineweights. Solid Revolve. The window family includes nested families for the outer sill and uses shared parameters for evaluation purposes. Creating solid geometry: Based on the 4 ways to create solid geometry in Revit Architecture (Solid Extrusion. For example. where type parameters drive the geometry for each family type.

Medium and Fine.■ Scheduling/exporting parameters: Revit Architecture differs between different parameter types. Level of detail: Revit Architecture allows you specify the visibility of each solid form and line geometry for the Detail Levels Coarse. you should define different widths for each of the casements. By instance: Each single instance of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. By family type: Each type of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. where a Shared parameter can appear in schedule and tags and can be exported to ODBC. you can use a parameter with the Parameter Data Type Yes / No. Section. By category: The solid material gets its material from the selected category or subcategory in a project. A Family parameter does only appear in the family itself. Detail Level View Plan Coarse Medium Fine Section Elevation Additionally. and Elevation views. ■ Visibility settings: If specific visibility settings are required for selected geometry or linework. 546 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Assigning material: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Directly: The solid geometry in the family has material explicitly assigned. Various parameters drive the behavior of the family. Sketching the requirements The window family should be modelled with different detail levels in Plan. and should account for instances when either of the casements is toggled off.

You should test your family often as you incrementally build geometry in the next steps. Selecting a Family Template | 547 . click Training Files. create a second wall type with a different wall thickness so that you can test the family. and click Open. The family editor is opened with a new window family. you open a template that you use as the basis for the complex window family. 1 Close all open projects or families. One test scenario consists in switching between the wall types with different thicknesses to check whether the constraints work correctly. navigate to Metric ➤ Templates. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. select Metric Window.The window contains the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A: Insertion depth B: Frame depth C: Frame width D: Sash width E: Center post width F: Wall offset G: Left width H: Right width I: Width J: Wall offset top K: Top frame height L: Bottom frame height M: Height Outer sill: ■ ■ ■ Fixed front height: 30mm Fixed back height: 50mm Fixed offset: 30mm ■ Glass fixed width: 20mm Selecting a Family Template In this exercise. The family template uses a wall as host. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.rft.

4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ Under Construction. 5 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. click Ref Plane.4 Select the wall. select Defines Origin. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening The window contains a more complex wall opening than a standard rectangular opening. 7 In the Name dialog. click 2 In the Element Properties dialog. click 5 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. so you model the new opening first. in the Edit toolbar. Click OK. . for Is Reference. refer to the command line to verify what is selected. select Weak Reference. 3 Select the horizontal reference plane. Create reference planes for the opening 6 On the Design Bar. This requires that the standard rectangular opening be deleted and replaced with voids cut out from the default wall. for Construction ➤ Structure. This means that the exterior wall layers that have wraps assigned will end at this reference plane. Under Other. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. . select Basic Wall : Wall 1. 11 Switch back to the previous wall settings: ■ ■ Select the wall. In the Type Selector. accept the default name. for Name. click Edit/New. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Right reference plane. and on the Options Bar. click Duplicate. click Edit. Verify that Defines Origin is selected. 9 Click Modify. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. and click . select Wall Closure. TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. enter Insertion Edge. click . 7 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Left reference plane. enter 400. 10 Click OK 3 times. and on the Options Bar. Prepare the centered reference planes 1 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 548 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . for Structure ➤ Thickness. 9 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog.

TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. and click OK. Click OK. you can more easily select it because it doesn’t overlap with other elements in the drawing. enter 75. use the blue circle grip to drag the left edge of the reference plane to line up with the left side of the Insertion Edge reference plane. 12 Using the same method. For Group parameter under. Dimension horizontal reference planes 15 On the Design Bar. 23 Click Modify. for Label. This parameter is defined as an instance parameter. By extending the reference pane. 13 Select the Exterior horizontal reference plane on the top wall edge.10 Select the first reference plane you created. for the temporary dimension. click Dimension. on the Options Bar. select Add Parameter. 14 Using the same method. because each inserted value should have a different insertion depth. 18 Select the Exterior reference plane. Next. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening | 549 . 20 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. enter Wall Offset Left. click Dimension. The horizontal reference plane defines the inner edge and the new vertical reference planes define the left and right edges of the wall offset for the opening. name the other new reference plane Wall Offset Right. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Dimension the Exterior and Insertion Edge horizontal reference planes. drag the Interior horizontal reference plane to the left side. for Name. Dimension vertical reference planes 21 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the dimension. refer to the status bar to verify what is selected. 22 Dimension the Left and Wall Offset Left vertical reference planes. and select Instance. enter Insertion Depth. 17 Click Modify. for Identity Data ➤ Name. dimension the vertical reference planes. select Constraints. and click .

Dimension reference planes in elevation 29 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. Click OK. for Label. for Label. 32 Click Modify. you apply the same method to reference planes in an elevation view. enter 100. 31 Create a horizontal reference plane below the Head reference plane. select Add Parameter. 27 Using the same method. click Ref Plane. on the Options Bar. For Group parameter under. Click OK. 30 On the Design Bar. for Label. 28 Select the dimension. 36 Dimension the Head and Wall Offset Top reference planes. enter 100. 33 Select the new reference plane. The skeleton for the opening is complete. 37 Select the Wall Offset Top reference plane. on the Options Bar. and press ENTER. select Add Parameter. dimension the Right and Wall Offset Right reference planes. enter Wall Offset. For Group parameter under. double-click Exterior. under Elevations. 25 Select the dimension. for the temporary dimension. select Construction. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. for Name. and click OK. 550 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Wall Offset Top. 35 On the Design Bar. select Construction.24 Select the Wall Offset Left reference plane. for Name. click Dimension. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. and click . 38 Select the dimension. The reference planes and parameters for the plan view are defined. for Identity Data ➤ Name. 39 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. enter Wall Offset Top. select Wall Offset. for the temporary dimension. Next.

click (Plane). Wall Offset Left. 1 In the Project Browser. under Specify a new Work Plane. 7 Select the Exterior reference plane. click . 5 On the Options Bar. for Name. Level. click (Align). Modelling a Complex Wall Opening You model the opening with voids that are cut from the wall geometry. 6 On the Tools toolbar. select Reference Plane : Sill. NOTE Zoom in as necessary so that the rectangle does not snap to reference planes. and click OK. 2 On the Tools toolbar. and sketch the extrusion as shown.rfa. and Wall Offset Right reference planes. lock the other sketch lines to the Insertion Edge.40 Save the file as Casement Window. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 551 . 3 In the Work Plane dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. select the top edge of the sketch. double-click Ref. 8 Using the same method. under Floor Plans. and lock the alignment.

click (Align). 552 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and lock the alignment. and Left reference planes. 10 Using the same method. align and constrain the top and bottom edges of the other void to the Head and Sill reference planes. the voids need to be cut from the wall geometry. 17 Select the left vertical edge of the default opening (Opening Cut). Lock the sketch lines to the Insertion Edge. 16 On the Views toolbar. 15 Using the same method. and press DELETE. click (3D). NOTE Create the void extrusion directly below the one you just created. Interior. click Finish Sketch. 12 On the Tools toolbar. Right. 11 In the Project Browser. and lock the alignment. under Elevations. In order to use the voids as a new opening. double-click Exterior. you need to delete the standard rectangular opening cut. Also. 14 Align the bottom edge of the smaller void to the Sill reference plane. 13 Align the top edge of the smaller void to the Wall Offset Top reference plane.9 On the Design Bar. create and constrain a void extrusion for the inner part of the opening as shown.

Next. 18 On the Tools toolbar. 19 Select the void. 20 Using the same method. click (Cut Geometry). The first void is cut from the wall. you control correct behavior of the new wall opening by changing the wall offset parameters. cut the second void from the wall. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 553 .The opening in the wall is deleted. and then select the wall geometry.

under Floor Plans. 6 Dimension the Left and Frame Left vertical reference planes. 554 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 100mm. 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Wall Offset Right reference plane. for the temporary dimension. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 2 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Wall Offset Left reference plane. click Family Types. select Not a Reference. 22 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Construction ➤ Wall Offset Top. For Identity Data ➤ Name. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . enter Frame Left. Click OK. For Wall Offset. Note that the opening has changed correctly. 3 Select the reference plane. enter 50mm. Creating Window Frame Geometry The reference planes and parameters for the window frame are defined in the plan and exterior elevation views. 9 Select the reference plane.Change wall offset parameters 21 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. enter 50mm. You can also test the opening by flexing the wall types and thicknesses. double-click Ref. 5 On the Design Bar. and click . Level. Click OK. 7 Select the Frame Left reference plane.

Click OK. Click OK. Creating Window Frame Geometry | 555 . For Other ➤ Is Reference. create a horizontal reference plane below the Insertion Edge reference plane. 13 Select the Frame Right reference plane. 17 Using the same method. name it Frame Interior. enter 100mm. select Frame Width. For Group parameter under. enter Frame Width. for Label. for Name. select Add Parameter. 16 Select the left dimension. on the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. 12 Dimension the Right and Frame Right vertical reference planes. for Label. select Not a Reference. for the temporary dimension.10 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. enter Frame Right. 11 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. select Construction. and create a Frame Depth type parameter dimension as shown. 14 Select the right dimension.

The exact vertical position of the reference planes is not important. 556 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . dimension the planes at 120mm.18 Create 2 more vertical reference planes to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. name the reference planes Center Post Left and Center Post Right. 19 Using the same method used previously. and create a Center Post Width type parameter dimension. NOTE The positioning of the center post will be specified later in the exercise.

25 Dimension the Sill and Frame Bottom horizontal reference planes. and dimension the Head and Frame Top reference planes at 150mm. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 30 Select the other dimension. under Elevations. Click OK. enter Frame Bottom. 26 Select the Frame Bottom reference plane. 24 On the Design Bar. 28 Select the lower dimension. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 21 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Sill reference plane. create a horizontal reference plane below the Wall Offset Top reference plane. on the Options Bar. select Add Parameter. select Construction. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. For Group parameter under. select Construction. enter Frame Height Bottom. enter 150mm. select Add Parameter. Click OK. and click 23 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Creating Window Frame Geometry | 557 . For Identity Data ➤ Name. enter Frame Height Top. double-click Exterior. for Label. click Dimension. for the temporary dimension.Create parameters in elevation 20 In the Project Browser. 22 Select the reference plane. on the Options Bar. Click OK. For Group parameter under. for Label. select Not a Reference. name it Frame Top. 27 Using the same method.

for Wall Offset Top. for Wall Offset Top. for Insertion Depth. enter 70mm. Under Dimensions. instance parameters can be changed on an instance level for each inserted window instance. Under Other.The skeleton of the window frame is complete. enter 50mm. Family types allow you to set different values for parameters and to save this state as a specific type of the window family. enter 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 and Click OK. Under Construction. enter 50mm. enter 80mm. enter 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. Before you model the frame geometry. 33 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Under Construction. A family type manages type parameters only. For Wall Offset. and click OK. 37 In the Name dialog. enter 1500mm. For Frame Height Top. 35 In the Name dialog. For Width. 36 Under Family Types. You create 2 family types for the Casement Window family. click Family Types. 558 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Additional values for new parameters will be set continuously after each reasonable step of completeness. enter 100mm. enter 2000mm. For Frame Width. click New. 34 Under Family Types. for Insertion Depth. for Height. click New. For Frame Height Bottom. enter 60mm. For Center Post Width. For Frame Width. enter 100mm. 38 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Frame Depth. Create family types 32 On the Design Bar. enter 80mm. enter 50mm. enter 100mm. For Wall Offset. enter 80mm. enter 100mm. add 2 window types with different parameters to check whether the parameters work correctly.

Center Post Right. for Height. enter 1400mm. and lock the alignments to create a constraint for all edges as shown. enter 80mm. select Reference Plane : Frame Interior. 43 On the Design Bar. 44 On the Options Bar. and a third rectangle outside the intersection of the reference planes. under Specify a new Work Plane. for Frame Depth. Under Other. 45 On the Tools toolbar. NOTE Create 3 rectangles: One on the left. Model frame geometry 41 On the Tools toolbar. enter 1500mm. Frame Bottom. 39 Click Apply. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimensions. Frame Left. Head. enter 120mm. Center Post Left. click (Align). and click OK. enter 70mm. for Name. Frame Bottom. Left Creating Window Frame Geometry | 559 . Frame Top. and sketch the extrusion with 3 rectangles as shown. NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. enter 120mm. click . 46 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. one on the right. click (Plane). and click OK. For Frame Height Bottom. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Frame Height Top. Right. 40 Under Name. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Sill. For Width. Rectangle position in view Left Right Outside (larger rectangle) Lock to reference planes Frame Top. 42 In the Work Plane dialog. For Center Post Width. Under Dimensions. Frame Right.

and lock the alignment. click Finish Sketch. The window frame is complete. click Edit. click 50 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align). 56 Click OK twice. Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane. 52 On the Views toolbar. 51 Click Modify. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. . Frame material will be assigned later in the tutorial. click (3D). 53 Select the extrusion solid geometry. clear Plan/RCP. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. 560 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Ref. and lock the alignment. 49 On the Tools toolbar. For Graphics ➤ Visibility/Graphics Overrides. under Floor Plans.47 On the Design Bar. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 48 In the Project Browser. Level. 57 On the View Control Bar. clear Coarse. select Frame/Mullion. 55 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. Under Detail Levels.

4 Create 4 vertical reference planes as shown. 5 Select the leftmost reference plane you just created. click Family Types. Level. under Name. 59 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. click Scale ➤ 1:10. However. Define parameters in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. because the visibility settings are different for the left and right sashes. 3 On the Views toolbar. 2 On the View Control Bar. click (Thin Lines) to work with heavier lineweights. you model each sash separately. and click Apply. Changing the scale makes it easier to work in detail.Test the family again 58 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. double-click Ref. For Identity Data ➤ Name. under Floor Plans. enter Sash Left Left. Defining the Window Sash Parameters You use known modelling procedures to create the geometry for the window sash. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 561 . 60 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. and click 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ .

18 On the Design Bar. Click OK. double-click Exterior. on the Options Bar. You can drag dimension text to the left or right side using the Drag Text grip. for Label. 12 Using the same method. select Construction. enter Sash Width.■ ■ For Other ➤ Is Reference. 15 Click Modify. For Identity Data ➤ Name. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 562 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. For Group parameter under. specify each dimension as 50mm. under Elevations. select Sash Width. 7 Using the same method. 11 Select the next dimension. 14 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Frame Bottom reference plane. 9 Select the left dimension. add parameters to the remaining dimensions. 16 Select the reference plane. on the Options Bar. enter Sash Bottom. Click OK. select Add Parameter. for Label. click Dimension. select Not a Reference. Click OK. specify the properties for the remaining new reference planes. working from left to right: Reference Plane 2 3 4 Properties Name: Sash Left Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Left Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference 8 Dimension the reference planes with adjacent reference planes for the window frame as shown. select Not a Reference. and click 17 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Define parameters in elevation view 13 In the Project Browser.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Before you model the sash geometry. and sketch 2 rectangles to form the right sash extrusion as shown. 20 Select the Sash Bottom reference plane. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. 32 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. Specify it as Not a Reference. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimension. select both dimensions. 28 For Name. extend the 2 window types with different values for the new parameter to check whether the parameter work correctly. for the temporary dimension. Dimension the Frame Top and Sash Top reference planes. enter 70mm. 26 Under Construction. 23 While pressing CTRL. click (Align). 30 On the Options Bar. and lock the alignment to create a constraint for all edges as shown. Create solid extrusions 29 On the Design Bar. create a horizontal reference plane below the Frame Top reference plane: ■ ■ ■ Name it Sash Top. 31 On the Tools toolbar. on the Options Bar. The skeleton of the window sash is complete. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. 24 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 21 Using the same method. click Family Types. select Sash Width. for Sash Width. enter 50mm. click . and click OK.19 Dimension the Frame Bottom and Sash Bottom reference planes. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 563 . 25 For Name. for Label. for the temporary dimension. 27 Click Apply. 22 Select the Sash Top reference plane. enter 50mm.

Sash Right Left. switch to the Exterior Elevation view and create the solid extrusion for the left sash. under Floor Plans. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. Center Post Right. 35 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click OK twice. and lock the alignment. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. Sash Right Right. 43 On the Views toolbar. for Extents ➤ View Range. Level floor plan view to align the edges as you did for the right sash. 41 Using the same method. NOTE Modifying the cut plane offset value allows you to see the sash extrusion in the view. for Cut plane ➤ Offset. 34 In the Project Browser. click (3D).NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. click Finish Sketch. 33 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click 39 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align). Rectangle position in view Outside Inside Lock to reference planes Frame Top. double-click Ref. click Edit. Frame Right. Sash Top. 40 Click Modify. and lock the alignment. Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane. 37 In the View Range dialog. 42 Switch back to the Ref. 38 On the Tools toolbar. Level. enter 1500. 564 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Sash Bottom. Frame Bottom.

select Frame/Mullion. For Group Parameter under. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. click Edit. create a visibility parameter for the left sash named Sash Left. 47 Click OK twice. for Graphics ➤ Visible. 3 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 46 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. and click . 1 Select the right solid geometry of the window sash. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. clear Coarse. select the 2 extrusions. select Construction. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. and click 45 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ . 6 Using the same method. note the parameters you have just created with checkboxes in the Value column. For Graphics ➤ Visibility. 7 On the Design Bar. click the rectangular button on the right side. Under Detail Levels. Defining Visibility Parameters You add visibility parameters so that you can display the left and right sashes separately. enter Sash Right. clear Plan/RCP. click Family Types.44 While pressing CTRL. 5 Click OK 3 times. Defining Visibility Parameters | 565 . click Add parameter.

clear Sash Left. click Dimension. double-click Exterior. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. under Floor Plans. and name them Glass Axis Right. select Not a Reference. Glass Axis. dimension the Insertion Edge. the geometry is only greyed out if the visibility parameter is not assigned. This is because the glass width and height will be extended to the window frame if the sash is switched off. 9 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. NOTE Any 3D geometry assigned to a Yes/No parameter is still visible in the family editor. 10 Under Construction. The glass is located in the center of the frame / sash with a fixed thickness of 20mm. not aligned to reference planes. 8 In the Project Browser. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 6 Using one dimension string. Glass Axis Left. Click OK. For Identity Data ➤ Name. and click Apply. 9 Create 3 more reference planes as shown. double-click Ref. 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click EQ to center the reference plane for the glass axis between the reference planes for the window frame.Test the family 8 For Name. 566 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Glass Axis. and Glass Axis Horizontal. 3 Select the reference plane. 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry The glass geometry will be dimensioned directly in the sketch. under Elevations. and Frame Interior reference planes. Level. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane between the Insertion Edge and Frame Interior reference planes. For Other ➤ Is Reference.

under Specify a new Work Plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. You create parameters that define the dimensions of the glass geometry. create EQ dimensions with the adjacent sash reference planes. 2 In the Work Plane dialog. select Reference Plane : Glass Axis. Sketch the right glass extrusion 1 On the Tools toolbar. for Name.10 For each of the new reference planes. Creating the Glass Geometry | 567 . click (Plane). Creating the Glass Geometry In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. and sketch the right glass extrusion as shown. you use extrusions to create the glass for the complex window family. click . 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. This centers the glass reference planes between the window sashes. and click OK.

7 Click EQ. select Other. for Label. 10 Dimension the left edge and right edge of the sketch. 12 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 13 Using the same method. dimension the top and bottom edge of the sketch. 8 Using the same method. click Dimension. on the Options Bar. select Add Parameter. 568 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and the right edge of the sketch.Dimension the sketch 5 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 6 Using one dimension string. dimension the left edge of the sketch. enter Glass Length Right. and create a Glass Height Right parameter. 11 Select the dimension line and. dimension the top and the bottom of the sketch. Click OK. click Dimension. For Group Parameter under. the Glass Axis Right reference plane.

20 Assign the same Element properties to the left extrusion that you assigned to the right. create the glass geometry for the left sash with the new parameters Glass Height Left and Glass Length Left.14 On the Design Bar. Assign properties 15 Select the glass geometry. enter -10. 18 Click OK twice. click Finish Sketch. enter 10. 17 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. clear Coarse. click Edit. For Extrusion Start. and click 16 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Graphics ➤ Visibility. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory.0. click (3D). Create the left glass extrusion 19 Using the same method. Under Detail Levels. clear Plan/RCP. select Glass.0. Creating the Glass Geometry | 569 . 21 On the Views toolbar. For Constraints ➤ Extrusion End.

However. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading With Edges. you should do it. if you can build your family without using formulas. Formulas are typed directly into the Family Types dialog box. x raised to the power of y log sqrt(Value) sin cos tan asin acos atan exp abs 570 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . set the height to 2000) as well as mathematical expressions.used to control families in many ways. They can also be used to control Yes/No parameters. Formulas can use logic such as IF statements (IF the width is 1000. Creating Formulas to Define Width Formulas are one of the many powerful aspects of Revit Architecture Families . where all of the parameters for a family are listed. as it will minimize performance hits.22 On the View Control Bar. Expressions for formulas Mathematical Function Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Exponentiation Logarithm Square Root Sine Cosine Tangent Arcsine Arccosine Arctangent e raised to an x power Absolute Value Expression + * / x^y. The formulas in the following chapters of this tutorial should give you mainly an impression of how complex formulas can be set.

Creating Formulas to Define Width | 571 . under Parameters. For Group parameter under. under Floor Plans. 3' . 3 ) Simple IF . enter 1000. select Length. For Type of Parameter. select Add Parameter. IF ( Length < 45' . 8 . 2' 6" . click Dimension. enter Width Sash Right. The width of the right sash will be determined using formulas. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 8 On the Design Bar. IF ( Length < 55' . enter Width Sash Left. B = 3 ) . y = 2). 9 In the Family Types dialog. 4 Click Modify. for the temporary dimension. 3 ) Yes/No Controlling the state of a Yes/No parameters A with a next Yes/No parameter B: Not (B) Position the center post 1 In the Project Browser. 2'-6". <result-if-true>.(2*30) Simple IF IF ( <condition>. <result-if-false>) IF ( Length < 35' . click Family Types. double-click Ref. 5 Select the Center Post Left reference plane."A" is less than or equal to "B": IF ( NOT ( A > B ) . NOTE Do not dimension the right sash using the same method. click Add. on the Options Bar.6. 8' ) ) ) IF . Click OK.OR IF ( OR ( A = 1 . 5' . 6 Select the dimension. Level. for Label. 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select Dimensions. 8 . 8 . This would overconstrain the family.AND IF ( AND (x = 1 . 3'-0" ) Simple IF . 3 ) Multiple IF IF ( Length< 35' . 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 3 Dimension the Frame Left and Center Post Left reference planes.11 Samples for formulas Standard Width .

the new value is 560. the new value is 880. and Center Post Width.Frame Height Top . 572 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . in the Formula row for Glass Length Right.Frame Height Top Frame Height Bottom . select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. (Height . The value for Width Sash Right is now calculated dependent on the values for Width. enter if(Sash Right. (Width Sash Left . enter if(Sash Left.Frame Height Bottom . Width Sash Left. You can test the formulas by switching between the different window types in the Family Types dialog. and press ENTER. In the Formula row for Glass Height Right. for Dimensions ➤ Width Sash Right ➤ Formula. enter if(Sash Right. enter if(Sash Left. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. ■ ■ ■ 20 Click OK. (Height . ■ Click Apply. and press ENTER. Width Sash Left). (Width Sash Right .2 * Sash Width). 11 In the Family Types dialog. Test the family 13 Under Name.Frame Height Top . The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously. Width Sash Right). select Dimensions. In the Formula row for Glass Height Left. click Family Types. enter 1200. 19 In the Family Types dialog.■ ■ For Group Parameter under. In the Formula row for Glass Length Left. enter the formula to get the calculated width: (Width .Width Sash Left) . ■ Click Apply. and click OK. Height .(Frame Width * 2) .Frame Height Top . Click OK.Frame Height Bottom).2 * Sash Width). 16 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left. enter 400.Center Post Width 12 Press ENTER. The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously.2 * Sash Width). 15 For Name.Frame Height Bottom). Frame Width. and cannot be changed in the Family Types dialog. Define glass width and length 18 On the Design Bar. 17 For Name. The value is greyed out. 14 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left. enter formulas: ■ Under Other.2 * Sash Width). select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. Height . The glass dimensions are now dependent on the visibility settings for the window sashes.

under Specify a new Work Plane. and click OK. 4 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.Creating Elevation Lines The best method to create the elevation lines for the sashes is to create them in the exterior elevation view. 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 10 Create single symbolic lines as shown. click (Plane). Creating Elevation Lines | 573 . 8 In the Type Selector. select Elevation Swing [projection]. double-click Exterior. under Elevations. They should be placed on a selected subcategory. 9 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. 3 Click OK. under Category. clear Chain. and lock all alignment constraints. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. for Name. click Symbolic Lines. note the Elevation Swing subcategory. expand Windows. select Reference Plane : Insertion Edge. 5 On the Tools toolbar.

Assigning Default Materials You can assign a default material for each subcategory. and click OK three times. you create material parameters for the frame. If the subcategory already exists in the project. and click OK. Next. associate the symbolic lines on the right side with the Sash Left family parameter. under Detail Levels. under Graphics. and select Whites. and on the Options Bar. 18 Save the file. When the family is added to a project and the subcategory does not exist in the project. 12 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. and click the button on the right side of the column. clear Coarse. click Visibility. 4 In the New Material dialog. for Visible. 16 Click OK twice. Creating Material Parameters Material parameters for selected solid geometry make the family more flexible in terms of materials assignments for different window types. click in the Material column. select Sash Right. check whether the solid geometry has the correct subcategory assigned. 6 In the Material Library dialog. 574 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select the 2 symbolic lines on the left side. and glass. expand accurender ➤ Solid Colors. and click . and click Duplicate. 3 In the Materials dialog. for Name. and click OK. select Default. under AccuRender. Assign a default material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.Matte. When you assign default materials in a family. select the rectangular button on the right side. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. enter Window Frame. sash. Material parameters override the material assignment of the subcategories in the Object Styles dialog. 15 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 17 Using the same method.11 In the drawing area. this subcategory is added to the project and has the material assignment from the family. 7 Select Cool. for Name. the object styles settings of the project define the default material. for Windows ➤ Frame/Mullion. under Category. select all symbolic lines. 13 While pressing CTRL. unless the default value is < By Category >. 5 In the Materials dialog. The default material is assigned to the Frame/Mullion category. while pressing CTRL. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click .

click (3D). for Materials and Finishes ➤ Material. Concrete sill family 1 Close all open projects or families. enter Frame. and a fixed dimension for the sill overhang. a Depth instance parameter. 2 Select the solid geometry of the window frame. 6 Click OK three times. Note the new Material parameters under Material and Finishes. 10 Save the file. you can switch between imported families of the same category. parameters of nested families can be associated with parameters of the main family. you learn how to import window sill families into the window family and associate parameters of the nested families to the main family. If this parameter is defined as shared. 4 In the Project Browser. Level. The default value is By Category. The concrete sill family consists of a solid extrusion. a Width type parameter. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Concrete Sill. Creating Nested Families Families can be imported into families. For Group parameter under. Creating Sill Families There are 2 window sill families available in the training folders. Creating Nested Families | 575 . click the rectangular button on the right side. The Back and Center (Left/Right) reference planes define the origin of the family. Open the families and explore the design of them. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 7 Using the same method.1 On the Views toolbar. create 2 material parameters named Sash and Glass. and associate the sash and glass solid geometry with the respective parameter. under Floor Plans. 9 Click OK. Using family type parameters in the main family. 4 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. which nests them. click Family Types. and click Open. In this lesson. . You can override it on a type level. select Materials and Finishes. You can then model parts of the family separately from the main family model. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. When the family is loaded into a project. click Training Files. and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. the solid geometry has the material that is assigned to its subcategory in the Object Styles dialog. double-click Ref. click Add parameter.rfa.

and click Open. The Bottom reference plane defines the origin of the family. 8 Click OK. 10 Click File menu ➤ Open. 12 Select the solid geometry. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Metal Sill.5 In the Project Browser. The elevation view shows reference planes with fixed dimensions. click Training Files. has a fixed material Window Sill Concrete assigned. double-click View 1. and is visible only in detail level Fine. The sketch lines of the extrusion are locked to all exterior reference planes. 7 Select the solid geometry. 6 In the Project Browser. 11 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Left. and click . under 3D views. and click . 576 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill.rfa. Metal sill family 9 Close all open projects or families. under Elevations.

Parameters.rfa. Reference Planes. navigate to Casement Window. and click Open. 3 Using the same method. select Casement Window. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. click Load into Projects.rfa -3D View: View1. 2 In the Open dialog.rfa. 4 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. open m_Concrete Sill. 10 Click OK. 8 On the Design Bar.The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill. The metal sill family is now loaded into the Window family. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family Families opened in the family editor can be loaded directly into other families. Load the concrete sill 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. The concrete sill family is now loaded into the Window family. You open the main family first. has a fixed material Window Sill Metal assigned. Load the metal sill 7 Click Window menu ➤ Metal Sill.rfa.rfa. and verify that m_Metal Sill. and then load families into the casement window family you have created.rfa is cleared. 13 Click OK. 6 Click OK. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family | 577 . 9 In the Load into Projects dialog. select Casement Window. and is visible only in detail level Fine. and verify thatm_Concrete Sill.rfa is cleared. and Origins are as in the concrete sill family. click Load into Projects. Both sill families were created with the Generic Model family template and changed to a window family. The category of a family can be changed under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.

enter Sill Length. in the Formula column. select Construction. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. under Parameters.rfa. For Type of Parameter. click Add. double-click Concrete Sill.rfa. under Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. Click OK. click Family Types. As both sill families have been defined as Window families.2* Wall Offset. for Construction ➤ Sill Length. 578 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Width .rfa and m_Concrete Sill. select Length. 5 Click OK. Creating a Length Parameter The sill length needs to be equivalent to the exterior width of the window family. 2 In the Family Types dialog. Create the parameter 1 On the Design Bar.12 Close and save m_Metal Sill. For Group parameter under. you create a parameter that determines the true sill length in the window family. they appear in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Windows. Associate the parameter to nested families 6 In the Project Browser. 13 Maximize Casement Window.

Place the family 1 In the Project Browser. click the rectangular button on the right side. 11 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane of the window family. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Align the sill 10 On the Tools toolbar. select Insertion Depth. you place the concrete sill in the project. 10 Using the same method. Placing the Sill Family In this exercise. 2 On the View Control Bar. The sill family needs to be positioned and aligned in plan and elevation views. Associate an instance parameter 6 Select the solid geometry of the concrete sill. click the rectangular button on the right side. Level. aligning it to reference planes in both plan and elevation views. 4 Drag Concrete Sill into the drawing area. 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and lock the alignment. and click . and click to place it. 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 9 Click OK twice. Placing the Sill Family | 579 . click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 5 Click Modify. for Dimensions ➤ Length. select Sill Length. under Floor Plans. double-click Ref. expand Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. 3 In the Project Browser. The Length type parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the calculated value of the Sill Length parameter of the window family. The Width instance parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the Insertion Depth parameter of the window family. associate the Length parameter of the Metal Sill family.7 In the Type Properties dialog. select the hidden Center (Left/Right) reference plan of the Sill family. 9 Click OK twice. for Dimensions ➤ Width. click (Align).

TIP If the sill does not display. and lock the alignment. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 13 In the Project Browser. 16 Select the Sill reference plane of the window family. click (Align). 15 On the Tools toolbar. align the bottom edge of the sill family. 580 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 18 On the View Control Bar. click and spin the wall. 17 In the Project Browser. The sill is placed in the desired position. align the lower horizontal edge of the sill to the Insertion Edge reference plane of the Window family. under Elevations. double-click View 1. double-click Left. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and lock the alignment. under 3D Views. 14 On the View Control Bar.12 Using the same method. you add a Sill Type parameter. Creating a Shared Parameter In order to switch the sill from concrete to metal on an instance level.

10 Click OK 3 times. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type (default). Add the parameter to a family 11 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. 9 In the Select Category dialog. and select Instance. Create the shared parameter 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 16 Click OK twice. for Label. 3 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. click Create. If the family is then loaded into a project. 13 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click New. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. enter Training Shared Parameter. 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. Associate the parameter to geometry 17 In the drawing area. Note that the last created Shared Parameter file has been automatically opened. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. The metal sill replaces the concrete sill. 18 On the Options Bar. and click Save. and click Select. the parameter appears on the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog in the available fields list. under Parameters. 12 In the Family Types dialog. select Windows. select <Family Type>. Testing Nested Families You can test the correct behavior of the nested families directly in the window family. select Constraints. enter Windows. navigate to Training. Under Type of Parameter. 7 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. for Name. select Sill Type. click New. 4 Under File name.To display the custom parameter in a schedule. click Shared parameter. enter Sill Type. 3 Click Apply. select Metal Sill. under Parameter Type. 2 In the Family Types dialog. you must define the parameter as a shared parameter. Testing Nested Families | 581 . select the Concrete Sill family. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Name. click Add. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click OK. under Parameters. under Groups. for Group parameter under. 14 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Family Types.

click the Window tool. 2 Click Window menu ➤ Casement Window. check all views at all levels of detail. 7 Using the same method.rfa -3D View: View 1. and create a horizontal wall. This creates a new project with the default template. 9 In the View Control Bar. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 5 On the Design Bar. 582 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 8 On the Views toolbar. select Casement Window : 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200 and place the window in the wall. click and spin the wall. click Load into Projects. click (3D).4 Click OK. click the Wall tool. Testing the Family in a Project Environment Finally. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . 3 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Type Selector. TIP If the sill does not display. use best practice to test the window in multiple wall thicknesses in the project environment. insert a Casement Window : 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 in the wall. Test windows and sills 1 On the Standard toolbar.

Create a window schedule 12 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.10 Select the smaller window. Sill Type is now displayed in the schedule table. add the fields Mark. Width. and click OK. and click . and Sill Type to the Scheduled fields list. Note that the window sill has changed. select Windows. Height. 13 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. and click OK. select Metal Sill. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type. You begin by creating the desktop. Creating a Furniture Family | 583 . enter Window Schedule with Sills. rolltop. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. Under Name. drawer base. Click OK. and drawers as extrusions. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog.

Floor Plan: Ref. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. and specify values for the furniture length and depth. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. they represent the furniture centerline axes. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Ref Plane. click New ➤ Family.Finally. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. 2 On the File menu.rft. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. 5 On the View menu. 584 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 4 Maximize the view. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. their exact location is not critical. click Training Files. Level. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Furniture. Draw additional horizontal and vertical reference planes 6 On the Design Bar.

one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. click Dimension. as shown. and ending at the right reference plane. 10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 585 . proceeding to the centerline reference plane.8 Draw two vertical reference planes. Dimension the reference planes 9 On the Design Bar. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane.

It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm.Click the EQ symbol to make the segments equal. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the left reference plane. 586 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Modify. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added.

and ending at the lower reference plane. click Dimension. as shown. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. as shown.15 On the Design Bar. 17 To the right of the dimension you just created. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 587 . add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. 16 On the right side of the drawing area.

20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. Afterwards. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. 588 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown.18 On the Design Bar. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. TIP To do this. 19 Select the upper. click Modify. click Modify. horizontal reference plane. 21 On the Design Bar.

26 Select the 1000 mm dimension... specify the following: ■ Under Parameter type. select Family parameter. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog.> for Label. Click OK. 27 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. enter Length for Name.. Under Parameter Data.Add length and depth family parameters 23 Select the 2000 mm dimension.> for Label. Select Type. select <Add parameter.. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Dimensions. For Group parameter under. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 589 . select Family parameter. select <Add parameter.

These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. select Dimensions. 31 In the Family Types dialog. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. Click Apply. Click OK. it will also adapt to the same changes. For Group parameter under.■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. so when you open the Family Types dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. 590 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. you can still see the model. enter 3000 mm for Length. Select Type. enter Depth for Name. Therefore. click Family Types. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters.

Click Apply. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Your lines may have a lighter weight. 7 On the Design Bar. click . NOTE In the image below. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option.32 In the Family Types dialog. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. click Symbolic Lines. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. Click OK. click Lines. under Specify a new Work Plane. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 591 . 4 On the Design Bar. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. click Set Work Plane. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. Level for Name. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and enter 100 mm for Depth. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. “Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 591. select Level: Ref. 5 On the Design Bar. enter 2000 mm for Length. click . and click OK. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. and click to select all four symbolic lines. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. 2 On the Options Bar.

click Dimension. and select the bottom edge. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop. 592 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. Move the desktop up 12 On the Design Bar. double-click Front. The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. click Modify. and select the top edge. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. click Finish Sketch. under Elevations.10 On the Design Bar. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. 11 In the Project Browser.

27 On the Design Bar.. Click OK. Select Type. select Dimensions. Click OK. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog.18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop. For Group parameter under. For Group parameter under. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 593 . Select Type. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. select Family parameter.> for Label. enter Thickness for Name... 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.> for Label. Under Parameter Data. select <Add parameter. Under Parameter Data. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. as shown. select <Add parameter. select Dimensions. click Modify. click Modify. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. select Family parameter.. enter Height for Name. 25 On the Options Bar.

594 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and enter 100 mm for Offset. and click Apply. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. and click Apply. click Family Types. so when you open the Family Types dialog. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. Enter 1200 mm for Height. double-click Ref. and click Apply. 3 On the Options Bar. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you can still see the model. 30 In the Family Types dialog. click Ref Plane. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. click . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 594. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. 2 On the Design Bar. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise.Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. 31 In the Family Types dialog. Level. Enter 750 mm for Height. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 29 On the Design Bar. enter 2000 mm for Length. under Floor Plans. enter 4000 mm for Length. Click OK.

and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. Click the lock icon as shown. Lock the dimension as shown. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 595 . 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. click Dimension. 8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. 6 On the Design Bar.5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane.

under Specify a new Work Plane. click Lines. 596 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. click . select Level: Ref. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. as shown. 11 In the Work Plane dialog. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. Level for Name. 13 On the Options Bar. After you complete the rectangle.Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. and click OK. two lock icons display.

. You can also highlight the entire line chain. Mirror the left rectangle to create the right drawer base 18 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 20 On the Tools toolbar. click Modify. click the Mirror tool. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 597 . 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base.16 On the Design Bar. using the TAB key. 19 Select the four sketched lines. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension.

select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. 24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. click . 598 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . as shown below at the cursor. 22 On the Tools toolbar. 23 For the align-to reference.A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base.

■ Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 599 . click Dimension.A lock icon displays. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 26 On the Design Bar. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base.

enter Drawer Base Width for Name. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion.. select Dimensions. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. Under Parameter Data.28 Add two final dimensions. Select Type.> for Label. Click OK. For Group parameter under. 30 On the Options Bar. select <Add parameter. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Family parameter. as shown.. 600 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 601 . select Drawer Base Width for Label. click . 37 On the Tools toolbar. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. 33 On the Options Bar. double-click Front. under Elevations. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. click Modify. click Finish Sketch.32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. 35 On the Design Bar. 34 On the Design Bar.

notice that annotations display in this view.39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. 42 On the View menu. After the alignment. Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. a lock icon displays. 602 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 45 On the View Control Bar. 40 On the Design Bar. The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. However. you can still see the model. click Modify. click it to lock the alignment. click the Scale control and select 1:20. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. click . and click OK. 41 On the View toolbar.

47 On the Design Bar. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. Click OK. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. Enter 750 mm for Height. “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 603. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 603 . you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. 48 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. and click Apply. enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1200 mm for Height. enter 4000 mm for Length. and click Apply. under Elevations. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. and click Apply. double-click Right. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. click Family Types. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 49 In the Family Types dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.

9 Select the desk top. and click OK. then the lower horizontal sketch line. under Specify a new Work Plane. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. and click to specify the upper left corner. click Lines. as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. click . 604 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . 8 On the Tools toolbar.2 On the Design Bar. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. 3 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane.

Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 605 . and lock the alignment. and lock it.10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. then select the right parallel sketch line. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. click Dimension. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. and lock it.

16 On the Design Bar. . Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. the upper sketch line. 14 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 606 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. click Lines. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. click the Fillet arc tool.13 On the Design Bar.

19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. under Elevations.The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. select the left edge of the rolltop. 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. 18 On the Tools toolbar. Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. click . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 607 . and click the lock icon. select the right edge of the rolltop. and click the lock icon. double-click Front.

You can also use dimension constraints. If not. and click Apply. 23 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth.21 On the View toolbar. and click Apply. click . The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. enter 4000 mm for Length. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 24 In the Family Types dialog. The desk should adapt to all the changes. click Family Types. and click Apply. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. 608 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you can still see the model. Enter 1500 mm for Height.

26 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. click Set Work Plane. Create the desk drawer extrusions 1 On the Design Bar. and click OK. you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 609 . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry In this exercise. enter 2000 mm for Length. Click Apply. under Specify a new Work Plane. select Pick a Plane. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base.25 In the Family Types dialog. 2 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Click OK. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. “Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 609.

If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions. 11 On the Tools toolbar. click Lines. 7 On the Options Bar. double-click Front. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width. zoom the view until you do. select Multiple Alignment. these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. under Elevations. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. click drawer set on the left. and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. 6 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. After selecting the line of an upper drawer. NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. Lock each dimension as you add it. 12 On the Options Bar. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers.5 In the Project Browser. . and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the 610 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension. 8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below. click . 14 On the Tools toolbar. select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first. click . There should be four dimensions as shown.

click Extrusion Properties. Polished. click . under AccuRender. and click OK. and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers. 20 On the View toolbar. 16 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. Cherry. 31 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. under Materials and Finishes. click OK. Dark. 17 On the Design Bar. 25 In the New Material dialog. 22 On the Options Bar. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained. click the Model Graphics Style control. and select Shading with Edges. click OK. enter 20mm for Extrusion End. click for Texture. 26 In the Materials dialog. for Material. These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. under Constraints. 19 On the Design Bar. 28 Click OK.15 On the Tools toolbar.Wood. enter Desk . click 24 In the Materials dialog. 29 In the Materials dialog. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 611 . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 In the Material Library dialog. click . Apply material to the desk 21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. click Duplicate. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click . click Finish Sketch. and click OK.

Enter 1000 mm for Depth. and click Apply. Click Apply. You can also use dimension constraints.Flex the design 32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. 36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson. 35 In the Family Types dialog. and click Apply. 612 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 612. you can still see the model. The desk should adapt to all the changes. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Enter 750 mm for Height. If not. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. enter 4000 mm for Length. Click OK. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. 33 On the Design Bar. enter 2000 mm for Length. and click Apply. Defining New Furniture Types In this exercise. 34 In the Family Types dialog. you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created.

click Save. click Apply. Training Furniture. click New. click Component. verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm. 15 On the View Control Bar. Define new furniture types with various widths and depths 1 On the Design Bar. 8 Under Family Types. select Rolltop Desk 200 x 1000mm. enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth. click Load. 18 In the Open dialog. 3 In the Name dialog. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Family Types dialog. 6 In the Name dialog.rfa file. 11 On the File menu. enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name. click 14 On the View toolbar. enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name. click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 9 In the Name dialog. Load the new furniture family into a new project 13 On the Standard toolbar. enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name. and click OK.rfa. click New. 5 Under Family Types. click Family Types. 19 In the Type Selector. under Family Types. 17 On the Options Bar. click New. click . 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name. and click Apply. to start a new project based on your default template. 2 In the Family Types dialog. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. and click OK. and click Apply. and click Open. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk. enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth. select it. navigate to the location of your Training Furniture. and click OK. 10 In the Family Types dialog. Defining New Furniture Types | 613 . and click OK.

614 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click to add the third desk. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson. you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings.21 In the Type Selector. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter. select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. 23 In the Type Selector. You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk. Drawing a Baluster In this exercise. you draw a baluster with an extrusion. and add the second desk. Creating a Baluster Family In this lesson.

Level. click Training Files. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. In the left pane of the New dialog. Drawing a Baluster | 615 . select Ref. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. 7 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. Level for Name. However. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Finish Sketch. their exact location is not critical. 9 On the Design Bar. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 Expand the left elevation view. click Set Work Plane.rft. expand Views (all).Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Baluster. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown. Draw the baluster plan profile 3 In the Project Browser. and double-click Ref. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Lines. expand Floor Plans. click New ➤ Family. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. 2 On the View menu.

5 Draw a straight stair run as shown. 4 On the Design Bar. click the Modelling tab. Draw a straight stair run 3 On the Design Bar. double-click Front. 14 Click the lock icon. click New ➤ Project. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.Extend the baluster extrusion to the top reference plane 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations. click Training Files. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run In this exercise. 13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. 2 In the left pane of the New Project dialog. Load the new baluster family into a new project 1 On the File menu. you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run. 15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster.rte. 12 On the Options Bar.rfa. click Modify and select the extrusion. 11 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 616 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 7 On the File menu. click Finish Sketch. 6 On the Design Bar. click . By default. click Stairs. the extrusion has a height of 250mm. The new custom baluster is now complete.

8 In the Open dialog. select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster. click Shading with Edges. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run | 617 . 17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. click Edit for Baluster Placement. click OK. click . Apply the custom baluster to the stair run 12 On the Design Bar. under Baluster Family. click Orient ➤ Southwest. 20 In the Type Properties dialog. navigate to the location of your Training Baluster. 9 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. 19 Click OK. and click Open. 11 On the View menu. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 On the View menu. click . 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog. click OK. click Modify and select the existing railing. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters. select it. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.rfa file.

rfa. 618 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 On the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson. However. and other sweep-defined objects. Create a new family based on the default rail profile template 1 In the Project Browser. you draw a sweep profile. Drawing a Sweep Profile In this exercise. click New ➤ Family. soffits.Sweep. a reveal. click Training Files. In this lesson. under Floor Plans. verify that Ref. click Lines. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings. draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown. the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. click New ➤ Family. and a host sweep. In the left pane of the New dialog. click Training Files. Creating Profile Families A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. a stair nosing. In the left pane of the New dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Rail. Drawing a Rail Profile In this exercise. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection. a railing. their exact location is not critical.rft. cornices. balusters. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. you create a rail profile.The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall. The new sweep profile is now complete. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Level is open. you create five different profiles: a sweep. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. 3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile .rft.

Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile | 619 . Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.rft. draw the rail profile with line segments as shown. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. However. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile In this exercise. you create a stair nosing profile.The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template. Draw the rail profile 2 On the Design Bar. the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. In the left pane of the New dialog. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top. click Lines. their exact location is not critical.rfa.Rail. click New ➤ Family. Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template 1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing. The new rail profile is now complete. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Stair Nosing. click Training Files. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile .

their exact location is not critical. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face. In addition.rfa. you create a reveal profile. you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout. 620 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal. Level is open. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. under Floor Plans. and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. In the left pane of the New dialog. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Reveal. click Training Files.Stair Nosing. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs.Draw the stair nosing profile 2 On the Design Bar. click Lines.rft. the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. click New ➤ Family. draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown. verify that Ref. The new stair nosing profile is now complete. Drawing a Reveal Profile In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . However. Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template 1 In the Project Browser.

rfa. verify that Ref. under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the New dialog.Draw the reveal profile 2 On the Design Bar.rft.Reveal. Level is open. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. which may be any vertical surface. their exact location is not critical. draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown. the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Hosted. click Training Files. The new reveal profile is now complete. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. click Lines. Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template 1 In the Project Browser. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile In this exercise. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . However. you create a host sweep profile. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile | 621 . click New ➤ Family.

Host Sweep. Specify the family category 5 On the Modelling menu. draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. click Browse. their exact location is not critical. 2 In the New Project dialog. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. However. Draw the host sweep profile 2 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 622 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 4 In the New Project dialog.rfa. and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). click Create. click Training Files. click Lines. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path.The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane.rte. The new host sweep profile is now complete. click New ➤ Project. click OK. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile .

the exact location of the path is not critical.Sweep. 7 In the Name dialog. click Finish Family. 10 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. navigate to the location of Profile . click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown. 14 In the Type Selector. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path. select Profile . select Generic Models for Family Category. click Finish Sweep. click Finish Path. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Open. 13 In the Open dialog. 9 On the Design Bar. expand Elevations. and double-click South. expand Views (all). enter Sweep for Name. click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path | 623 . click Load Profiles. Modify the sweep profile configuration 18 In the Project Browser.Sweep.6 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Sketch the 2D sweep path 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. beside Load Profiles. and click OK. and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar. click Sketch 2D Path. select it. 17 On the View toolbar. 16 On the Design Bar. 19 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep. Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path 12 On the Options Bar.rfa.

click Edit. select Profile Is Flipped. enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. on the Options Bar. Under Other. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls In this exercise. 26 On the Design Bar. Under Constraints. 25 Click OK. Enter 25 degrees for Angle.21 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown. do the following: ■ ■ ■ . click New ➤ Project. click . click Training Files. click 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 624 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The sweep profile application is now complete. 2 In the New Project dialog. and open Metric Templates\DefaultMetric.rte. 27 On the View toolbar. 23 Select the sweep profile again and. click Finish Family. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. click OK. click Browse. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls. Draw a wall group 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. click Wall. 22 Select the sweep profile and. 4 In the New Project dialog.

Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls | 625 . 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the View toolbar.NOTE When you draw the walls. 10 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep. 11 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep. their exact location is not critical. 6 Draw four walls as shown. 9 On the Options Bar. click . verify that Horizontal is selected. click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep.

and click Open.Host Sweep. click Modify.12 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Dynamic View dialog. Create a new tag based on the default room tag template 1 On the View menu. click 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. 19 On the View toolbar. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. click Spin [Shift]. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. select it.Host Sweep for Profile. Creating a Room Tag In this lesson. . click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. In the left pane of the New dialog. Specifying Room Tag Parameters In this exercise.rft. click Edit/New. 626 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson. click . 15 Select the wall sweep and. The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. click OK. 21 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath. on the Options Bar. select Profile . 17 In the Type Properties dialog. floor and ceiling finish. and area with labels added to extract project data. 14 In the Open dialog. you create a room tag which displays room name. and open Metric\Templates\M_Room Tag.rfa. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep 13 On the File menu.Host Sweep : Profile . The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. you specify the room tag parameters. navigate to the location of Profile . and click OK. under Construction.

enter 2mm for Name. select Underline. and click OK. Combine labels into a room tag 11 On the Design Bar. 20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. 13 On the Options Bar. verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. Add a 2mm label 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 In the Select Parameter dialog. 7 In the Type properties dialog. click Edit/New. The name label is displayed with the text underlined. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. select Floor Finish. click Duplicate. and click OK. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. click . verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. select Ceiling Finish. 8 In the Name dialog. select Name. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 In the Type Selector. select Area.Edit the 3mm label 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select Label : 2mm. 12 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. enter 2 for the Text Size parameter. click OK. Specifying Room Tag Parameters | 627 . and click OK. click Label. 16 Zoom in on the label. and click OK. and click OK. clear Underline. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog. click Label. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown.

Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. click . Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters.rfa. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. 628 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and open Metric\Templates\Generic Annotation. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser.rft. The new room tag is now ready for use. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. click Lines. notice that there is only one view available. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. In the left pane of the New dialog. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. 3 On the Options Bar. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. click Training Files. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project.

7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. 9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. click .5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol | 629 . click Modify. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. 10 On the Design Bar.

Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. click Browse. click New ➤ Project. select 3 for Line Weight. Training North Arrow. enter North Line for Name. 18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. and select the upper vertical line. click Object Styles. 2 In the New Project dialog. 9 On the File menu. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. and click OK. 17 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. click New. click OK. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. 8 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 4 In the New Project dialog. 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog. in the North Line row. 7 Click OK. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project.The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. 630 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Modify.rfa. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. 12 In the Object Styles dialog. 16 In the Type Selector. click Modify. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar.rte. click Sheet. under Modify Subcategories. select A1 metric. select North Line. and click OK. click Training Files.

In the left pane of the New dialog. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. click New ➤ Titleblock. select Training North Arrow. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template.10 In the Open dialog. 12 In the Type Selector. 14 On the Design Bar. and your project data. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. click Symbol. select it. text. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. The titleblock has linework. and open Metric\Templates\A0 Metric. click Modify.rft. and click Open. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines.rfa. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. and labels. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. 13 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. Creating a Titleblock Family | 631 . graphics. click Training Files.

Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. and enter -25 for Offset. click . 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. and click to draw a new vertical line. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. 3 On the Options Bar. 632 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. 11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. . 7 On the Options Bar. and click .Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. and enter 140 for Offset. click . click Lines.

and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 25 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 633 .12 On the Design Bar. enter 30 for Offset. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. click Lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. press CTRL. click . 16 In the Type Selector. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. 13 In the Type Selector. select Title Blocks. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. and enter 20 for Offset. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. click Modify. and select the second and third horizontal lines. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 17 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. select Wide Lines. click Modify. 21 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line.

Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar.The titleblock linework is now complete. click . 4 Zoom in on the logo. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. click Text. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 634 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .jpg. click Duplicate. 6 On the Options Bar. you add a company logo. click Import/Link ➤ Image. and open Common\Company Logo. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. and labels to your titleblock. text notes.

9 In the Name dialog. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. 18 Select the drag handle. and select the last text note. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. and click OK. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. 11 Click OK twice. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. and drag the text note down as shown. enter 10 for Text Size. click Modify. under Text. in the text box. and select Bold. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 635 . select Text : 8mm. 17 On the Design Bar. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. enter 10mm Bold for Name. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. and add an address and phone number as shown.

address. select Constrain and Multiple. click Text. 23 On the Edit toolbar. 24 On the Options Bar. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. click Modify. click . 636 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. Add consultant name. and select the consultant text note. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar.

26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 637 . 27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.

30 In the Element Properties dialog. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. select Text : 5mm. and enter Sheet Number:. 29 On the Options Bar. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. and enter Checked By:. and enter Drawn By:. click Text. click . 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. click Duplicate. enter 5 for Text Size. and click OK. and enter Date:. 32 In the Name dialog. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. 638 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 31 In the Type Properties dialog. under Text. 34 Click OK twice. enter 5mm for Name. click Edit/New.

Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 639 . 41 On the Options Bar. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. click Label. and click OK. select Project Issue Date. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label.Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field.

45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. and click OK. click Edit/New. click Center and Middle. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. and click to specify the label location. and click to specify the label location. click Duplicate. enter 15mm Label for Name. select Project Number. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and click OK. 640 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 61 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. select Sheet Number. under Text. 53 In the Name dialog. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. and click to specify the label location. click . NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 50 On the Options Bar. 59 On the Options Bar. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. click Label. select Drawn By. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. enter 15 for Text Size. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. select Label : 15mm Label. 55 Click OK twice. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. select Checked By and click OK. and click to specify the label location.

and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. click Label. select Project Name. 63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the label location. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 641 . and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click OK.62 Select the left drag handle on the label. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog. select Client Name. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.

under Text. 72 In the Type Properties dialog. click Sheet. click Load. and click OK. 9 Click OK. and click Open.rfa file. and click to specify the label location. click . click Duplicate. select 4mm Label.rte. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise.rfa. text. 74 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. click OK. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. click New ➤ Project. The titleblock graphics. enter 4 for Text Size. 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. 4 In the New Project dialog. 8 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.70 On the Options Bar. click Browse. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. and labels are now complete. 7 In the Open dialog. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 77 On the Options Bar. 75 Click OK twice. click Left and Middle. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 80 On the Design Bar. enter 4mm Label. and click OK. 71 In the Element Properties dialog. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 73 In the Name dialog. 642 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Training Files. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. select it. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. 2 In the New Project dialog. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. select File Path.

enter Name for Drawn By. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Click OK. click Project Information. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. under Other. 13 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. Enter Office Building for Project Name. and click OK. click . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 643 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. click Modify and select the titleblock. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. Enter In Progress for Project Status. 14 On the Settings menu. 2005 for Project Issue Date. 11 On the Options Bar.Modify titleblock properties 10 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Project Units. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. click Orient ➤ Southeast. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. on the Settings menu. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. Set the Length units to millimeters. format the Area to use 2 decimal places.rvt. and open Common\c_Pantheon. click Training Files. 644 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . set the Area to Square meters. and set the suffix to None. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. To change the units of measurement to meters.

Next. select Pick a Plane. select Roofs for Family Category. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. and click Open View. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. and click OK. 8 In the Work Plane dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. click Create. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Go To View dialog. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. enter Dome for Name.Center. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 645 . 5 In the Name dialog. expand Views (all). expand Elevations. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. and double-click South. select Section: Wall Section . 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK.

click Lines. 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. click Axis. 15 On the Options Bar. click . 646 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. click . 12 On the Options Bar. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar.The center wall section view is displayed.

click . The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. 19 On the Options Bar.17 Move the cursor out. and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. and select Chain. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 647 . until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane. The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line.

27 On the Options Bar.Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. 23 On the Options Bar. 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. click Lines. 648 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Delete Inner Segment. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. click . click .

click Lines. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. 32 On the Options Bar. click . Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. click and select Chain. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 649 . Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. 35 Select the interior face of the wall. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep.

42 On the View toolbar. 38 In the Materials dialog. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. 650 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 37 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. select Floors for Family Category. select Concrete . click OK. click Revolution Properties. under Materials and Finishes.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. click Finish Sketch. click Create. 40 On the Design Bar. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise.The dome roof closed profile is now complete. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. click . click Finish Family. and click OK. 2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. click for Material. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. 41 On the Design Bar. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar.

Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 651 . enter Concave Floor for Name. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Go To View dialog. double-click South.Center. 7 In the Work Plane dialog. and click Open View. 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. click . and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. click Set Work Plane. select Pick a Plane. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. and click OK. 11 On the Options Bar.3 In the Name dialog. 12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. click Axis. 6 On the Design Bar. select Section: Wall Section .

click Lines. click . and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown.Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. for the start point of the floor profile as shown. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown. Footing level line and the axis. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point. 652 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select Chain. 15 Specify the intersection of the T.O.

18 Specify the intersection of the T. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar.Exploring Family Templates Revit Architecture ships with a large number of family templates. Revit Architecture differs between templates for model families.Exploring Family Templates | 653 .O. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. you start with the selection of a family template. click Revolution Properties. When you create a new family. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. click for Material. double-click 3D Section View. and title blocks. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. 25 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Materials dialog. Appendix A . 24 On the Design Bar. select Cobblestone for Name. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. such as reference planes and sub-categories. The concave floor closed profile is now complete.O. click Finish Family. annotation families. the new family has specific default contents. Appendix A . Based on the template you select.

Category: None Casework wall based Family template for casework.Post Family template for posts of balusters.Model Family Templates The templates for model families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates. Category: None Baluster . 654 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views.rft Baluster Description Family template for baluster families. Contains sample wall geometry. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. The following table gives an overview of the templates for model families: Template Name *. Category: Casework Casework Family template for casework.

is used to create 2D detail components. Category: Curtain Panels Detail Component line based 2D family. Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value. Includes the filled region tool. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. Category: Columns Curtain Wall Panel Family template for filling elements of curtain walls. contains a reference line and left and right reference planes. the column inherits the material of the wall.Template Name *. Category: Detail Items Detail Component 2D family. If a column intersects a wall.rft Description Column Family template to create columns. Category: Detail Items Model Family Templates | 655 . includes the filled region tool.

Curtain Wall Description Family template for door elements of curtain walls.Template Name *. Category: Curtain Panels Door Family template for doors.rft Door . Category: Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixture ceiling based Family template to create electrical equipment families. 656 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Contains a sample ceiling geometry. Ceiling based families can only be placed on any ceiling in a project. Category: Doors Electrical Equipment Family template to create electrical equipment families.

Category: Furniture Model Family Templates | 657 .rft Description Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture wall based Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Furniture Systems Furniture Family template to create furniture families. Category: Electrical Fixtures Entourage Family template to create entourage families. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: Entourage Furniture System Family template to create furniture system families.Template Name *. Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture Family template to create electrical equipment families. Contains sample wall geometry.

Category: Generic Models 658 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Contains a sample ceiling geometry. Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling in a project. Face based families can only be placed on any face in a project. Category: Generic Models Generic Model floor based Family template to create any generic model geometry.rft Generic Model ceiling based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Category: Generic Models Generic Model face based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project.Template Name *. Contains sample floor geometry.

Category: Generic Models Generic Model wall based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Category: Generic Models Sample: Wall Opening with 2D graphics in plan view and a void extrusion. Includes the filled region tool. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project.Template Name *. Model Family Templates | 659 . Contains sample roof geometry. Contains a reference line and left and right reference planes. Roof based families can only be placed on any roof face in a project.rft Generic Model line based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Contains sample wall geometry. Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value. Category: Generic Models Generic Model roof based Family template to create any generic model geometry.

Category: Lighting Fixtures 660 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project. Category: Generic Model Lighting Fixture floor based Family template to create lighting fixtures.Template Name *. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Roof based families can only be placed on a roof face in a project.rft Generic Model Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Contains sample floor geometry. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture roof based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Contains sample roof geometry.

Category: Lighting Fixtures Model Family Templates | 661 . Contains sample ceiling geometry. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures. Linear Lighting Fixture roof based. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture wall based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Wall based families can only be placed on a wall face in a project. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture Family template to create lighting fixtures. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools.rft Lighting Fixture ceiling based Description Family template to create lighting fixtures. Linear Lighting Fixture wall based. Contains sample wall geometry. Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based. Ceiling based families can only be placed on a ceiling face in a project. Linear Lighting Fixture Family templates to create linear lighting fixtures. Category: Lighting Fixtures Linear Lighting Fixture floor based.Template Name *.

Mechanical Equipment ceiling based Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. slabs.rft Mass Description Family template to create massing families. Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling faces in a project. Faces of masses can be used to create other model elements like walls. gross surface area. Contains sample ceiling geometry. Category: Mechanical Equipment Mechanical Equipment wall based Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Contains sample wall geometry. and gross floor areas. Category: Mechanical Equipment 662 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Masses can report gross volume. Category: Mass Sample: Mass families from the content library. and roofs Massing families can also be generating floor area faces.Template Name *.

Category: Plumbing Fixtures Plumbing Fixture Family template to create plumbing fixture families. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Mechanical Equipment Parking Family template to create parking families. Category: Plumbing Fixtures Model Family Templates | 663 . Category: Planting Plumbing Fixture wall based Family template to create plumbing fixture families.rft Mechanical Equipment Description Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project.Template Name *. Category: Parking Planting Family template to create planting families.

slab edge. Category: Profiles. Profile-Rail Family template to create 2D profiles for rails. mullion. Profile-Reveal Family template to create 2D profiles for wall sweeps and wall reveals. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned. Category: Profiles. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned. wall sweep) can be explicitly assigned under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Contains default reference planes Rail Centerline and Rail Top. Category: Profiles. Families based on this template can be used in a project with the tools in the Modelling menu ➤ Host Sweeps. Profile usage (fascia. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Profile-Hosted Family template to create 2D profiles for hosts. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Category: Profiles. A profile is only used in combination with system families.Template Name *. A profile is only used in combination with system families. gutter.rft Profile Description Family template to create 2D profiles. 664 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Category: Entourage Site Family template to create Site families.rft Profile-Stair Nosing Description Family template to create 2D profiles for stair nosing. Category: Profiles. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. The family has an rpc file link included. RPC Family Family template for models using the Real People Collection product family. Category: Specialty Equipment Model Family Templates | 665 . Contains sample wall geometry. A profile is used only in combination with system families. Category: Site Speciality Equipment wall based Family template to create specialty equipment families. Category: Specialty Equipment Speciality Equipment Family template to create specialty equipment families.Template Name *.

rft Spot Lighting Fixture floor based. such as beams and braces. Beams can be placed on structural columns. Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. The family has illumination and spot properties for the rendering tools. The family templates contain specific reference planes for members and stick symbols. If a structural column intersects a wall. Category: Lighting Fixtures Family template to create structural columns. 666 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Beams and Braces Family template to create structural framing families. it moves its position if the base of the structural column is moved. Category: Structural Columns Structural Foundation Family templates to create structural foundation families. the column cuts out the wall. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. specific setting for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures. A structural column can be defined as a room-bounding element if the structural material type is set to concrete or precast concrete. specific settings for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined. Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Spot Lighting Fixture wall based. Category: Structural Foundations Structural Framing . Spot Lighting Fixture roof based. Spot Lighting Fixture ceiling based. If a structural foundation family is placed below a column.Template Name *. Spot Lighting Fixture Structural Column Description Family templates to create spot lighting fixtures.

Category: Curtain Panels Window with trim Family template for windows including trim on the exterior side.rft Description Category: Structural Framing Structural Framing . such as trusses.Template Name *. Category: Windows Model Family Templates | 667 . Category: Structural Framing Window .Curtain Wall Family template for window elements of curtain walls.Complex and Trusses Family template to create structural framing families.

and parameters. text.0mm on a plotted sheet. click Tag ➤ Multi-Category to add a tag. Category: Room Tags Family template for section heads.rft Callout Head Door Tag Generic Annotation Description Family template for the tag of a callout. Category: Windows Annotation Family Templates The templates for annotation families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Annotation. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Annotation families are scale-dependent. and parameter text size are always related to the current scale of the View Control Bar. Category: Level Heads Family template for Multi-Category tags. Category: Spot Elevation Symbols Generic Tag Grid Head Level Head Multi-Category Tag Room Tag Section Head Spot Elevation Symbol 668 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .0mm has a size of 2. Category: Generic Model Tags Family template for the grid heads. the same shared parameter is added to a project as a project parameter and can be used to filter selected elements to be tagged with the MultiCategory tag. Category: Grid Heads Family template for level heads. filled regions. A MultiCategory tag needs a shared parameter as filter parameter. Category: Door Tags Family template for generic annotations. parameter text created with a text height of 2. The intersection of 2 reference planes defines the insertion point of a tag. Category: Section Marks Family template to define the symbol for spot elevations. Category: Generic Annotation Family template for tags. In the family the intersection of the horizontal and right reference planes define connection location with the system section line. Symbol size. Category: Multi-Category Tags Family template for room tags. Category: Callouts Family template for door tags.Template Name *. On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Thus. The following table gives an overview of the templates for annotation families: Template Name *. text size. Annotation families consist mainly of lines. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.rft Window Description Family template for windows.

rft ■ D .rft ■ A3 metric.42 x 30. The following table gives an overview of the templates for title block families: Template Name Comments Family templates for title blocks using common standard sizes.rft ■ A2 metric.11 x 8.rft ■ E1 . Category: Window Tags Titleblock Family Templates The templates for titleblock families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Titleblocks. and parameters.5.17 x 11. In a project. filled regions.36 x 24. text. Title block families consist mainly of lines for the plan border. In the Select a Titleblock dialog.rft ■ A4 metric.rft ■ A1 metric. the title block can be assigned to a sheet using View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.rft ■ B . Imperial ■ A .Template Name *.24 x 18. You import images to your title block.rft View Title Window Tag Description Family template to define view title of a view in a sheet.rft ■ New Site Metric.rft ■ C .rft Metric ■ A0 metric. Category: View Titles Family template for window tags.rft Titleblock Family Templates | 669 . all loaded title block families are listed for selection.

670 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

not specifically how to make a floor truss. During this tutorial. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family.Parametric Component Design Techniques 17 In this tutorial. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Revit Architecture 2008. At the end of this tutorial. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood floor truss. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. methodology. The truss also has multiple types. In this case. and detail level controls. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. 671 . you will understand the process. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. assigned subcatecories. formula-based parameters. In exercises that become increasingly complex.

In the next exercise. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. it is not the best solution. you determine the requirements of the new component. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. Although this solution is possible. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. a generic floor-based component might work. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. and also works intuitively with them. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. the design specification requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. Take this into consideration during your design planning. For every complexity added to a family. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 672 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. Two types should be created. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. For training purposes. It should also be an available option within a beam system. In addition. In this case. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? Additional design requirements ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. this must be a structural beam component. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. you should avoid over-designing the component. and structural walls. beams. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. In this lesson.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. NOTE When creating a new family. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. In this case.

such as wood type. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. ■ How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. These materials can be applied using Object Styles. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. You have completed the planning stage for the new family. the planning stage and questions may differ. Depending on the family you are designing. In addition. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. 4 Continue with the next exercise.For instance: ■ What materials need the most control? These materials. In the previous exercise. ■ What types are most commonly used? In this training case. Selecting the Family Template | 673 . the means by which you gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. “Selecting the Family Template” on page 673. would require Instance or Type parameters. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. ■ What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood.

Select it so that the preview displays. 6 In the New dialog. Usually. this is where you access family templates. to ensure you are using the templates referenced in this tutorial. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. notice the preview. However. and open Metric\Templates. In addition. Like most generic family templates. ■ Metric Structural Framing . The New dialog opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog. 5 Select Metric Generic Model floor based. scroll to the structural framing templates.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. for example: wall based or floor based. you will access them from the Training Files folder. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. There are two structural framing templates provided. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. You should be in the Metric Templates folder. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it.rft.rft 674 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Training Files. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. 4 Scroll through the various template options. On the right side of the New dialog.Beams and Braces.

Level. Level Selecting the Family Template | 675 .This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion.rft. spacing. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components.Beams and Braces. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . Floor Plan: Ref.Beams and Braces. 10 Maximize the view. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane.Complex and Trusses.Complex and Trusses. ■ Metric Structural Framing . Floor Plan: Ref. Open the family template 9 Double-click Metric Structural Framing . This template is the best starting point for the new family. 8 Select Metric Structural Framing . Because of its simplicity. it is not the best starting point for the beam family.rft and notice the preview. and notice the preview. and display functions required by structural beams.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses.rft to open it.

Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson.In this view. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. Therefore. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. under Floor Plans. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. under 3D Views. you add the reference planes. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. lines. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. “Creating the Component Skeleton” on page 676. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. Reference Plane: Left. under Elevations. however. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. 12 In the Project Browser. Like many templates. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. 11 In the Project Browser. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. double-click Ref. double-click View 1. you add reference planes to the beam design. Level. double-click Front. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. 676 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser.

The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. ■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: Adding Reference Planes | 677 . notice the location of the beam extents. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. In the project plan view image below. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. In the image below. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to.3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project.

678 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques .These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. 8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. 5 On the Edit Toolbar. Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). In a later exercise. it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes. click . Before adding new reference planes. you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. click Ref Plane.

click to place it. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. under Elevations. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. click . Level as the mirror axis. These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. select the lower horizontal reference plane. Level. click Ref Plane. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick.Add ref. To do this. click on the Edit toolbar. 10 On the Design Bar. Adding Reference Planes | 679 . click Ref Plane. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. double-click Front. 13 On the Design Bar. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. and select the Level: Ref. Level. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton.

click to place it as shown. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. 680 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. click to place it as shown. 19 On the Options Bar.16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. Before you move on to the next exercise. click to place it as shown. specify an Offset of 200 mm. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left.

20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). under Floor Plans. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. Adding Reference Planes | 681 . 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). click to place it as shown. Level. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. specify an Offset of 238 mm. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. double-click Ref. 24 In the Project Browser. click to place it as shown. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. 22 On the Options Bar. which you do in the next exercise.

26 Starting with one of the reference planes you added to define the center chase. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. you add dimensions and constraints to the to the skeleton. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. select the reference plane and adjust the extents similar to the image below. and click Save. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. “Adding Dimensions and Constraints” on page 682.25 On the Design Bar. Make sure you remember where you saved it. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. Repeat this step for the remaining extents so that your plan view resembles the image below. In the following exercise. You have finished creating the initial skeleton of the open web wood floor truss. 682 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . navigate to the folder of your choice. 28 In the Save As dialog.

click Dimension.rfa. click Modify. and click the EQ symbol when it displays. 4 On the Design Bar. This tool is the aligned dimension tool. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 683 . 6 On the Design Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset. 2 On the Options Bar. After adding the dimension. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. Wood Floor Truss. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. click . 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step.

click Dimension. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. and the lower horizontal reference plane. Level. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. place the dimension to the left as shown. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. 684 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . the Center reference plane. under Elevations. Place the dimension as shown. double-click Front. 11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously.7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. 9 On the Design Bar. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref.

These dimensions refer to the chord thickness.Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. add two dimensions as shown. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 685 . 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. 15 Add four dimensions as shown. and place it below the dimension you added previously.

Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. Level. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. In this exercise. In addition. “Creating New Length Parameters” on page 686. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. When you design a new family. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. 686 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Throughout the tutorial. it becomes a parameter. and constraints as needed. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. under Floor Plans. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. you will add additional reference planes. consider making it an instance parameter. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. Wood Floor Truss. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. In the next exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.rfa. dimensions. If the component has material that varies per component. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them.You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. consider making it a type parameter. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. consider making it a type parameter. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. double-click Ref. 2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown.

Select Type. select Add parameter for Label. 7 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Creating New Length Parameters | 687 . select Add parameter for Label. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. enter Chord Width for Name. under Elevations. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. ■ Click OK.3 On the Options Bar. enter Depth for Name. Under Parameter Data. Click OK. Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Under Parameter Data. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Select Type. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. double-click Front. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. select Family parameter.

Create center chase width parameter
9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior.

10 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data, enter Center Chase Width for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

Create chord thickness parameter
12 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown.

13 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter.

688 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter Chord Thickness for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown.

Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions
15 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. 16 On the Options Bar, select Chord Thickness for Label.

17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown.

Creating New Length Parameters | 689

18 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. In the Family Types dialog, notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group, Dimensions. When you load this family into a project, these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog for the beam. 19 Click Cancel. 20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Flexing the Component Model” on page 690.

Flexing the Component Model
One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. Flexing the model means to change parameter values, thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. This is not limited to length parameters. If you add a new material parameter, you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. You should flex the model after any major change to the design.

You should flex a new family after:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Adding or modifying an element. Adding or modifying a parameter. Adding a new constraint. Nesting a component. Adding or modifying a parameter formula.

When you flex a family, you should always do it from the Family Types dialog, rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. When you change a parameter value and apply the change, this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project.

690 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this exercise, you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family, it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. After you verify this, you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Preparing the family for flexing
1 When flexing the model, you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog:

Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it to the opposing corner. or

Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it off the Revit window as shown.

Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog. 2 On the Design Bar, click Family Types, and drag the dialog so that you can view the model.

Flex the truss depth
3 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 600 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Level. In addition, notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing.

Flexing the Component Model | 691

4 Enter 450 mm for Depth, 80 mm for Chord Thickness, 800 mm for Center Chase Width, and click Apply. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes.

Reset parameters
5 In the Family Types dialog, reset the parameters back to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 300 mm for Depth. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply. Click OK.

When working within the Family Editor, you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. 6 On the File menu, click Save. 7 Proceed to the next lesson, “Adding Solid Geometry” on page 693.

692 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Adding Solid Geometry
In this lesson, you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. After creating the extrusions, you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. After flexing the design, you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed.

Creating Solid Extrusions
In this exercise, you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. After adding the chords, you align and lock their position. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add chord extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design.

3 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 In the Work Plane dialog, click Name, select Reference Plane: Member Left, and click OK. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and select Lock.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown.

Adding Solid Geometry | 693

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

When using the Trim tool, click the part of the line you want to keep. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown.

694 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry.

17 On the File menu, click Save. 18 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry” on page 695.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Constrain the extrusion ends
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Enter SD; this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. 3 Select the chord extrusions.

4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 695

5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Flex the design
6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog is open. On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

7 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes, not the member right or member left reference planes. Therefore, you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. 8 In the Family Types dialog, enter 3000 for Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Add a new dimension and constraint
9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

696 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

In this particular case, adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. Later in this lesson, you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment.

Flex the length
12 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 13 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working.

TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected, use the Align tool and add the constraint. Afterwards, flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. 14 Click OK.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 697

In a later exercise, you add the web members. Therefore, you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value.

Flex the chord width, depth, and thickness
15 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. 16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges.

17 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 18 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 600mm for Depth. Enter 200mm for Chord Width. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. TIP When flexing, it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. Therefore, try picking a method, such as doubling, that allows you to easily return to the original values.

Click Apply.

The chords should adjust to each of the new values. 19 Specify the beam values shown below:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 89mm for Chord Width. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply, and click OK.

20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Additional Solid Geometry” on page 698.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase.

Dataset

698 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add the center chase extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. 3 On the View Control Bar, click the Hide/Isolate control, and click Hide Element. This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. 4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the left, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left, vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the right, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 699

NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown.

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 17 Zoom in on the center chase.

Align and lock the new extrusions
18 On the Tools menu, click Align. This next process is very important. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion, it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. 19 For the align-to reference, select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options.

700 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions, and after the alignment, click the lock symbol to lock the alignment.

21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord, and lock the alignment as shown.

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the center chase
23 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 24 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, redo any problematic alignments and constraints. 25 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

Clean up the view
26 Zoom to Fit.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 701

27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. This will make subsequent work much easier.

Add the truss end extrusions
28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown.

29 On the Options Bar, select Add Parameter for Label. 30 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. 32 On the Options Bar, select Trimmable End Length for Label. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 34 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Sketch the right end extrusion
35 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Right. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. 37 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 38 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name, and click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 40 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

702 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

41 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch.

42 On the Options Bar, enter19mm for Offset. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

44 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 703

46 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 47 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. 48 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch the left end extrusion
49 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 50 Zoom around the truss elements. 51 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 52 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name, and click OK. 53 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 54 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

55 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. 56 On the Options Bar, enter 19mm for Offset. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

704 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

58 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

60 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 61 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. 62 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Add alignment constraints
63 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.

Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends, they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test. 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. 65 On the Tools menu, click Align. 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point.

67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 705

68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion; this is the align-to point. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. Make adjustments to account for the right side. TIP When you finish the alignments, if you select the end extrusion, a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. 71 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the design
72 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 73 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 74 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply, and click OK.

75 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

76 Save the Family. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. It is identical to the truss you have been designing. If you are comfortable with your design, you can continue using it in the next lesson. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way, you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. 77 Proceed to the next lesson, “Testing the Family in a Project” on page 707.

706 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Testing the Family in a Project
In this lesson, you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. After you load it into the project, you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt.

Loading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls, a sill, and a rim joist. NOTE Close any open families or projects. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. Although you could continue using the previous family, it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. Datasets

Open the truss family
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa.

Open the project file

Click File menu ➤ Open.

Testing the Family in a Project | 707

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF1.rvt.

Load the truss family into the project
1 On the Window menu, clickm_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. If you had multiple projects or families open, a dialog would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. Notice that the project file is now active. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Families, expand Structural Framing, and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. 4 Proceed to the next exercise, “Testing a Family Instance in a Project” on page 708.

Testing a Family Instance in a Project
In this exercise, you add several instances of the truss family to the project, and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise.

708 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Southeast Isometric. a slab. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Options Bar. and a wood rim joist. and click Structural. This project consists of foundation walls. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end. 6 Using point-to-point insertion. double-click Level 1. expand 3D Views. under Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar. expand Views. 2 In the Project Browser. TIP If the Structural tab of the Design Bar is not active. therefore. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 709 .Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D . the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. verify that Chain is not selected. The rim joist was added as a beam. click Beam. a wood sill.

NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. 710 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . double-click Level 1. 9 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square. NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line. not the wall or rim joist. under Floor Plans. under 3D Views. 8 In the Project Browser.Southeast Isometric. double-click 3D . You do not need to be precise. Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown. 7 In the Project Browser. Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected. you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes.

Southeast Isometric. Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 711 . navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name. double-click 3D .10 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. This should return the project to its original dimension. click Save as. under 3D Views. 11 On the Edit menu. The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. click Undo Drag. 13 In the Save as dialog. 12 On the File menu. The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length. In the next lesson.

712 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . This will aid in the placement of the wood web. Load the wood web family ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the File menu. “Working with Nested Subcomponents” on page 712. Adding a Nested Component In this exercise. 16 When prompted to open the truss family for editing.rfa.Edit a family from within a project 14 Select one of the wooden truss components. click Training Files. Because the family is already open. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Level. Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. click Hide/Isolate. and click Hide Element. 15 On the Options Bar. click Edit Family. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss. 4 On the View Control Bar. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise. you nest wood web members into the floor truss. and open Metric\Families\m_Wood_Web. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. click Yes. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array. you nest two wooden web members into the truss. under Floor Plans. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. 2 In the Project Browser. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss. double-click Ref.rfa is the active file.

Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. click Modify. You will align the left web component first. This will make aligning the wood web easier. 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown. double-click Front. Do not select it. 9 On the Design Bar. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. click Component. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase. Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web.This family is a single extrusion as shown. select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss. under Elevations. verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web. Adding a Nested Component | 713 . This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter. 13 For the align-to point. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. In the following steps. Align the nested web components 12 Enter AL. Notice the model lines that surround the web component. 10 In the Project Browser. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector.

In addition. Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar. NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. 18 Add two reference planes as shown. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify.14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown. it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints. 714 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson. Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components. click Ref Plane.

19 On the Tools menu. Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar. click Align. click Dimension. 20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point. 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component. 23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown. 21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown. In the steps that follow. 25 Add the following two dimensions: Adding a Nested Component | 715 . The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width. you align the reference planes to the center of the web components.

Place the dimension as shown. you label these dimensions. 2 In the Family Types dialog. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. ■ Right web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component. 26 On the Design Bar. “Creating Formula-controlled Parameters” on page 716. 28 In the Save As dialog. 27 On the File menu. you add new parameters to control the web components. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. 716 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name. click Modify. You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters. click Family Types. ■ In the next exercise. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. Place the dimension as shown. Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase. under Parameters. or the width of the center chase.Left web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. click Add. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase. length. click Save As.

3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Constraints. In addition. 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog to facilitate typing within the formula field. click OK. Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Length for Type. 4 In the Family Types dialog. Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. enter Depth . Select Common for Discipline. 5 Click OK. click Edit/New. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. under Other. When you refer to another parameter within a formula. click OK. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. and click OK. notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it. In the Type Properties dialog.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. under Parameter Data. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name. click Modify. and click Element Properties. Click OK. select WebDepth. Select Type. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 717 . 12 On the Design Bar.

Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase
13 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 14 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:

Enter CC for Name. This parameter is primarily for convenience. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Other for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

16 Under Other, enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. After you enter the formula, the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field.

Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter
17 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayLength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

19 Under Constraints, enter (Length - (CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends, which must remain at least 150mm long.

Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter
20 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayNum for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Integer for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

22 Under Constraints, enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. 23 Click OK.

718 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Add parameter to anchor web array
24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown.

25 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Webhalflength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. 28 On the Options Bar, select Webhalflength for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Add formula for Webhalflength
30 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 31 Under Constraints, enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula. 32 Click OK. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula.

Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 719

Associate web component parameters
33 Right-click the left web component, and click Element Properties. 34 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 35 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select WebArrayLength, and click OK. In the Type Properties dialog, the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. 37 In the Type Properties dialog, click OK. 38 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 40 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

Because you have added and constrained new components, it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems.

Flex the design
41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog. 42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

44 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness.

720 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Click Apply, and click OK.

45 On the File menu, click Save. 46 Proceed to the next exercise, “Arraying Nested Subcomponents” on page 721.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents
In this exercise, you array the nested web components, add alignment constraints, and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise.

Array the left web component
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase.

3 On the Edit menu, click Array. Creating an array requires two basic steps. First, you specify the move start point; then you specify the move end point. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. 4 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 721

6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

7 Press ENTER to complete the array. 8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Array the right nested web component
9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. 10 On the Edit menu, click Array. 11 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

14 Press ENTER to complete the array. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom out to view the truss.

Align and lock the arrays
17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. 18 On the Tools menu, click Align.

722 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

19 In the left array, place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights, then select the line twice.

Because there are two overlapping lines at this location, you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges.

21 Within the left array, align and lock the two right web components.

22 Within the right array, align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps. NOTE This step is very important. If you do not lock the edges of the array, the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss.

Label the arrays
23 Select the middle web component of the left array. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it.

NOTE Do not select the array value. 25 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. 28 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 723

30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Notice the arrays appear to be too long. This is because earlier in the tutorial, you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown.

33 Delete the dimension. 34 On the Tools menu, click Align. 35 Select the reference plane, Left, as the align-to point. 36 Select the reference plane, Member Left, and lock the alignment as shown.

Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value.

724 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

NOTE With most beam families, you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes; however, in this case, the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. Therefore, this solution has little, if any, significant impact. 37 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right.

41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Change trimmable end length value
42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. 44 Click Apply, and click OK. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends.

Flex the design
45 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1, and prepare the view for flexing. 46 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 47 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 12000mm for Length. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 725

TIP When flexing a complex model such as this, you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly; however, for training and time purposes, these steps have been reduced. 48 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 6000mm for Length. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss. 49 On the File menu, click Save. 50 Proceed to the next exercise, “Reloading a Family into a Project” on page 726.

Reloading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you reload the truss family into the project. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length.

726 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. In addition to the truss family, the project, m_WWF1.rvt, should be open. Close any other open projects.

Reload the truss into the project.
1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View, View 1, displays. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 3 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes.

4 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square. 6 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Southeast Isometric. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes.

Reloading a Family into a Project | 727

7 On the Edit menu, click Undo Drag. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. In the next lesson, you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files. 9 Proceed to the next lesson, “Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters” on page 728.

Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters
In this lesson, you create and apply subcategories and materials. You then create a parameter to specifically control material application.

Creating and Applying Subcategories
In this exercise, you create new subcategories within the truss family. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF2.rvt.

728 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this dataset, the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. In addition, four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure.

Apply Object Styles
1 Zoom in around beam system. Notice no material has been applied to the truss. Within the family, the material values were set to By Category by default.

2 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 3 In the Object Styles dialog, verify that the Model Objects tab is selected, and expand the category Structural Framing. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. In addition, notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. 4 On the Structural Framing category line, click in the material field until the button displays as shown.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 729

5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. 6 In the Materials dialog, click Wood - Timber for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. Notice the Wood - Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components.

When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category, all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. If there was a metal beam in this building model, it would also have the wood material applied to it. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor, you have more control over component visibility within a project. 8 On the Edit menu, click Undo Object Styles.

Create subcategories within the truss family
9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 10 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 12 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 13 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss for Name, and click OK.

Apply material to subcategory
15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 16 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 17 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. 18 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

19 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 20 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 21 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK.

Apply the subcategory to the truss components
22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Other, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected.

730 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

25 On the Options Bar, click

.

26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory, and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Apply a subcategory to the nested web components
28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components, press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it. 29 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing. The web component family opens in a 3D view.

31 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 32 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 33 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Name, and click OK. By creating a separate subcategory for the web components, you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 731

34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss - Webs subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 35 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 36 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs, and click OK. 37 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

38 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 39 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 40 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. 41 Select the web extrusion. 42 On the Options Bar, click .

43 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Subcategory, and click OK.

Reload web component into truss family
44 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 46 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.

Reload truss into project
47 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 48 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 49 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components.

50 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 51 In the Object Styles dialog, under Categories, expand Structural Framing.

732 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Notice the two new subcategories are listed. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. 52 Click OK. 53 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, under Visibility, expand Structural Framing, clear Wood Floor Truss Webs, and click OK. Notice the web extrusions no longer display; however, the stick symbols continue to display.

55 On the Edit menu, click Undo Visibility/Graphics. 56 On the File menu, click Save As. 57 In the Save as dialog, navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Material Parameters” on page 733.

Creating Material Parameters
In this exercise, you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise.

Open truss family for editing
1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create material parameter
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Material for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

7 In the Family Types dialog, notice the default material is By Category.

Creating Material Parameters | 733

In this case, do not assign a material to the parameter. When reloaded into a project, this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. 8 Click OK.

Link truss extrusions to material parameter
9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 10 On the Options Bar, click .

11 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the button to the right of the Material value field. 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components, press TAB, and select the component. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 21 Click OK twice. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. 29 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Steel for Name, and click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam.

734 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

32 On the File menu, click Save. 33 On the File menu, click Close. 34 Close any open files. You can save the open files if you wish. In the next lesson, a new dataset is supplied. 35 Proceed to the next lesson, “Controlling Component Visibility” on page 735.

Controlling Component Visibility
In this lesson, you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls
In this exercise, you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels.

Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF3.rvt.

Change detail levels
1 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Controlling Component Visibility | 735

Notice the rim joist no longer displays. However, notice the floor truss has not changed appearance, because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Currently within the truss, all elements display at all times in all views.

2 Select a floor truss. 3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Apply detail level controls to web components
5 Select a web component. 6 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 8 Select the web extrusion. 9 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

11 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 13 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed.

Assign detail level to center chase extrusions
14 Select the center chase extrusions. 15 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

736 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Assign detail level to truss ends
17 Select the end extrusions. 18 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Assign detail level to truss chords
20 Select the truss chords. 21 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■

Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF3.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed.

26 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Medium. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed. 27 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 28 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls | 737

Notice the symbolic representation of the beams.

29 On the File menu, click Save As. 30 In the Save As dialog, navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. 31 Proceed to the next lesson, “Creating Component Types” on page 738.

Creating Component Types
In this lesson, you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. In the final exercise, you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length.

Creating Multiple Component Types
In this exercise, you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project, creating predefined types can speed up the design process.

Open the truss family for editing
1 Select a floor truss. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create new types
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 6 In the New dialog, enter 89x38 for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 8 In the New dialog, enter 64x38 for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 64mm for Chord Width, and click Apply. Notice the chord changes width. 10 Select 89x38 for Name, and click Apply. The truss returns to its original designed value. NOTE When creating new components, create types for those most frequently used in your projects. 11 Click OK.

738 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

and click OK. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>.TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. 400))) 6 Click Apply. double-click 3D . 286. select 64x38. select Override parameter values of existing types. 22 On the File menu. 400. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. 21 In the Project Browser.Southeast Isometric. “Creating Conditional Formulas” on page 739. Notice the two beam types. click Family Types. select m_WWF3. 2 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Type Selector. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. 18 In the Type Selector. select 89x38. under Dimensions. click Beam. if(Length < 9000. click Edit Family. <result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog. click Load into Projects. <result-if-true>. click Save. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. under 3D Views. 14 In the Reload Family dialog. Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length.rvt. 350. 20 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise. click Modify. 13 In the Load into Projects dialog. Creating Conditional Formulas | 739 . and click Yes. if(Length < 7500.

click Save. and click OK. 16 On the File menu. and click Apply. and click OK. 14 In the Project Browser.rvt. under Floor Plans. double-click 3D . under 3D Views. 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth. you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate. click Apply. select Override parameter values of existing types. 8 In the Family Types dialog. 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1.Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog. Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar. and click Yes. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families. double-click Level 1. 11 In the Reload Family dialog. enter 8000 for length. click Load into Projects. 740 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . select m_WWF3. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog. NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change. enter 6000 for length. You have completed this tutorial. Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. Notice the truss depth increases.Southeast Isometric. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint. 17 Close any open files.

Using Advanced Features 7 741 .

742 | Chapter 18 Using Advanced Features .

and they are not windows. or you can use a specific curtain system command. you need to change the length of the wall. 743 . panel. Like walls. To change grids. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. This affects the entire curtain system. and you can change these elements individually. A typical curtain system comprises a wall.Curtain Systems 18 Curtain systems are not walls. For example. you select the grid. to resize the system. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. To switch panel types. and mullions. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. Unlike windows. Like windows. you need to select a panel. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. grid lines.

rvt. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click Ground Floor. 744 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 4 In the Type Selector.Flat Curtain System In this lesson. you create a curtain system using the wall command. click Wall. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. click Training Files. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 8 In the Project Browser. Creating an Entrance | 745 .6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. and double-click Southeast Isometric. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.

under Floor Plans. and room bounding. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. enter 1200. Click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. using curtain grids. top and base attachments. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR. top constraint. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. and click (Properties). 746 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . For Top Offset. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels.11 Select the curtain system. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems.

26 While pressing CTRL. click Modify. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line.15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select SECOND FLOOR. 20 In the drawing area. SIXTH FLOOR. 18 In the Project Browser. click Elevation. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. while pressing CTRL. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. FIFTH FLOOR. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. FOURTH FLOOR. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. Creating an Entrance | 747 . 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. and click OK. and click Rename. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and SEVENTH FLOOR. click Curtain Grid. THIRD FLOOR. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. and resize the crop boundary as shown. and click OK.a. right-click Elevation 1 .

This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. Click to place another grid line. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar.The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. one larger than the other. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. 33 On the Design Bar. 748 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . Click to create a vertical grid. click Curtain Grid. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. click Modify. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

Instead of using the Door command. click Add or Remove Segments. Creating an Entrance | 749 . The two segments are removed. and then select the segment above it.Next. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. The segment line style changes to dashed. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. you add a doorway to the curtain system. and on the Options Bar. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel.

select One Segment. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. and lock them. 39 On the Design Bar. 42 Place dimensions as shown.38 Using the same method. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 750 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 40 On the Options Bar. click Curtain Grid.

click in any white space to exit the editor. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. 52 On the Type Selector. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. click Training Files. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained.rfa. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). The panel changes to a double door. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl.43 Delete the dimensions. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 54 On the Design Bar. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. Next. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. Creating an Entrance | 751 . You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. click Modify. Use the following image as a guide.

under Floor Plans.These panels schedule as doors. click System Panel : Solid. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. under Elevations. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. Now. 65 On the View Control Bar. click . 57 On the View Control Bar. double-click Entrance Elevation. on the new curtain system you added. 56 In the Project Browser. They are part of the curtain panel category. 61 With the panel still selected. 752 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . and click Wireframe. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. 55 In the Project Browser. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. Next. 63 Click OK twice. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. click . The glazed panels display in blue. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. This changes the graphics style of the view. and the solid panels display in white. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. not as curtain panels. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. 60 On the Type Selector.

select Entire Grid Line. select Grid Line Segment. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. 2 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 753 . Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. click Save As. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. click Mullion.rvt. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 68 On the File menu.

Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar. 12 Click the lower mullion join control. 11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Two mullion join controls display. You are going to change some mullion joins. so you remove them next. because their width reduces the size of the doors. select All Empty Segments.6 On the Options Bar. however. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. 9 Delete the mullions below them. 754 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . there are a few that you do not want. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary.

You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. you add a curtain system using the wall command. click Modify. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. 15 In the Project Browser. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. 16 Save the file. Finally. Finally. 13 Click the top mullion control. double-click Southeast Isometric. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. 14 On the Design Bar.The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. Curved Curtain System | 755 . The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. you can also right-click. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins.

7 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. under Floor Plans.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. double-click GROUND FLOOR. For Top Offset. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. 5 Click . Click OK. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. (Arc passing through three points). 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter 1200. 4 In the Type Selector. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. 756 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . click Wall. for Top Constraint.

The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. under Elevations. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 15 Zoom in to the cylinder. Next. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. you change some panels in the system. and then sixteenths. double-click East. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. you place grids on the system. 14 In the Project Browser. You are going to use one of these snaps points. eighths. Adding a Curved Curtain System | 757 . click Modify. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. Divide the halves into quarters. 16 On the Design Bar. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. click Curtain Grid. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. Next.

7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. for Depth. 6 On the Options Bar. select the bottom layer of panels. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. click Lines. Remember to click elements from the selection except Curtain Panels.rft. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. select Basic Wall: Generic . click . and on the Options Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.300mm. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. 3 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Selector.Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. under Elevations. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. enter 100. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. to filter out all other 19 Save the file. 758 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . double-click Exterior. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Training Files.

8 On the Design Bar.Pattern. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. 12 On the Options Bar. select Curtain Panel . and return to the project file. under Floor Plans. select Glass. 11 On the Design Bar.rfa family. 19 In the Project Browser. 9 Select the extrusion. click Finish Sketch. click Model Lines. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Modify. 14 On the Design Bar. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 759 . and click OK. right-click. All fourth floor panels are selected. . and click . 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. and save the family as Curtain Panel . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 In the Type Selector.Pattern. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory.rfa. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion.Pattern. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. clear Chain.

Solid. All fifth floor panels are selected. and click Flip Orientation. click (Default 3D View). 24 On the View toolbar. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. 26 In the Project Browser. 29 Save the file. right-click.22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. select System Panel . This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. 23 Right-click. 28 In the Type Selector. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. 760 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 25 Hold SHIFT and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 27 Highlight a panel in the arc. The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. and then click (Dynamically Modify View). under Floor Plans. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. All the panels change to the solid panel.

8 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for Profile Usage. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Select Radius. . Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. enter 8. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. double-click East. For vertical mullions. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon).rft. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. and enter 50 mm for the radius. select Mullion. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. click Lines.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. and click OK. click Mullion. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 761 . Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Click again to specify the ending point. click Training Files. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. click ■ ■ For Sides. under Elevations. and select it.

click Modify. select Circular Mullion for Family. and click Visibility. and return to the project file. 30 Click . click Mullion. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 28 Click . This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 17 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rfa. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion.11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under 3D Views. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog.rfa. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Coarse and Medium. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 20 Select the detail component. click Training Files.rfa family. After the new profile is loaded. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. click Detail Component. double-click Southeast Isometric. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 27 In the Project Browser.detail. 762 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and click OK. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. it can be added as a mullion type. 13 On the Options Bar. clear Fine. 19 On the Design Bar. click Visibility.

so you remove the unwanted ones. make custom curtain panels and mullions. 38 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 35 Under Construction. and then apply those custom elements to the system. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 763 . for Profile. click Duplicate. right-click. 42 Press DELETE. You have placed more mullions than you want. 34 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 43 Save the file. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. 39 On the Design Bar. you learned to create a curved curtain system. 37 On the Options Bar. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. In this lesson. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. click Modify. double-click GROUND FLOOR. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 36 Click OK twice. and click OK. 40 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 41 Highlight a mullion in the arc.32 Click Edit/New. select All Empty Segments. 33 In the Type Properties dialog.

TIP To chain select all the walls. double-click TOP OF ROOF. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. click Roof Properties. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. Click OK. 7 On the Design Bar. and press TAB. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. and a ruled curtain system. 4 On the Design Bar. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. a storefront system. enter 600. click Finish Roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. select Defines slope. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. 5 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. click Pick Walls. All the inside faces highlight. 9 On the Design Bar. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. and you can click to select them all. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 764 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. select System Family: Sloped Glazing.

1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. under Floor Plans. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. select Entire Grid Line. 14 On the Options Bar. click Mullion. 11 On the View Control Bar. Storefront System | 765 . 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. 17 On the View Control Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. 16 On the Design Bar. 18 Save the file. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Storefront System In this exercise. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Modify.10 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. click Wall. 766 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 4 In the Type Selector. select Unconnected for Height. and enter 2400. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.You are going to place a storefront system in this wall.

9 On the Design Bar. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall.The curtain wall cuts the original wall. under 3D Views. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. 12 Select the storefront wall. To see how the grid layout is defined. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. click Edit/New. enter 10200 mm. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. click Modify. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. and press ENTER. For this wall. which is specified in the type. even if the wall height changes. Storefront System | 767 . double-click Southeast Isometric. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. This specifies an exact length for the wall. and click . 13 In the Element Properties dialog. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. 10 In the Project Browser. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. 8 Click the temporary dimension.

Justification. click Mullion. 18 On the Options Bar. see the Revit Architecture help. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. select All Empty Segments. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. Angle. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. under 3D Views. 20 Save the file. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. 768 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 16 Click OK. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. In this exercise. center. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. you find Number. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. double-click Southeast Isometric. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. and Offset. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. enter 15. By setting the Angle value. or end. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. 19 Select a curtain grid.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. 1 In the Project Browser.

click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. 6 Click the highlighted line. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. and highlight the model line. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Curtain System by Lines | 769 . 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight.3 On the View Control Bar.

NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. 770 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. quarters.8 Select the highlighted line. 13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. Next. and then eighths. click Curtain Grid. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. 10 Select the panel. and click . but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. 11 Click OK. A panel between the 2 lines is created. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

and then eighths. 16 In the Type Selector.This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. select System Panel : Solid. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. Finally. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. embed a curtain system inside another wall. 18 Save the file. right-click. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. Curtain System by Lines | 771 . 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. and define a ruled curtain system. quarters. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems.

772 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .

and soffits to the roofs that you create. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2008. you learn how to add fascia. gutters.Roofs 19 In this tutorial. In addition. 773 .

rvt. and mansard roofs. and click OK. you learn to create several different types of roofs. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. 4 Click OK. gable. 774 | Chapter 19 Roofs . including hip. shed. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 5 In the Go To View dialog. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. In this lesson. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. and double-click Level 1. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Before you can sketch the roof profile. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. verify that Section: Section1 is selected.Creating Roofs In this lesson. expand Floor Plans. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. and open Metric\m_Roofs. You do not need to create the work plane. select Name. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise.

and so on). This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. centerline. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. Creating an Extruded Roof | 775 . 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof.The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. click Ref Plane. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. click the blue square on the witness line.

11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. 776 | Chapter 19 Roofs . Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 13 On the Options Bar. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. select Chain. Next. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. click Lines. sketch the roof profile.

The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. Creating an Extruded Roof | 777 . 18 Select the edge of the roof. 16 On the View toolbar. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. 19 On the Tools toolbar. Next. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. and then select the exterior face of the wall. click . click . Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. press TAB. The roof should resemble the following illustration. click to display the model. 17 On the Tools toolbar.

25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. press CTRL. and select the second wall. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. 26 On the View toolbar. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. 778 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click Attach for Top/Base. expand Sections (Type 1). You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. expand Views (all). You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 24 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Section 1. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 21 In the Project Browser. “Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint” on page 778.The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.

and enter 600 for Overhang. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 9 Press CTRL. click Modify. verify that Defines slope is selected. click . 5 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. 6 On the Options Bar. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 779 . 7 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. m_Roofs. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 2 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. By default. and on the Options Bar. Next. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. select both slope definition lines. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. 4 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line.rvt. click Pick Walls. clear Defines slope. The Element Properties dialog is displayed.

and enter 600 for Overhang. 13 On the View toolbar. under Dimensions. “Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint” on page 780. expand Views (all). 3 On the Options Bar. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. When you complete the roof.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. 780 | Chapter 19 Roofs .10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 11 On the Design Bar. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model. and double-click Level 3. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. and click OK. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 12 When you see the informational dialog. click Pick Walls. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. click Finish Roof. clear Defines slope. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.

click Modify. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 9 Using automatic snaps. click Lines. 6 Click to select all the walls. select Defines Slope. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 781 . 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. 10 On the View menu. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. click . 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. Next. add new slope lines to the roof. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 8 On the Options Bar. Next. 13 On the Options Bar. sketch the chimney opening.

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. and enter 600 for Overhang. 782 | Chapter 19 Roofs . select Defines Slope. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. click Finish Roof. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. “Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint” on page 782. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. select Defines slope. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. click Pick Walls. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls.15 On the Options bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 18 On the View toolbar. close the roof sketch. 17 When you see the informational dialog. click to view the new roof in the model. Next.

15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Tools toolbar. 11 To trim the first line segment. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 10 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Next. and click . select the left vertical slope definition line. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. click . click Roof Properties. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. 14 Under Constraints. Next. using the following illustration for guidance. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. click Lines. and click OK. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. click Finish Roof. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building.6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click to display the model. clear Defines Slope. 16 On the View toolbar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 783 .

23 On the Tools toolbar. Next. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 784 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 18 On the Design Bar. join the two remaining walls to the roof. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. click . Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof.17 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house. click Modify.

rvt.The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 1 In the Project Browser. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. expand Views (all). 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. enter 0 for Overhang. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 785 . clear Defines Slope. and enter 300 for Overhang. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. click Pick Walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. press TAB. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. expand Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. “Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint” on page 785. 6 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 2.

select Defines slope. you add a slope-defining line. and press ENTER. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 Under Constraints.7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. and click OK. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. click . click Modify. 9 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 786 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click Finish Roof to complete the roof. select the left vertical roof line. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. Next. click Roof Properties. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 13 On the Options Bar. 10 To trim the first line segment. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 19 Click 20 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. Next. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep.

click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 787 . 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. “Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof” on page 787. and double-click 3D. click Split Walls and Lines. clear Defines Slope. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. To help locate the position of each split. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. add two new slope arrows. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand 3D Views.rvt. Next. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and enter 600 for Offset. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. expand Views (all). you need to add two reference planes.21 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Tools menu. 14 On the Options Bar. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 12 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. 5 On the View menu. and double-click Level 2. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. verify is selected. Next. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 7 On the Options Bar. click . m_Roofs. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. click Slope Arrow. 4 In the Project Browser. Before you can add slope arrows. click Ref Plane. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house.

click Edit. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. and click 19 Under Constraints. 3 On the Options Bar. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . Begin the tail at the right reference plane. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. . 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Garage Roof. 20 Under Dimensions. click Modify. 788 | Chapter 19 Roofs . you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. When eave heights differ. 5 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition).15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. m_Roofs. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. and move the cursor to place the arrow. expand Floor Plans. select Slope for Specify. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. select Defines Slope. the adjacent eave heights must align. enter 500 for Rise/1000.rvt. and then click OK. select both slope arrows. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. When you sketch a hip roof. expand Views (all). 18 Press CTRL. “Aligning Roof Eaves” on page 788.15 to add the second slope arrow.

click Save As. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. click Align Eaves. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 14 If you want to save your changes. select a method to align the eaves. The eave lines display with a dimension. 12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. under Dimensions. on the Options Bar.6 With the two gable end lines selected. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Mansard Roof | 789 . and click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. “Creating a Mansard Roof” on page 789. on the File menu. When aligning eaves. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Next. click . 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. 13 On the View toolbar. click to display the model.

4 In the Element Properties dialog. and double-click North.rvt. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. expand Views (all). on the Options Bar. click to display the model. 3 Select the roof and.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Elevations. click . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. under Constraints. 790 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the View toolbar. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. click Modify. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3.

click to display the model with the complete mansard roof. and click OK. 18 If you want to save your changes. press TAB. click Save As. 14 On the Options Bar. Creating Fascia. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating Fascia. After you create a roof. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click . click Lines. click Finish Roof. click . you can easily create its fascia. Gutters. click Modify. 10 On the Options Bar. gutters. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and Soffits In this lesson. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. and soffits. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 On the View toolbar. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 3. expand Floor Plans. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to create roof fascia. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and then select Defines slope. 7 In the Project Browser. gutters. Gutters. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. and select the remaining three lines. and soffits in Revit Architecture. expand Views (all). create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. on the File menu. under Dimensions. and Soffits | 791 . click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.Next.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK twice. enter Built-up Fascia. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. 792 | Chapter 19 Roofs .rfa. and click Open. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. click Training Files. 3 Press CTRL. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. under Construction. 5 On the Options Bar. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 8 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate.rvt. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. and open Common\c_Condominium.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. click Training Files. and click OK. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. click . and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof.

under Construction. . 3 In the Properties dialog. click . 14 Proceed to the next exercise. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. “Creating Gutters” on page 793. 10 Click to place the gutter. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter.rvt. Creating Gutters In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. Creating Gutters | 793 . and click OK three times.13 On the Design Bar. c_Condominium. click Duplicate. click in the Value field for Material. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof.

c_Condominium. and double-click Roof.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. “Creating Soffits” on page 794. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. click Pick Roofs. you learn how to place a roof soffit. expand Views. Creating Soffits In this exercise. 794 | Chapter 19 Roofs .rvt. 4 Select the roof. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Design Bar.

9 If you want to save your changes. click Finish Sketch. 8 Select the roof. click Join Geometry. click Save As. and then select the soffit to join them.5 On the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. and save the exercise file with a unique name. expand Views (all). 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Creating Soffits | 795 . 6 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Tools menu. on the File menu. and double-click 3D.

796 | Chapter 19 Roofs .

797 . you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. Finally. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable.Area Analysis 20 In this tutorial.

expand Views (all).Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. 3 Under Area. For Unit Suffix. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. click Project Units. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. click OK. your values will be different. right-click in the Design Bar. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. select Square meters. For Rounding. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. and click Room and Area. click Settings. expand Floor Plans. These schemes define spatial relationships. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.rvt. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. 4 In the Project Units dialog. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. select m2 Click OK. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. For Unit Suffix. In the final exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Area. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. click the Area Schemes tab. under Length. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. 798 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . If you are using metric units. select mm. select Millimeters. select 2 decimal places. 2 In the Project Units dialog. Click OK.

9 Click Cancel. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. under Views (all). You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations.Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 799 . you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. forming a closed loop. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. click the Room Calculations tab. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. When you select Yes in this dialog. you must manually add these boundary lines. 12 When the informational dialog displays. or 0. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Click OK. If you select No. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. 13 In the Project Browser. click Area Plan. Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). it is not necessary in this exercise. the system-computed height defaults to the level. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model.

click Area Plan. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. 800 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. Click OK. Next. rather than the area tag. and store area. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. you must select one of the reference lines. To modify the area. common areas. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. click Area.14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. you create a new area plan for rentable space.

23 On the Design Bar. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall.Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. click Area Boundary. When you add area boundary lines. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. If you do not select this option. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 801 . 21 On the Options Bar. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). you can either draw them or pick them. When you pick the walls. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. click Area.

and click to select the area. click Modify. Click OK. 29 On the Design Bar.25 On the Design Bar. Select Office area for Area Type. 802 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 27 On the Options Bar. click . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. 31 On the Design Bar. click Area. 32 On the Options Bar. click Modify and select the area. click . place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. 28 In the Element Properties dialog.

Click OK. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. In the Element Properties dialog. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. enter Core for Name. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. and select Store Area for Area Type. 35 Add an area to the building model core. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 803 . Select Office area for Area Type. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. Click OK.33 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Save.rvt. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise.Notice that within the two store areas. name the project Area-in progress. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. In this exercise. 804 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . click Color Scheme Legend. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and click Save. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. 37 On the File menu. In the next exercise. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. and click to place the legend.

9 Click OK. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 805 . 5 In the New Schedule dialog. select Areas (Rentable). Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. select Area Type and click Add.3 When the dialog displays. 7 Under Available fields. click the Fields tab. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. and click OK. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. under Category.

806 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis .

After you make building elements. At any time.Massing 21 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. building elements. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. you can specify the view to display massing elements. In this tutorial. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. If you modify a massing face. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. and roofs. curtain systems. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. 807 . floors. you then need to update the building face. or both. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically.

You assign the default wall. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. roofs. and cutting geometry.rvt. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. floor.Using Massing Tools In this lesson. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and floors. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. and click Massing. sweeps. double-click Level 1. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Create Mass. Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. click Training Files. 808 | Chapter 21 Massing . 5 On the Design Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise.

select Mass (Opaque) for Name. 18 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. click Lines. 8 On the Design Bar. 13 On the View toolbar. and click 17 On the Options Bar.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. enter 1550 mm for the Offset. on the Options Bar. 10 In the Materials dialog. 15 On the Design Bar. enter 25000 for Extrusion End. 12 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click . under Constraints. click the Value for Material. under Views (all). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 809 . under Materials and Finishes. click Finish Sketch. double-click Level 1. click Lines. and click OK. 16 On the Sketch Design Bar. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. click Extrusion Properties. and click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. under Floor Plans. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. 19 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown.

and click OK. TIP If necessary. 25 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click West. click the Value for Material. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. The second form is on top of the first form. click Finish Sketch. under Materials and Finishes. under Views (all). 24 On the Design Bar. and click OK.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 20 On the Design Bar. press TAB to highlight the entire face. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 28 In the Work Plane dialog. 810 | Chapter 21 Massing . double-click {3D} to see the results. highlight the larger form. and then click . and click OK. under Views (all). 29 In the drawing area. select Pick a plane. enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. 30 Click to select the face. 27 On the Design Bar. select Mass (Transparent) for Name. under Constraints. Continue creation of next massing form 26 In the Project Browser. click Extrusion Properties. 22 In the Materials dialog. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.

35 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. click the arrow next to the drawing options. Sketch the blend base 32 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. click . 37 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. Next. 34 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. click Lines. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 811 . TIP If you do not see this option. 33 On the Options Bar. and click to select the line start point.31 On the Sketch Design Bar. 36 On the Options Bar. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. click . and click on the Options Bar.

click Edit Top. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Modify. under Views (all). and delete the vertical construction line. on the Options Bar. double-click East. click Lines and. . 41 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. 39 Select the arc and the horizontal line. click . click 46 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 812 | Chapter 21 Massing . 47 On the Options Bar. . 40 On the Edit toolbar. 42 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 44 In the Project Browser. click 48 Create an arc as shown.38 On the Design Bar. Sketching the blend top 43 On the Design Bar. 45 On the Design Bar.

49 On the Design Bar. click . In this exercise. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model | 813 . click Blend Properties. 51 On the Design Bar. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. 52 On the View toolbar. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. In the next exercise. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model.

5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. 12 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. as shown. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. When sketching each extrusion. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. under Floor Plans. 14 Click OK. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. click Lines and. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. click Finish Sketch. 13 Under Constraints. 814 | Chapter 21 Massing . When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap. snap the corners to the intersections. on the View Control Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. and 0 for Extrusion Start.rvt. on the Options Bar. m_Massing_Start. 7 Using the same technique. 9 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options bar. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. enter 12000 for Extrusion End. place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select the mass. and then click Hidden Line. click and select Chain. double-click Level 1. click Ref Plane. under Views (all). click and enter 15000 for Offset. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. click Extrusion Properties. 2 In the drawing area.

18 On the File menu. 12000 mm for Height. click Save As. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 815 . enter 15000 mm for Width.rfa. 19 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. click New. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. and click Apply. Finally. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name.16 On the View toolbar. 3 In the Name dialog. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. under Other. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. and 18000 mm for Depth. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. and click OK. click . 2 In the Family Types dialog. you create new family types from a mass family file. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. 17 On the Mass Design Bar.rvt. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. click Family Types. 4 In the Family Types dialog. In this exercise. click Finish Mass.

and click Apply. click Training Files.rfa. Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. and 6000 mm for Depth. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 If not already selected. In this exercise. You also load other existing mass families and place them. and click Apply. and click OK.rvt. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. 11000 mm for Height. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. 10 On the File menu.5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width. 18000 mm for Height. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width. click Save As. 9 Click OK. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. 816 | Chapter 21 Massing . you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. and 9000 mm for Depth. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK.

and click OK twice. 21 On the Options Bar. 4 On the File menu. Arc Dome. 24 On the Design Bar. 6 Open the Box-Training. 14 In the Type Selector. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. double-click Site. click Modify. Semi Barrel Vault.rfa. under Views (all). and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. and Triangle. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Select the box. 10 On the Design Bar. 3 On the View Control Bar. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 817 . select the triangle. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown. 8 In the Type Selector. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. 25 In the drawing area. click Training Files. click Modify. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. select Rotate after placement. enter 90 for Angle. and click . and click to place the mass. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.rfa family files. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Place Mass. click Modify. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and click OK twice. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown.rfa. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm.2 In the Project Browser. click Place Mass. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 16 On the Design Bar. 17 Press CTRL. 18 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rfa. click Place Mass. 12 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. 20 In the Type Selector. select the 3 boxes. and click . 23 On the Options Bar.

select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. you join these mass elements. 34 On the View menu. click Orient ➤ Northeast. 27 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. click Place Mass. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. and click OK twice. Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. 32 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. In the next exercise. In this exercise. and click . 818 | Chapter 21 Massing . click . 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. 31 Select the box and click .26 Select the triangle. and click OK twice. 29 In the Type Selector. 33 On the View toolbar.

you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise.rvt file. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar.Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. NOTE When you join geometry. Joining Mass Elements | 819 . the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. and then press ESC to see the result. 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. 4 Select the triangle. . click .

double-click Site. 820 | Chapter 21 Massing . and snap to the midpoint of the edge. under Floor Plans. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown. under Views (all). 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. enter SM. click for Axis. click 8 On the Options Bar. on the Edit toolbar.Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown.

Joining Mass Elements | 821 . 17 Press ESC to see the result. you joined mass elements together.12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. click . . You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. In this exercise. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. and then select the triangle. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar.

(If Design Options is already selected. and then click OK. and select the triangle mass element. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Window menu. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. 5 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click . 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. 7 In the Type Selector. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. select Sloped (primary). 10 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. 4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. clear Curved. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass.Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. select Rotate after placement.rvt. double-click Site. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. do not clear the check mark. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. 822 | Chapter 21 Massing . 8 On the Options Bar. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. enter 90 degrees for Angle. under Views (all). 1 On the Design Bar. click Place Mass.

15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. under Views (all). 18 In the Type Selector. 13 On the Design Bar. Mass Elements in Design Options | 823 . click Place Mass. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 16 On the View Control Bar. 21 In the drawing area. click Modify. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. double-click North. 20 On the Design Bar.12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. and click . and click . and click OK twice. Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Elevations. TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. 23 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and click Wireframe. 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown. and click OK twice. select the three arc domes. click . 14 In the drawing area. 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property.

select Curved. click . and click OK. 824 | Chapter 21 Massing . 27 On the Design Options toolbar. click the Design Options tab. under 3D Views. 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. under Views (all). 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 29 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. Create a Design Option set 26 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. and click Wireframe. 32 Click the value for Design Option. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing.24 On the View Control Bar. TIP To find the correct shapes. 30 On the View menu. and watch the status bar. click . 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. select Curved from the Design Option menu. click Visibility/Graphics. While pressing CTRL. clear Sloped. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault.

under Option. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes.rvt. you placed mass elements into Design Options. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you can make it the primary option. 36 On the File menu. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. select Curved and. In this exercise. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design.You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. and click Close.rvt. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 825 . click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. click Make Primary. click Training Files. 33 On the Design Options toolbar. 35 Close the warning that displays. Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. you pick massing faces to create walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 34 In the Design Options dialog. click .

5 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall: Exterior . double-click {3D}. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 3. under Views (all). under Views (all). 3 On the View menu. click .Brick on CMU. Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 826 | Chapter 21 Massing . and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. 8 In the Project Browser. click to show the massing model. The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU.1 In the Project Browser. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. 9 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. 6 On the Options Bar. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. 2 On the View toolbar. click Orient ➤ Southeast.

12 On the Design Bar. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. double-click Level 1. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 827 .NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). under Views (all). 11 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face. 16 In the Type Selector. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. double-click Level 5. 18 Select all the faces shown in red. 14 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. 15 On the Design Bar.

828 | Chapter 21 Massing . click . you can select the overlapping curtain wall. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. If desired. under Views (all). 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. and click Wireframe. 21 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise. In this exercise. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar.You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. 19 In the Project Browser. you pick massing faces to create floors. 20 On the View Control Bar. double-click Level 9. click Wall by Face.

and click OK. and Walls. Curtain Systems. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 4 Click OK. select all levels. click Visibility/Graphics.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. clear Curtain Panels. under Views (all). Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 829 . 7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. double-click {3D}.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View menu. click Floor Area Faces.

select Levels 1-4. 11 On the Options Bar. 10 Press CTRL. click Floor Area Faces. 12 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. click Orient ➤ Northeast. 9 On the View menu. and click OK. click Modify. and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown.8 On the Design Bar. 830 | Chapter 21 Massing .

13 On the Design Bar. clear Exclude Options. double-click Level 1. 18 In the Project Browser. 15 Press CTRL. click Modify. 16 On the Options Bar. and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. under Floor Plans. click Create Floors. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 22 On the Options Bar. click Floor by Face. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Floor Area Faces. 23 On the View toolbar. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 831 . 20 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 21 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces. click . under Views (all). 17 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. 14 On the Options Bar. select Level 1.

you pick massing faces to create roofs. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Mass Schedule.24 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors. 832 | Chapter 21 Massing . You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise.

under Views (all). 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Create Roof. 4 In the Type Selector. select Basic Roof : Generic . NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 833 . click Create Roof. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. double-click {3D}. 1 In the Project Browser. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements.rvt. click Roof by Face.400mm. 5 On the Options Bar.

10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. click Visibility/Graphics. select Curtain Panels.Your model should now look as shown. click Create Roof. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. 834 | Chapter 21 Massing . 11 On the View menu. and then click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. Curtain Systems. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. 7 With the Roof by Face command still selected. and Walls. 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. In this exercise. 12 Click the Model Categories tab.

5 Press CTRL. 1 In the Project Browser. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. click Create System. 3 In the Type Selector.rvt. under Views (all). 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain System by Face. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating Curtain Systems | 835 .Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. double-click {3D}. 6 On the Options Bar. be sure that Select Multiple is selected.

select the blended form on the in-place mass. 836 | Chapter 21 Massing . 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes.

9 On the Options Bar. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 837 . In this exercise. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 10 Click Modify to exit the command. click Create System.

7 Enter Larger Size for Name. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 On the View menu. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. and click OK. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Curtain Panels. click OK. 4 Select the box mass family as shown and click . and Walls. and click OK. enter 30000 for Width. click Edit/New.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Floors. Roofs. 838 | Chapter 21 Massing . and then click OK.rvt. 3 On the Model Categories tab. under Views (all). Next. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Site. click Visibility/Graphics. click Duplicate. 1 In the Project Browser. Curtain Systems.

14 Open the 3D view to see the result. click Modify. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 839 . clear Exclude Options. 13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. 12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family.10 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar.

The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. you want to select the smaller one. 19 On the View toolbar. 15 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. click . click OK. Also. 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. double-click Level 1. TIP To select the curtain wall. click Remake. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown. In the next steps. 840 | Chapter 21 Massing . 17 On the Options Bar. under Views (all).

TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 841 . 20 Select the roof as shown. 21 On the Options Bar. click Remake. you will notice that Revit Architecture resized the floors.

1 Open the 3D view. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family.rvt. you changed the size of an existing mass family. 842 | Chapter 21 Massing . In this exercise.22 Select the arc dome curtain system. and click Remake. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements.

Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 843 .Massing only. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click All to select all categories. click Visibility/Graphics. The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 3 In the Project Browser. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 5 On the View menu. right-click on the 3D view. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 9 Select Mass. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 4 Rename the view 3D . and click OK. 6 On the Model Categories tab.Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing.

you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components. to the building shell. You might create the model shown. such as columns and an extruded roof. If desired. This concludes the massing tutorial. 844 | Chapter 21 Massing .In this exercise. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model.

you also simplify the modification process. and modify repetitive units. In this tutorial. you not only simplify their placement. For example. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. place. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. You can also nest groups within other groups. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. 845 . Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. or with those working on a different project. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. By grouping objects. all instances in the building model are updated.Grouping 22 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2008.

and typical office layouts.rvt. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. Modifying. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (all). You mirror one instance of the group. When you make changes to a nested group. In the left pane of the Open dialog. hotel rooms. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. and double-click First Floor. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. 846 | Chapter 22 Grouping . In this exercise. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. expand Floor Plans.Creating. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. the host group is also updated automatically. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. In another exercise. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. click Training Files. After you create a model group. you add the new model group to a previously created group. The new group is considered nested within the host group.

4 On the Edit toolbar. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. Creating and Placing a Group | 847 . and click OK. 3 Draw a selection box around the kitchen. click (Group). enter Typical Kitchen.2 Enter ZR. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.

The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 848 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. select the center control for the group origin. 8 On the View toolbar. Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area.

12 On the Design Bar. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. and click Create Instance. Creating and Placing a Group | 849 . expand Model. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. right-click Typical Kitchen. under Groups. click Modify.

850 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 14 On the Edit toolbar. click (Mirror). 15 On the Options Bar.13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. clear Copy.

and on the toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 851 .17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. click (Rotate). 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen.

21 On the Zoom flyout. 852 | Chapter 22 Grouping .19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. click Zoom To Fit. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar.

and click Save. and one rotated. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Modifying a Group | 853 . you make changes to an instance of a group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise.You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. Modifying a Group In this exercise. Save the dataset 22 On the File menu. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. as shown. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.rvt. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. one mirrored. When you finish editing. click Save As.

2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. 7 Click (Exclude group member). and click to select it. 3 Click (Exclude group member). (Include group member). and click to select the wall. and click 4 Move the cursor over the door. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. press TAB to highlight the wall. select the element. NOTE To display an excluded element. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. 5 Click (Exclude group member). press TAB. 854 | Chapter 22 Grouping . and click to select the door. press TAB.

move the cursor to the left. click Modify.8 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Selector. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. 12 On the Design Bar. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. Modifying a Group | 855 . 15 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. click Door. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 13 On the Design Bar. select Basic Wall : Generic . click Wall. clear Tag on Placement.127mm.

21 On the Options Bar. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. Zoom flyout. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group.17 On the Design Bar. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor up. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. click Edit Group. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 23 In the drawing area. 856 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click Zoom To Fit. All other elements in the model are grayed out. click Modify. In edit group mode. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 18 On the View toolbar. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner.

26 Select the opening. you add the Typical Kitchen group. and click OK. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change.25 On the Design Bar. 28 For Base Offset. enter 2134. under Floor Plans. in the Project Browser. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. under Constraints. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. created in an earlier lesson. enter 1000. which acts as the host. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. click Modify. Nesting Groups | 857 . click Finish. for Unconnected Height. Nesting Groups In this exercise. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. double-click First Floor. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Properties.rvt. 29 In the group editor toolbar. and on the Options Bar. and the wall and folding doors for the closet.

4 In the group editor toolbar. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 In the drawing area.2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. select the Typical Kitchen group. 858 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click Edit Group. click (Add to Group).

7 In the group editor toolbar. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. select the wall between the folding doors. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. click Finish. and each of the bifold doors. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. such as text. and filled regions. double-click Second Floor. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. you add door tags to a group. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. and create an attached detail group containing the tags.6 Press TAB. Working with Detail Groups | 859 . Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. such as door and window tags. 8 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. under Floor Plans. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group.

rvt. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. double-click First Floor. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Filled Region. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. 4 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. click to draw a rectangular region. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 860 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.Creating a Detail Group In this exercise.

click Text. 9 On the Options Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 861 . Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click to add an arc leader. 7 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and on the Design Bar. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point.6 Move the cursor down and to the left. and select a point below the left elevator. click Modify. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 12 Enter Tile.

and select the note and the filled region. click Modify. Add a group instance to a different drawing view 19 In the Project Browser. double-click Second Floor.The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. expand Detail. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 18 On the Design Bar. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. as shown. click (Group). 20 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. under Floor Plans. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 862 | Chapter 22 Grouping . Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 16 In the drawing area. under Groups. and click OK.

21 In the drawing area. Because the detail group contains variables. 22 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 3 On the Options Bar. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Zoom To Fit. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. double-click First Floor. click Tag ➤ By Category. click to place the detail group.rvt. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. clear Leader. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. Using Attached Detail Groups | 863 . click Modify 23 On the Zoom flyout.

and click OK. 9 On the Edit toolbar. select Door Tags.4 Place door tags in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. click (Filter Selection). 8 In the Filter dialog. 7 On the Options Bar. as shown: 5 On the Design Bar. draw a selection box around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 864 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click Check None. click (Group). click Modify.

Using Attached Detail Groups | 865 . 14 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. double-click Second Floor. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 11 In the Project Browser. 13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. for Attached Detail Group Name. click Place Detail. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. under Floor Plans. therefore. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. and click OK. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags.10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog.

and click Open. 5 In the New Project dialog. 3 For File name. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. In this case. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu. and click Save. and click OK.rvt. under Groups\Model. When you load the group from the library into a new project. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor.rvt. click Desktop. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. verify that Project is selected. for Create new. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units.16 On the Design Bar. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. 866 | Chapter 22 Grouping . you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. accept the default template file. and click Save Group. click Modify. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. select 2 Bedroom Unit. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). browse to the Desktop. click OK. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click New ➤ Project. verify that Same as group name is selected.

15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. and expand Model. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.rvt.A warning dialog is displayed. Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. click Training Files. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. and on the Options Bar. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. and click Create Instance. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. expand Groups. When a group is converted to a link. Saving and Loading Groups | 867 . click Link. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Use Existing. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar.

18 In the Project Browser. click OK.17 On the Design Bar. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. verify that Attached Details is selected only. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog.rvt file is added as a link to the project. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Modify. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. select the linked Revit model. click Remove Link. 24 In the message dialog. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. click Bind. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 868 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and the link is removed. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. expand Revit Links. and click OK. 23 In the confirmation dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. 20 On the Options Bar.

Site 23 In this tutorial. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to add and modify site components within a project. 869 .

Using Site Tools In this lesson. right-click in the Design Bar. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 870 | Chapter 23 Site . This project file was created using the default metric template. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project.rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and walkways. The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. convert the data to a table. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. you create a toposurface using two different methods. click Toposurface. In the final exercises. and then modify the data. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. islands. click Point. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_First_Project. and click Site. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Site. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. You add property lines manually. expand Floor Plans. you add a building pad to the site. In the second part of this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. Using the first method. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. expand Views (all). Creating a Toposurface In this exercise.

8 On the Options Bar. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. Creating a Toposurface | 871 . A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. Use the following illustration as a reference. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm.

10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. click Site Settings. under Increment. 11 On the Design Bar. 12000 mm. 12 On the Settings menu.TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. enter 1500 mm. and 18000 mm absolute elevations. 15000 mm. Use the following illustration as a reference. and click OK. under Additional Contours. click Finish Surface. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. 872 | Chapter 23 Site .

23 Click the Level 1 text. click Model Graphics Style. 18 In the Project Browser. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. Before importing the contour data. and click Shading with Edges. 16 On the View toolbar. 19 On the Design Bar. Creating a Toposurface | 873 . enter 1000 mm. 15 On the View Control Bar. click . rename the level Base Site Elevation. rename the level Basement.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. under Views (all). and double-click South. on the Standard toolbar. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. 21 Click the Level 2 text. and press ENTER. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 14 On the View toolbar. click Modify. click Yes. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. click to delete it. Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. modify the level names and elevations. click the elevation value. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views.

select Preserve colors. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Under Import or Link. 31 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. under Views (all). 25 On the File menu. click Pin Position. clear Current view only and choose Select for Layers. double-click Site. Click Open. click Modify. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. Until it is exploded. click Modify. it is considered an import symbol. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark.24 In the Project Browser. 28 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 874 | Chapter 23 Site . Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Under Layer/Level Colors. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. 29 Select the imported topography. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. 30 On the Edit menu.

38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. 34 Under Visibility. Creating a Toposurface | 875 . 32 On the View menu. When you select the import symbol. click Toposurface. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. and click OK. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. clear C_INDX. when the edges highlight. and then click OK. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. clear Elevations. select it. 36 On the Design Bar. click the Annotation Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics.

Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 39 On the Design Bar. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. “Adding Property Lines” on page 876. 876 | Chapter 23 Site . Adding Property Lines In this exercise. 43 On the File menu. and click Save. click . click Save As. this project file is required in its current state. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. click Finish Surface. 40 On the View toolbar. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. you add property lines using two methods. name the project Site-in progress. 42 On the View toolbar. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. Using the second method. Using the first method.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. 45 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt.

This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. Select and delete the right vertical line. click Lines. select Create property lines by sketching. Using the 3-point Arc tool. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. click Lines. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. On the Design Bar. If you have not completed the previous exercise. do so before continuing. click Property Line. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Click Modify. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. add an arc line on the right. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. Adding Property Lines | 877 . Although you can use your preferred sketching method. and click OK. Site-in progress. double-click Site.

14 In the Property Lines dialog. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. 15 Starting in Row #1. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. click 12 On the Design Bar. when they highlight. 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E 878 | Chapter 23 Site . A warning dialog is displayed. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. 8 On the Options Bar. click OK. select Edit Table. click OK. on the Standard toolbar. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. click Finish Sketch. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. 9 In the warning dialog. click Property Line. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ to delete them. select the lines.6 On the Design Bar. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. and click OK. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch.

notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. 20 Click Load. 22 In the Tags dialog. Before adding property line segment tags. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. click the Imported Categories tab. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click to place the property lines. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. This means there is no gap in the property lines. Adding Property Lines | 879 . 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. click Training Files. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor.dwg and click OK. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. click Visibility/Graphics. 19 In the Tags dialog.Notice that after you complete the last line. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. If the gap is not closed. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 25 Under Visibility.rfa. 23 On the View menu. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. 16 Click OK. and click OK.

clear Leader.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Model Graphics Style. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. 880 | Chapter 23 Site . “Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings” on page 880. In the final step. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. and click Shading with Edges. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. The tags display more prominently in this view. In this exercise. click to place it. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. this project file is required in its current state. click Tag ➤ By Category. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. In the next exercise. 27 On the Options Bar. you created two sets of property lines. right-click in the Design Bar. 31 On the File menu. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 30 On the View Control Bar. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. and click Drafting. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography.

7 Click OK. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. Under Line Pattern. click Site Settings. for Subcategory. Under Range Type. 9 In the Site Settings dialog.rvt. In the Object Styles dialog. select Single Value. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. enter the name Working Contour. and click Wireframe. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. enter 1000. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 881 . Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. select a shade of Brown. under Contour Line Display. 10 Under Additional Contours. click Object Styles. 2 On the Settings menu. Under Subcategory. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. select Topography.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Working Contour. and click OK. Under Line Color.0 mm. Site-in progress. specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. click New. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. click Model Graphics Style. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. select Dash dot.

11 Click OK. such as material. 882 | Chapter 23 Site . In the next exercise. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. The object style subcategory. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. click Close. parking areas. you create topographic subregions to define roads. Working Contour. and islands. “Creating Topographic Subregions” on page 882. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. parking areas. The next exercise requires a new dataset. In this exercise. you create subregions in order to define roads. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. 12 On the File menu. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. and islands.

sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. try to replicate the location and proportion. Creating Topographic Subregions | 883 . the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. click Training Files.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. and open Metric\m_Site. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. click Subregion. click Lines.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Design Bar. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. Although the exact dimensions are not important. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.

click Shading with Edges. and click OK. enter Parking for Name. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog. click Finish Sketch. 9 On the View menu. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. select Site . under Materials and Finishes. click Properties. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Design Bar. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise.NOTE In the Metric dataset. under Identity Data. 6 In the Materials dialog. When you finish the sketch in a later step. 884 | Chapter 23 Site .Tarmacadam for Name. click the Value for Material. and click OK.

Delete overlapping lines. click Finish Sketch. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. click Model Graphics Style. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. Creating Topographic Subregions | 885 . Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. click Edit Boundary. click Model Graphics Style. and click Shading with Edges. expand Schedules/Quantities.Tarmacadam. they display within this schedule. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. 17 On the View Control Bar. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. As you create new subregions. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. double-click Site. 12 On the View Control Bar. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. and double-click Topography Schedule.Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . 18 In the Project Browser. double-click Topography Schedule. and click Hidden Line. Notice that the project area has increased. TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. 14 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps.

and click OK. under Identity Data. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. 29 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. 20 On the View Control Bar. enter Island . and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog. and click OK. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. In this training project. click Lines. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Value for Material. select Site . click Model Graphics Style.Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. 30 In the Project Browser. click Subregion. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click Model Graphics Style. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. 26 In the Materials dialog. under Floor Plans. double-click Topography Schedule. 24 On the Design Bar. 23 In the upper-right parking area. 28 On the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. Within each subregion.Grass for Name. 22 On the Design Bar. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. under Materials and Finishes. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and click Hidden Line. click Properties. click Finish Sketch. 886 | Chapter 23 Site . and click Shading with Edges.Grass for Name. double-click Site.

You must sketch each region separately. 34 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Design Bar.Grass. under Floor Plans. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration.Cast-in-Situ Concrete . Using the techniques learned in previous steps. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. click Lines. Name each region Island . under Schedules/Quantities.Grass. double-click Topography Schedule. click Subregion.31 In the Project Browser. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. double-click Site.walkway. 32 In the Project Browser. Notice that the schedule has been updated. under Floor Plans. and apply the material Site . and apply the material Concrete . Creating Topographic Subregions | 887 . Name the subregion Walkway. double-click Site.

so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. 38 In the Project Browser. there is still only one toposurface. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. 39 On the File menu. click Save As. 37 On the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. click Finish Sketch. double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the schedule has been updated.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. 888 | Chapter 23 Site .

the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. 3 On the Options Bar. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. Site tutorial-in progress. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. click Modify. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser.40 Navigate to your preferred folder. this project file is required in its current state. 2 Select the toposurface. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. Grading the Toposurface | 889 .rvt. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. and click OK. double-click Site. When you use the grading tool. select Existing for Phase Created. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. A warning dialog is displayed. “Using Phasing” on page 992. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. “Grading the Toposurface” on page 889. see the tutorial. and click Save. click .rvt. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. 5 On the Design Bar. under Phasing.

and click Select and Edit. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. 890 | Chapter 23 Site . select Copy Internal Points. click Graded Region. Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 8 Select the topographic surface. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area.6 On the Design Bar. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points.

13 Press DELETE.10 Press DELETE. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. and click Hidden Line. demolished. Grading the Toposurface | 891 . and new. click Model Graphics Style. 11 On the View Control Bar. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing.

15 On the Options Bar.Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 20 On the View toolbar. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. click . 18 On the View toolbar. and click Shading with Edges. 17 On the Design Bar. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click . and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Point. click Finish Surface. 19 On the View Control Bar. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 892 | Chapter 23 Site . click Model Graphics Style.

Only the graded topography displays. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Adding a Building Pad | 893 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you create a building pad. click View Properties.The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. and click OK. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. Site tutorial-in progress. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. “Adding a Building Pad” on page 893. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. under Phasing. When you add a building pad. specify Existing for Phase. only the original toposurface displays. this project file is required in its current state. Therefore. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 On the File menu. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. you can delete it. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and delete it.rvt. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. 23 Select the toposurface. under Phasing. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. click Save. click View Properties. 24 On the View menu. and click OK. specify New Construction for Phase.

If you have an existing building model.Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. 894 | Chapter 23 Site . sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. double-click Site. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style. NOTE By default. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. click Pad. the Pick Walls command is active. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and click Hidden Line. 4 On the Design Bar. click Lines. under Floor Plans.

click Save. Notice the new 10 On the File menu. click building pad. Adding Site Components In this exercise. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. click Model Graphics Style.6 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click 9 On the View toolbar. 8 On the View toolbar. . . 11 Proceed to the next exercise. “Adding Site Components” on page 895. 7 On the View Control Bar. and click Shading with Edges. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Adding Site Components | 895 . this project file is required in its current state.

click Parking Component. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad.90 deg. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.rvt.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click Site. Site tutorial-in progress. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar. and select the parking space. 896 | Chapter 23 Site . 3 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area.

. under Floor Plans. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Site Component. double-click Site. Notice the new Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. . click 9 On the View toolbar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click parking spaces. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. Adding Site Components | 897 . 8 On the View toolbar. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space.7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space.

12 In the Type Selector. 898 | Chapter 23 Site . choose any tree type. 13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. 14 On the View toolbar. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. click .

this project file is required in its current state. click . 16 On the File menu. In the following illustration. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Tag All Not Tagged. click Save.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. “Tagging Site and Parking Components” on page 899. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered.15 On the View toolbar. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 899 . Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. Site tutorial-in progress. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

and click OK. 4 Under Available fields. and click Add. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value.rvt. and click Apply. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 7 On the File menu. 900 | Chapter 23 Site . Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. this project file is required in its current state. click Schedule/Quantities. In the following exercise. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Site tutorial-in progress. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Apply. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. select Mark. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. and click OK. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. “Creating Parking Space Schedules” on page 900. 5 On the View menu. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. select Parking for Category. 8 Proceed to the next exercise.3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you create a parking schedule. click Hidden Line. click Save. click the Fields tab.

number the first three spaces consecutively. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. 12 In the Site plan. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. 8 Under Fields. select Mark. under Space. click Save. 14 In the Parking Schedule. and click Add. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 901 . zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces.5 Under Available fields. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. finish numbering the remaining spaces. enter Size. The parking schedule is displayed. 13 In the Parking Schedule. under Space. and under Heading. 10 In the Project Browser. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. click Close Hidden Windows. 15 On the File menu. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. 7 Under Fields. select Type. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. double-click Site. If necessary. 6 Click the Formatting tab. select Type. and under Heading. and click OK. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. 11 On the Window menu. click Tile. 9 On the Window menu. enter Space.

902 | Chapter 23 Site .

you use the structural tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to create a building model skeleton. you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model. 903 . and beams to Level 1. you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it.Structural 24 In this tutorial. After completing level 1. You begin by adding the structural walls. In the final lesson. columns.

under Import or Link. 904 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. specify the following: ■ Select Link (instead of import). 4 In the Import/Link dialog. under Views (all). you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. and select Metric\m_Wall_Import.rvt. go to the Project Browser. The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls. You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open. and open Metric\m_Structural. Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file. Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise.dwg. 2 On the File menu. click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. If necessary.Adding Structural Walls In this lesson. under Floor Plans. and double-click Level 2. click Training Files. you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls.

Structural_tutorial. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan. “Sketching Structural Walls” on page 905.■ ■ Select Current view only. right-click in the Design Bar and click Structural. Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the structural tab is not displayed. select Invert colors. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model. Select All for Layers. 7 Click Open. you imported a DWG file. and select Origin to origin.rvt. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 8 On the File menu. select Automatically place. you turn off the visibility of the DWG file. Sketching Structural Walls | 905 . In this exercise. This file is used in the next exercise. After you trace the walls. 6 Under Positioning. to trace the initial set of structural walls. click Save As.

7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain. their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing. 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines. 5 In the Type Selector. Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways. In addition. rather than the height. you add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall. In the steps that follow. First. specify the following: ■ Select Depth. select Basic Wall: Generic . Click . and click to specify the wall endpoint. 8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. 6 On the Options Bar.Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu. 906 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.200mm. you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. ■ ■ ■ Select Chain. click Structural Wall. This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them.

click . and click to complete the chain of walls. 10 Move the curser to the right. 11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left. Sketching Structural Walls | 907 . and click the next line intersection.9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection. 13 On the View toolbar. 12 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the next wall endpoint. click Modify to finish the sketch.

Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction. you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking View tools to modify the 3D view. 17 Using the bulleted steps below. zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C. and double-click Level 2. On the Options Bar. click Structural Wall. ■ ■ 908 | Chapter 24 Structural . notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected. 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Use the Dynamic 14 In the Project Browser. 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines. sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. expand Floor Plans. in the View toolbar. ■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C.TIP If necessary. When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain. expand Views (all).

Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. 26 On the Options Bar. Click to create a three-point arc.dwg and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics.200mm. click . click the Imported Categories tab. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser. ■ Sketching Structural Walls | 909 . clear m_Wall_Import. 21 On the View menu. click Modify to end the wall chain. 22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 19 On the View toolbar. specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain. click Structural Wall. 23 Under Visibility. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. 25 In the Type Selector.18 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. select Basic Wall: Generic .

28 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. click . This is the left extent of the arc. 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right. 31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown.27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc. 910 | Chapter 24 Structural . This is the right extent of the arc. Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees. 29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown. Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall.

click the value. 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm. enter 1500. click Modify. 34 Select the horizontal wall. Sketching Structural Walls | 911 . If it is not. and press Enter. click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C. and press ENTER. enter 1500.32 On the Design Bar.

Both walls are 1200 mm long. you create the final structural walls for the project. 38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown. Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint and wall centerline shown in the illustration below. In the steps that follow.35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. clear Chain. click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. 912 | Chapter 24 Structural . 36 On the Design Bar.

that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise. you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls.rvt. 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls. Floor Plans. click Save. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 913 . In the next exercise. You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. You then make minor modifications to their position.39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown. Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps. In this exercise. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls. After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. in its current state. double-click Level 2. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. This project file is required. 42 On the File menu. click . “Dimensioning and Modifying Walls” on page 913. Structural_tutorial. under Views (all). you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant. click Modify. Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser. 40 On the Design Bar. 41 On the View toolbar.

5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall. click Dimension. click Options to specify the wall pick options. Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 914 | Chapter 24 Structural . In the Auto Dimension Options dialog. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor to the left. the Options button becomes available. 4 On the Options Bar. select it. click Modify. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select . After you select Entire Walls. and when it highlights. select Intersecting Walls. Select Entire Walls for Pick. Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. and click to place the dimension as shown.

Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown.8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 915 . 9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal.

13 On the File menu. to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial. In this exercise. in its current state. In the next lesson. joists. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced. and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. “Adding Structural Columns and Beams” on page 916. This project file is required. you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant.11 Click the temporary dimension value. several different beam types. 916 | Chapter 24 Structural . you add structural columns. click Save. 12 On the Edit menu. and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B. Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. click Undo Edit Dimension Length. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model.

you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary. 6 Add a column to C1 as shown. Adding Structural Columns | 917 . TIP When adding the column. 5 On the Options Bar. Structural_tutorial. you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections. press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. zoom in to place the column. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. In addition. you use the grid intersection tool. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. If necessary. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. 4 In the Type Selector. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. select Height and specify Level 2. 2 On the View menu. and you add a column outside the grids. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Structural Column.

7 Add similar columns to C2. and C5. click Grid Intersection. Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar. This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids. C3. and A. and select grids 1-5. 918 | Chapter 24 Structural . 9 Use a crossing selection.

Adding Structural Columns | 919 . Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A. 10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below.TIP To create the crossing selection. 12 Press the SPACEBAR again. Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR. specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5. 13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position. Columns A3-5 are shown below.

Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar. click Finish. 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. 20 On the Design Bar. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below.14 If necessary. 920 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Structural Column. 17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. This completes this set of columns. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. 15 On the Options Bar. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR. click Modify. click Grid Intersection. click Finish. Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. zoom out until you can see all the grids. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5. Columns B3-5 are shown below. you could not have rotated them independently of each other. 21 Select column A5 and delete it. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5.

click . you learn how to work with these varied conditions. 26 On the File menu. Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions. and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR. you add beams manually. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you used various methods to add structural columns. “Adding Structural Beams and Girders” on page 921. click Save. Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise. As you use the beam tool. click Modify.24 On the Design Bar. In this exercise. and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. In the next exercise. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 921 . This project file is required. you add structural beams to the building model. in its current state. 25 On the View toolbar.

To add a beam using point-to-point insertion. Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 In the Type Selector. 922 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Modify. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. you specify the start and endpoint of the beam. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. double-click Level 2. Structural_tutorial. 7 On the Design Bar. 2 On the View menu. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. Start the beam at the column midpoint and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall centerline.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. click Beam. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. under Floor Plans. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67.

11 On the Options Bar. select Girder for Usage. Use the following table for other conditions. When you use the grid tool to place beams. 10 In the Type Selector. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. if a beam is joined column-to-column. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder. For example. click Beam. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 923 . 14 On the Options Bar. Column Brace Horizontal Bracing Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns.9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first. and then move the cursor up to grid A. the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A. click Grid.7. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2.

23 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4. click Grid. 18 On the Design Bar. press and hold CTRL. 21 On the Design Bar. and select grid C. 24 Select grid 3. enter 8200. click the temporary dimension value. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 17 On the Options Bar. 924 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Finish.16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. click Beam. and press ENTER.

27 Using point-to-point insertion. and for Usage. select Girder. notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids. Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain. Click column B5 to add the first beam. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 925 . Press ESC to end the chain.Notice beams are added between columns. refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. click Finish. select Chain. 25 On the Options Bar. In addition. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain.

28 On the Options Bar. make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines. 30 On the Options Bar. connecting the column at B4. NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4. Press ESC to end the chain. SI. You can also use the shortcut key. select Girder for Usage. select Girder for Usage. 29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4. and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. 926 | Chapter 24 Structural . to snap only to intersections. You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. Press ESC to end the chain.

If the W310x32. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 927 . The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32. 36 On the Options Bar.7 beam had crossed grid A.Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. 34 On the Options Bar. click Grid. 33 Select grid A. click Finish. 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4. and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams. click Grid. it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first.7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly.

click Beam. In the steps that follow. double-click Level 2.37 Select grid B. 45 Specify the beam start point at the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below. 38 On the Options Bar. Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser. you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grid 4 and 5. 928 | Chapter 24 Structural . 43 In the Type Selector. select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm. select Girder for Usage. 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click . click Finish. 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5. 44 On the Options Bar. 39 On the View toolbar.

Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 929 . enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints). click Modify. Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. click . and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. 47 On the Design Bar.46 Move the cursor to the right. 48 On the View toolbar.

In the steps that follow. 930 | Chapter 24 Structural . and click when it intersects grid 2. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. click Beam. you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3. select Girder. 52 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall and grid 3. 50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region. 55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. double-click Level 2.Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser. 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. for Usage. 53 On the Options Bar. and select Chain.

click . Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 931 . 57 On the View toolbar. and click when it intersects grid 1.56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall.

B3 quadrants. in its current state. under Floor Plans. 5 On the Options Bar. “Adding Joists and Purlins ” on page 932. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. 2 Zoom around the A1 . while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. Dataset This exercise requires the project file.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. select Automatic. In this exercise. Structural_tutorial. you add joists and purlins to the building model. You then create a joist array. you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method. For example. This project file is required. 4 In the Type Selector. when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin. for Usage.7. Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser. 932 | Chapter 24 Structural . 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Do not worry about the exact placement at this time. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.58 On the File menu. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise. click Beam. Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid one. you add joists and purlins to the building model. In the next exercise. You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams. 6 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it. click Save. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly. double-click Level 2.

This value was set automatically because when you created the beam. Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary. notice that the Structural Usage value is Joist. on the Edit menu. According to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. you selected the Automatic option. The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1. under Structural. click Array. Create a joist array 12 With the joist selected. 11 Click OK. Adding Joists and Purlins | 933 .7 On the Design Bar. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected. click on the Options Bar. 8 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. 9 With the beam selected. click Modify.

Select 2nd for Move to. ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Enter 14 for Number.13 On the Options Bar. specify the following: Click . This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A. enter 1250 and press ENTER. Make sure the cursor is over grid A. 14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point. Once the direction is set. 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A. 934 | Chapter 24 Structural .

Adding Joists and Purlins | 935 . 18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin. 17 Add a beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown.Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Beam.

style. 936 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Array. and purlins. 22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown to specify the array start point. 20 On the Edit menu. joists. 21 On the Options Bar. Enter 7 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage parameter value.Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders. and color within the Object Styles dialog. specify the following: Click . NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right. ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. and click. 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps.

clear all options except Structural Framing (Girder) and Structural Framing (Joist). change the following instance parameters: ■ Select Moment Connection Last. and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view.The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. and click OK. click . click . Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2. 26 In the Filter dialog. 25 On the Options Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. Adding Joists and Purlins | 937 .

click Save. You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. 938 | Chapter 24 Structural . you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. In this exercise. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. “Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels” on page 938. click . This project file is required. and notice the connection symbols display. Click OK. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you create new levels. In the next lesson. 29 On the Design Bar. and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. 30 On the View toolbar. This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level. in its current state. click Modify.■ ■ Select Moment Connection First. 31 On the File menu. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson.

Defining New Levels In this exercise.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Elevations. You need at least 3 meters of space. 2 Select grid 1. double-click Building Elevation. Structural_tutorial. 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels. you create several new levels. Click to add Level 3. click Level. select Make Plan View. Defining New Levels | 939 . Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2. These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2.

Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar. 8 On the File menu. click . Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise. Each level is 3000 mm high. Structural_tutorial. In this exercise. where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. click Save. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.In the Project Browser. This project file is required. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. Dataset This exercise requires the project file.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown. “Duplicating the Existing Design” on page 940. These levels that are required in the next exercise. in its current state. you created three new levels. notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed. you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels. 940 | Chapter 24 Structural .

2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. you copied the existing structural elements on Level 1 and used the paste-align command to create the structural framing on the upper levels. In the next lesson. click Copy to Clipboard. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. click Save. 8 On the File menu. In this exercise. under Elevations. 5 In the Select Levels dialog. double-click Building Elevation. click OK. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. press and hold CTRL. it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces. select Level 3. 6 In the Select Levels dialog. in its current state. 7 In the Project Browser. and select Levels 4 and 5. This project file is required. 3 On the Edit menu. Make sure the entire building model is included. Duplicating the Existing Design | 941 . Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Edit menu. “Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation” on page 942.

at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3. 4 On the Options Bar. Structural_tutorial. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. click Modify. 6 On the Design Bar. You can now view the new elevation.Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson. make sure Attach to Grid is selected. 5 Place the cursor over grid C. Elevation 1-a. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. double-click Level 2. 942 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Framing Elevation. in the Project Browser. Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. and click. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels. 2 Zoom out so you can see the entire building model. under Floor Plans. you create a framing elevation.

8 On the File menu. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. in its current state. Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial. Adding Structural Braces | 943 . you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces. You are ready to add the structural braces. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Structural_tutorial. In this exercise. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse. you add c-channel bracing to the building model. Notice the stick framing representation. you add structural braces to the building model. “Adding Structural Braces” on page 943.7 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view. This project file is required. In the next exercise. click Save. You then array the braces to the remaining levels. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

When adding the braces. click Brace. 4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint below the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects. you use point-to-point insertion. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints. 5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown. you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable. selectM_ C-Channel: C75x7. select the view crop box. Also select grids 2 and 3 and drag them until they appear as shown. and using the shape grips. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects. 944 | Chapter 24 Structural . 3 In the Type Selector.4. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces.

The brace displays. 7 Enter SE and click the endpoint below the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4. 6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. The second brace is displayed. Adding Structural Braces | 945 .

Select 2nd for Move to. 11 On the Options Bar. The braces are arrayed to Level 1. Enter 4 for Number. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point. 9 Select both braces on Level 4. click Array. click Modify. Select Constrain. 946 | Chapter 24 Structural . 10 On the Edit menu. specify the following: Click . click Tag All Not Tagged. 13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint.Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate.

17 On the File menu. 16 On the View toolbar. click Save. In this exercise. and click OK. Adding Structural Braces | 947 . click . you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array. select Structural Framing Tags.15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.

948 | Chapter 24 Structural .

They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. doors. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2008. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. however.Sharing Projects 25 When working with large building projects. All other team members can view this workset. they cannot make changes to it. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. 949 . A workset is a collection of building elements. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. called Worksharing. and so on. floors. Using Worksharing. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. such as walls. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. You can enable Worksharing for any project. In this tutorial. stairs.

In the lessons and exercises that follow. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. and click Editable. When setting up Worksharing. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. When you are working on a shared project. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. such as annotations and dimensions. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. you specify an active workset. To make a workset editable. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. Project size 950 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. Elements specific to a view. you can select which worksets are open or closed. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. In the next exercise. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. The first time you activate worksets within a project. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. After learning the fundamentals. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. go to the Worksets dialog. select the desired workset. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. you must first enable Worksharing. After the project is shared. use Element Borrowing. Working in a shared project In a shared project. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view.

the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. Regardless of the default setting. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. Instead. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. When you create a new workset. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. not including the Project Standards. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. As new members create worksets for their own use. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 951 . Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. for a typical project. In a multi-story structure. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. You should have at least one workset for each person. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. designers work in teams. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. Experience has shown that. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. with each assigned a specific functional task. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. On this tab.The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. and View worksets. Shared Levels and Grids. When creating the new worksets. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. each team member has control over a portion of the design. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. In most projects. such as a tenant interior. Team member roles Typically.

they are not propagated to the rest of the team. As you work.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. you make that workset editable by you. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. however. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. When you save to the central file. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. On the Options Bar. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. the file is saved as the central file. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. When you save to the central file. within the local file. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. your changes propagate to the entire team. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. When finished or at regular intervals. This is called “Selective Open. For example. When you save locally (to your local file). This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. you can select which workset is active. This makes them available to other team members. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. your changes are saved. Generally. if a workset named Interior was created. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. proceeds as usual. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. After saving to the central file. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. 952 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Therefore. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. However. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. you should then save to your local file. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available.

you work no differently then you would in the office. click Training Files. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. and then save the local file. if you know who checked out the required workset. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. In this situation. and open Common\c_Worksets. In this instance. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 953 . you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. In the next exercise. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. In this conceptual exercise. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. and make that workset editable. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported. Alternatively. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. using VPN. save to the central file. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. reload the latest changes from the central file. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. To do this. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user.rvt. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. you should check out the Materials workset. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. make any required worksets editable. When working remotely." Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. for instance.

When you enable worksharing. clear Families. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. In this simple training project. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. 4 In the Worksets dialog. In this case. 954 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . a small number of team members are working on the building model.Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. under Show. For example. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. another is assigned the interior layout. and Views. The Worksets dialog is displayed. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset name. click Worksets. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. 3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. For training purposes. and notice all are editable by you. imagine four users including yourself. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. Only User-Created worksets should display. Project Standards. Your username displays as the present owner. Therefore. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names. ■ 6 Under Show.

click New. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. click . stairs. select Interior Layout for Workset. expand Views (all). 11 Enter Furniture Layout. When you initially activate Worksharing. you can rename the default workset. Because the interior walls appear in many views. 12 In the Worksets dialog. select Workset1. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell.Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog. under Identity Data. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. currently named Workset1. 18 On the Options Bar. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. and click OK. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. 22 On the Options Bar. it is better to make them visible by default. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. and double-click Level 1. 13 Click Rename. 9 Click OK. In this training file. including the interior doors. however. 8 Enter the name Interior Layout. expand Floor Plans. clear Visible by default in all views. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. under Identity Data. 24 Select all of the interior elements. 15 In the Worksets dialog. 17 In the drawing area. type the name Exterior Shell. click . Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. click OK. 14 In the Rename dialog. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. 10 Click New. 21 Select one of the interior walls. and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 955 . The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. 20 Click OK. and walls. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. You do.

You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. 27 On the View menu. select Interior Layout for Workset. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. If any interior elements remain. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. click the Worksets tab. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. 25 On the Options Bar. click the Worksets tab. 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 30 Click OK. click . 31 On the View menu. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. click Visibility/Graphics.The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. under Identity Data. 956 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects .

If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. make modifications to the building model. select Interior Layout for Workset. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. click . If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. and click OK. you create your local file. 3 Click Open. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. under Identity Data. Create the central file 38 On the File menu. Now that you have created the central file. If you have not yet completed the exercise. 45 On the File menu. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. click Close. 40 Click Save. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. Working Individually with Worksets | 957 . 39 In the Save As dialog. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. 35 In the drawing area. 2 In the Open dialog. 44 Click OK. double-click Level 2. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. In this exercise. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. click Non Editable. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and click OK. 43 On the right side of the dialog. In addition. select the central file and.33 Select Interior Layout. 42 In the Worksets dialog. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. click Worksets. 34 In the Project Browser. 36 On the Options Bar. “Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets” on page 953. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. select Specify. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. select all of the interior elements of the building model. click Open. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. check out worksets. under Views (all). make sure you remember the location of this central file. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. click Save As. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. under Open Worksets. you enabled Worksharing on a project. please do so before continuing.

select all the User-Created worksets. Next. Before working on the model. 5 On the File menu. click . you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. In this case. and click Save. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. and double-click Level 1. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. 10 In the Worksets dialog. Checking out worksets 9 On the File menu. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 14 In the Project Browser. 11 Click OK. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 958 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . select Interior Layout for Name. select Interior Layout. 6 In the Save As dialog. click Modify. and select Yes for Editable. 7 In the File Save Options dialog.4 In the Opening Worksets dialog. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. On the Options Bar. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and click OK. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. If this is selected. 16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. expand Views (all). 12 On the Window menu. 13 On the Worksets toolbar. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. expand Floor Plans. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. notice the Editable Only option. click Worksets. 17 On the Options Bar. click Options. Verify that it is cleared. You have created a local file which is for your use only. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. click Save As. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. and click OK.

23 Click OK. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. under Identity Data.126mm Partition (2-hr). The precise location is not important. 29 Using the following illustration as a guide. you can still edit this wall. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. 22 On the File menu. 26 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. Working Individually with Worksets | 959 . Because this element is not owned by another user. 21 Click OK. 28 In the Type Selector.18 In the Element Properties dialog. In the Worksets dialog. click Worksets. If it was owned by another user. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. and click OK. 25 Delete the door. In this case. click . a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. click Wall. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. 19 Under Constraints. 20 On the Options Bar. 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. select Basic Wall: Interior . notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. Modify the building model 24 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. however.

In this particular case. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central.30 On the Design Bar. When working in your local file. Saving your work 35 On the File menu. The Save to Central dialog is displayed with the path to the central file automatically filled in. click Door. save to central. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. add two door openings into the rooms you created. 36 In the Save to Central dialog. In addition. select: ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets 960 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. displays the workset as well as the element type. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 31 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. 33 In the Type Selector. click Save to Central. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. it is recommended. and save locally immediately afterward. you should relinquish all worksets. At the end of a work session. click Modify. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. you should perform regular saves. Borrowed Elements is selected. By default. If you place the cursor over any of the new elements. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. which matches the information in the Status Bar. 34 Using the following illustration as a guide. a tooltip. Whenever you save. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it.

and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. 3 On the Settings menu. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. return to the Settings dialog. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. In the following section of this exercise. click Options. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. For training purposes.■ Save the local file after “Save to Central” 37 Click OK. In addition. please do so before continuing. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. and click OK. one user has already created a local file. select Specify. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. 7 In the Open dialog. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. skip the following section. This is a system setting. specifically sequenced.rvt. under Open Worksets. and reset the Username to your computer login name. and click OK. User 2: Create a local file. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. and proceed to Creating a local copy. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. two users access the central file through a network connection. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. checked out worksets. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. and reload the latest changes. Throughout the process. 4 Click the General Tab and. If you have not yet completed these exercises. For training purposes. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 961 . make elements editable. consider that person to be User 1. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. leave this file open in its current state. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. select the central file and. under Username. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. click Open. each user must check out worksets. You modified the building model. select all the User-Created worksets. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. instructions are staggered. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. you created your local file. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. 8 Click Open. In this exercise. enter User 2. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2.

and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 11 In the Save As dialog. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. You are now the owner of that workset. and double-click Level 1. and click OK. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. If it is not open. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated.” 28 Click OK. 22 Click OK. expand Views (all). 23 In the Project Browser. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. 26 On the File menu. click Worksets. 18 On the File menu. click Save As.10 On the File menu. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). click Options. it becomes the active workset. 21 Select the Interior Layout workset. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click Save to Central. and click Save. 962 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. and double-click Level 1. and select Yes for Editable. modify the building model. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. User 1: Check out worksets. 14 On the File menu. open it now. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 15 Select the Exterior Shell workset. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. If you only have one workset checked out. 24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. 12 In the File Save Options dialog. 27 In the Save to Central dialog. click Worksets. expand Floor Plans. and select Yes for Editable. 16 Click OK. This file is for your use only. You now have a local copy of the project. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2.

A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan.” 38 Click OK. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. click Component. and click OK. However. 46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. and click OK. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. select the lower exterior wall. 42 On the Project Browser. and check out additional worksets 39 On the File menu. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. right-click Copy of Level 1. 43 On the Project Browser. 35 Using the following illustration as a guide. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. under Views (all). right-click Level 1. click Save to Central. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. User 1: Reload latest worksets. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. under Floor Plans. click Worksets. 40 On the File menu. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. 36 On the File menu. and click Rename. click Save to Central. Before adding any furniture.” 34 Click OK. 33 In the Save to Central dialog. 32 On the File menu. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 963 . you should create a furniture plan view. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. and click Duplicate. 41 Select Furniture Layout. 45 On the Project Browser. When you save to central. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 44 In the Rename View dialog. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. The changes User 2 made are apparent. Click Yes. select Yes for Editable.30 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Reload Latest.

Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. 56 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 61 On the File menu. the Visible by default option was not selected. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. choose any desk. click Save to Central. 49 On the View menu. 64 Click OK. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. NOTE System families. click Modify. 65 On the File menu. and click Properties. 51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” 67 Click OK. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. click Edit/New. are placed under Project Standards. and click OK. and click inside any room. under Show. click the Worksets tab. 60 Click OK 3 times. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser.47 In the Type Selector. click Save to Central. 59 In the Rename dialog. select Project Standards. 63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. Therefore. such as Wall Types.” 54 Click OK. 66 In the Save to Central dialog. leave this file open in its current state. 964 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 55 On the File menu.200mm. rather than Families. enter Exterior Wall . click Visibility/Graphics. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 53 In the Save to Central dialog. 52 On the File menu. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. click Reload Latest. click Worksets. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 58 In the Type Properties dialog. 62 In the Worksets dialog. and click OK. 57 In the Element Properties dialog. click Rename. 48 On the Design Bar.

Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). There are specific instructions for each user. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 965 . This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. select Save to Central. leave this file open in its current state. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. Checking out worksets. and click OK. select the following. click Options. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. you need to set up your central and local files. NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial. 3 In the Save As dialog. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” In this exercise. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. Each user checked out worksets. click Training Files. This exercise requires two users and. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. and these problems are rectified. Each user must have network access to the central file. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. As each of you work. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. throughout this training. you save the dataset as a central file. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. select Reload Latest. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. select Make this a Central File after save. 70 In the Save to Central dialog. In subsequent steps. “Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users” on page 965.rvt. 5 Click Save. Save training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. and click OK. modified the building model. finished the previous workset exercises. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. click Save As. and save 68 On the File menu. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. In the final exerci